Home

SERVICE MANUAL

Contents

1. 29 1 s 8 NVA Q INMQ 0T6 91 01 0 TF L 551 of Jo or 8l Nd 5017 amp k 9121 0291 T3YTRST 1651 6291 1941 e 0251 9151 801 NN 4 IN TOSS YS 1631 MY VX goa 6241 6241 91 01 s 9 20
2. 5 19 04 1eddn Jejjo1 dn yoid Jejjo1 paa ddd youms JEMO ddd SJPPIN uoinj Pee SJPPIN dn Xoid ddd Jeddn youms uoinjo paa youms ddd youms jeddn ddd 9 30 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 4 3 General operation B Explanation of operation A From power on to the ready state 1 When the copier power is switched ON power is also supplied to the PFP At this time the PFP tray motors M27 M28 and M29 are turned ON in the CCW direction causing each tray to start to rise When the rising trays s
3. LCD board LCD KEY board 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 1 Introduction The following diagram shows the processes beginning at the Scanner section to the Printer section where light is transferred to the photosensitive drum ASIC which is short for Application Specific IC is for a specific use Scanner Image processor Printer Original System board SYS Laser drive board Scanner Image processing LDR i CCD processing Print control SLG LG Polygonal motor drive board i LGC board Semicon device Photosen sitive drum The following table shows the functions carried out by the two image processing boards Board Number of ASIC Fanction High quality image processing image memory editing editing processing gamma correction tone processing external output system interface SLG board PWA F SLG 300 PLG board Smoothing processing external input system interface image area PWA F PLG 300 control laser related control Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 1 6570 5570 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 2 Image Processing Circuit 6 2 1 Overview Unlike existing analog copiers where r
4. Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC M Slot exhaust fan motor exit fan motor 1 Remove the exhaust fan duct 2 screws 2 Remove the slot exhaust fan duct 2 screws 3 Remove each of the 2 screws Note When installing the slot exhaust fan motor and the exit fan motor install in the direc tion shown in the figure N Reversal Fan Motor 1 Open the exit door and draw out the ADU unit 2 Remove the reversal fan motor bracket 2 Screws connector Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 10 e m 6570 5570 DRUM 3 Remove the reversal fan motor from the bracket 2 screws Note Attach the reversal fan motor in the direc tion shown in the figure 6570 5570 DRUM 10 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 11 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 11 1 Construction This section describes the belt transport unit excluding the fuser unit Belt transport unit Transfer belt unit Transport guide Belt transport unit Transfer belt cleaning mechanism lock unlock mechanism Lower damp heater unit Copier rear frame Transfer belt drive mechanism Transfer belt contact release mec
5. Clean at Lubricate at Category Item to check 400 000 copies 400 000 copies Replace Remans 340 000 copies 340 000 1000 while Page Item Transfer 89 4 Transfer belt separation D belt auxiliary roller bearing and GCB 90 ADU pick up roller A 91 ADU feed roller Q 92 ADU separation belt A 93 Transport rollers 1 to 4 A A ADU 94 ADU aligning roller 5 95 GCB bush and plastic bush D 96 Drive gear tooth faces W 97 Exit ADU switching gate and Main unit eixt section ADU relay roller 48 PFP pick up roller 100 lt 11 143 gt 49 feed roller 100 24 lt 11 121 gt 50 separation roller 100 14 lt P12 121 gt 51 PFP aligning roller A 5 52 Paper guide 53 Tray drive worm wheel and 12 gear tooth faces 54 PFP drive gear tooth faces 55 GCB bush and plastic bush D 98 ADF pick up roller 400 340 lt 81 118 gt 99 ADF feed roller 400 340 lt 81 114 gt 100 ADF separation pad 400 340 lt P81 153 gt 101 Transport belt 400 340 lt P84 122 gt 102 ADF aligning roller A ADF 103 ADF reversal roller A 104 ADF empty sensor 105 ADF aligning sensor 106 ADF size sensor 107 Exit sensor 108 ADF timing sensor 109 Transport belt cleaning brush 56 LCF pick up roller 400 340 lt 17 119 g
6. Aligning roller Feed roller Pick up roller Transport roller Transport guide 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 2A Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 2 Drive Inlet reversal roller Forward rotation clutch qo SS Transport roller Feed clutch ie e I NG Transport clutch Aligning roller Pick up roller Separation belt Feed roller 15 2 1 ADU exit switching gate drive When the gate solenoid turns ON the link is pulled arrow OD the arm rotates ar row 2 the gate opens and the copied paper is transported to the ADU stack sec tion When the gate solenoid turns OFF the arm returns to its original position arrow 3 by spring force and the copied paper is out put Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 3 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 2 2 Stack guide drive 1 Paper side guide The width guide motor operates in accordance with the size of the selected paper to move the paper side guide to the specified position With each five sheets of paper stacked on the stack section the width guide motor moves the side guide to the left and right to align the paper Paper trailing edge guide The length guide motor operates in accordance with the size of the selected paper to move the paper trailing edge guide to the specified posi tion
7. Group Error code Machine status Paper transport jam inside the copier 1 E01 Paper leading edge not reaching the fuser exit switch E02 Paper trailing edge not passing the fuser exit switch E03 Paper remaining inside the machine at power ON E09 HDD malfunction Image transport ready timeout Paper feeding jam E12 Manual feeding jam E15 Feeding jam from the upper E16 PFP Feeding jam from the middle PFP E17 Feeding jam from the lower E19 Feeding jam from LCF Transport jam to aligning section 1 transport jam 1 Feeding from the upper after feeding E32 E32 Feeding from the middle E33 E33 Feeding from the lower PFP E34 Not reaching the PFP E34 Feeding from the upper PFP Ege j Yansportpath E35 Feeding from the middle PFP E36 E36 Feeding from the lower PFP Cover open jam E41 Copier front cover is opened during copying E47 Exit cover is opened during copying Transport jam in ADU and reversal E50 Paper not reaching the ADU aligning switch section E51 Paper not reaching the ADU transport switch 1 E52 Paper not reaching the ADU transport switch 2 E53 Paper not reaching the PFP upper paper stop switch E54 Paper not reaching the ADU feed switch E55 Paper remaining on transport path when copy finished E56 Paper remaining on PFP transport path after door open close E57 Paper not reaching the re
8. Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 11 6570 5570 PRINTING 9 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 1 General 9 1 1 Functions This unit feeds paper which is set in the LCF the cassette or the manual feed tray to the transfer position The paper feed section is mainly comprises an aligning section large capacity feeder LCF and paper feed pedestal PFP Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 1 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 1 2 Motor drive circuit B Brush motor drive circuit Feed motor M32 FED MOT Driven by IC39 Tray motor M30 TRAY MOT Driven by IC37 Main cleaning motor M11 CLN MOT Driven by IC58 LGC PC board TA8428K Belt cam motor M26 TRB CAM MOT Driven by IC2 LGC PC board TA8428K The block diagram of TA8428K is shown below LGC PC board TA8428K LGC PC board TA8429H Detector for overheating and overvoltage DI1 and DI2 are input terminals for the signals from the microcomputer In the control logic section forward and backward rotation of the motor is controlled ON and OFF based on the signals from the microcomputer Output M M Remarks Brake CW L L H L H L CCW 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 OFF high impedance STOP Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Pulse motor drive circuit Constant voltage bipolar typ
9. Front aligning plate S SD JA Aligning roller L Inlet guide 54 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Draw out the inlet guide while pushing the empty sensor upwards 4 Remove the 2 bracket fixing screws from the timing sensor and the bracket fixing screw from the size sensor and disconnect the connec tors from the sensors L Feed roller 1 Remove the feed unit 2 Remove the inlet guide 3 Remove the E ring bush and spring from the front side 4 Remove the front side plastic ring fastening the feed roller and draw out the roller from the front frame opening M Pick up roller aligning roller R 1 Remove the feed unit Pick up roller 2 Remove the inlet guide 8 Remove the front side E ring and bush 4 Remove the plastic ring fastening the roller and draw out the roller Empty guide Timing sensor Size sensor Feed roller Aligning roller R Pick up roller Plastic ring Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 55 6570 5570 ADF Aligning roller R 2 Remove the inlet guide and remove the timing sensor and size sensor 3 Remove the pulley from the drive section 1 E ring 4 Remove the 2 E r
10. ing codes Operation Code Function Code Function procedure group 101 Drum motor ON 151 OFF 1 102 Toner motor ON 152 OFF 1 103 Polygonal motor mirror 600 dpi ON 153 OFF 1 108 Aligning motor ON 158 OFF 1 109 Pedestal motor ON 159 OFF 1 110 ADU motor ON 160 OFF 1 111 Scraper solenoid ON 161 OFF 1 112 Developer motor ON 162 OFF 1 113 Heat roller motor ON 163 OFF 1 114 Transfer belt motor ON 164 OFF 1 115 Fur brush motor ON 165 OFF 1 116 Auger motor ON 166 OFF 1 117 Laser bias ON 167 OFF 1 118 Laser ON 168 OFF 1 119 Fuser unit motor rotating slowly ON 169 OFF 1 218 Total counter counts 2 219 Reversal fan ON OFF 3 220 ADU transport clutch ON OFF 3 221 ADU aligning clutch ON OFF 3 222 ADU feed clutch ON OFF 3 223 ADU stack clutch ON OFF 3 226 PFP upper feed clutch ON OFF 3 227 PFP middle feed clutch ON OFF 3 228 PFP lower feed clutch ON OFF 3 229 PFP upper aligning feed clutch ON OFF 3 230 PFP middle aligning feed clutch ON OFF 3 231 PFP lower aligning feed clutch ON OFF 3 233 Manual feed motor ON OFF 3 234 Manual feed pick up solenoid ON OFF 3 235 Discharge LED lamp ON OFF 3 236 Exit fan low speed ON OFF 3 237 Exit fan high speed ON OFF 3 239 Main charger fan ON OFF 3 240 Developer fan ON OFF 3 241 Heater fan low speed ON OFF 3 242 Heater fan high speed ON OFF 3 243 Main charger wire cleaner ON reset 2 244 Transfer belt cam motor UP DOWN 3 249 Developer bias D
11. Cassette Change the cassette size on the control panel For details refer to the setting mode 08 item 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 70 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA 1 15 Adjustment of Duplexer 1 15 1 Adjustment of the stack guide unit A Stack guide stop position adjustment When making copies in the double sided mode on the Duplexer make sure that the horizontal deviation on both sides of the paper is less than 2 mm If the deviation is outside of this range follow the procedure below to adjust Stack paper on the stack guide and make sure DI that the gap between the paper and the stack 2mm Wider stopper on the stack guide is 1 0 5mm To ad Adjustment width just the gap loosen the fixing screw on the rear side of the stack guide unit and then make adjustment with the adjusting screw Holizontal width adjustment method Detection switch Narrower gt Eccentric cam B Duplexer horizontal deviation adjustment Holizontal deviation adjustment method When the image on the double sided copy de viates horizontally even after adjustment A Stack frame 1 Loosen the 2 screws for fixing the stack guide unit If the paper drifts toward either the front or Sx the rear side move the stack guide unit toward the opposite side by the
12. 6570 5570 CLEANER 13 12 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 2 Remove the motor bracket 3 screws connec tor and remove the harness from the clamp Note When installing the motor bracket press in clockwise direction of arrow A and se cure 3 When replacing the motor remove the 3 screws and remove the harness from the edge saddle Note When installing the motor pay attention to the position of the harness with respect to the metal plate K Toner bag 1 Remove the 2 coin screws and open the toner bag 2 Draw out the toner bag L Toner full detector 1 Remove the toner bag 2 Disconnect the toner full detector connector 3 Remove the screw on the bracket securing the toner full detector Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 13 13 Toner full detector o 6570 5570 CLEANER M Toner transport auger unit 1 Remove the 5 screws securing the toner trans port auger unit 2 Disconnect the transport auger motor N Toner transport motor 1 Remove the toner transport moto
13. es 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E de bb ddddddd dd Et Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 5 6570 5570 OUTLINE Scanning motor M1 Toner transport motor M15 Drive belt PFP upper feed roller Drive pulley Upper feed roller clutch CL6 Follower pulley PFP upper separation roller Drive wire PFP middle feed roller Toner motor M14 Middle feed roller clutch CL10 Toner transport auger PFP middle separation roller Developer motor M16 Lower feed roller clutch CL11 Paddle PFP lower feed roller Upper magnetic roller PFP lower separation roller Lower magnetic roller Pedestal motor M31 Mixer Lower aligning roller clutch CL9 Drum motor M12 PFP lower aligning roller Drum pulley Drum Middle aligning roller clutch CL8 Drum drive belt middle aligning roller Belt transport unit drive motor M25 Upper aligning roller clutch CL7 Belt transport unit contact release cam motor M26 PFP upper aligning roller Exit roller LCF separation roller ADU reversal transport roller LCF pick up roller Coupli
14. 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 2 10 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Explanation of the items in the Remarks column of the Periodic Inspection Check List 1 Main blade and fur brush If defective cleaning occurs due to the adhesion of paper dust etc the edge of the blade might have been damaged Replace the blade regardless of the number of the copies made so far Also replace the fur brush at this time Recovery blade If the edge of the blade is damaged replace the blade regardless of the number of copies made so far Drum separation claw If the tip of the separation claw has been damaged e g worn coating or separation claw marks are apparent in the copied image replace the claw regardless of the number of copies made so far Clean the tip of the claw by lightly wiping with dry cloth After cleaning be sure to remove bits of lint from the claw In addition be sure to apply patting powder lubricant to the separation claw after cleaning the claw and when replacing the claw or drum Drum Refer to section 3 2 Checking and Cleaning the OPC Drum Air filter Duct filter Replace the air filter if it is heavily dirty Charger wire and case Use a cloth which should be soaked in water and then wrung lightly to clean those Developer material After replacing the developer material be sure to adjust the corresponding auto toner sensor Upper and lower heat rollers Refer t
15. Carriage 1 Copiable length CO o 6570 5570 SCANNER Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 3 Description of Operation 7 3 1 Scanning motor Scaning motor CRG 2 pulley CRG 2 CRG 1 Carriage drive wire 27 Motor pulley 3GT Z24 CMM CL ID cr V Idle pulley 27 Wire windup pulley motor deceleration pulley 39 75 3GT Z28 Optical System rear side Scanner motor drive is transferred to carriages 1 and 2 via the timing belt and the carriage drive wire Initially carriage 1 moves to the home position The actuation of the home switch determines the home position of Carriage 1 assembly During a PRINT cycle carriages 1 and 2 are driven to scan the original document 7 3 2 Document motor The document motor positions the original width indicators to indicate the placement position of the original document when the reproduction ratio is changed from its default setting of 10096 or when a particular paper size is selected from any of the cassette trays 7 3 3 Optical fan motor The optical fan motors rotate to cool the optical unit during copying and stop rotation during standby Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 5 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 4 Drive of the 5 Phase Stepp
16. c 6570 5570 OUTLINE Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC B Scanner Unit B 1 PC board Scanner unit Rear side Name CCD drive PC board PWA F CCD 300 Scanning optical system control PC board PWA F SLG 300 Scanning motor drive PC board PWA F SDV 300 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 9 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 DC electrical parts except motors PC boards A4 series Scanner unit Rear side Name Automatic paper size detector APS1 6 Home switch HOME SW LT series Scanner unit Rear side Name Automatic paper size detector APS1 4 Home switch HOME SW 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Motors Scanner unit Rear side Scanning motor SCN MOT Document motor DCM MOT Scanning optical system cooling fan motor OPT FAN MOT SLG PC board cooling fan motor SLG FAN MOT B 4 electrical parts Scanner unit Rear side Damp heater M D HTR M Damp heater L D HTR L Fuse PC board PWA F FUS 351 Thermostat 85 Exposure lamp EXPO LAMP EXP Lamp regulator PC board PS LRG 300 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 11 6570 5570 OUTLINE C Laser Unit C 1 PC boards Laser unit Rear side Name PLG PC board PWA F PLG 300 Polygon mirror motor drive PC board M A DRV POL 300 Sen
17. 4 30 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Il 8070 6570 5570 4580 CONTENTS 5 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIRMWARE UPDATE THROUGH 5 1 5 1 Outline 5 2 System Configuration 5 3 Preparation of PC to use a network 5 3 1 Setting Virtual Modem 5 3 2 Using Dial Up Networking 5 3 3 Using New Connection 54 Installation of FTP Server eae cot citi ee ab OR DR ER oen d di Re re i e 6 MANUAL FOR FIRMWARE 2 24 4 44 01 6 1 E3 Mode pe n ete de 6 1 61 Outline 6 2 Preparation of PC amp 2 1 Softw re Installation i e e oed esa tiu e nena o NE ER Ea 6 2 2 Preparation of Updated Files 6 2 3 Connection between Copier and PC 6 3 Download Operation 3 A a e ie ecu e 6 4 Screen Details eee ER Oe a Dd REUS RR 7 HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS eennovvevnnornvnnenvnnvnnennvnnennenvnnennennennnnnnnnnsvnnennenennennennennennenenvene 7 1 7 1 AC Wire Harness 7 2 DC Wire Harness 8070 6570 5570 4580 CONTENTS 2000 5 1 ADJUSTMENT 1 1 Error Codes When either the CLEAR PAPER gy or CALL FOR SERVICE 1 symbol appears press the CLEAR STOP and 8 keys simultaneously and the corresponding error code will be displayed eV t C 8 error code
18. 2 1 2 2 Inspection and Overhaul every 880 000 Copies 8070 every 800 000 Copies 6570 5570 4580 2 1 2 3 Periodic Inspection Check List 2 4 Periodical Maintenance Kit For 400k 2 5 Jig Eis e RR UE RU 3 PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING AND HANDLING SUPPLIES 3 1 31 Precautions for Storing TOSHIBA Supplies 3 1 3 2 Checking and Cleaning the OPC Drum 3 3 Checking and Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Blade Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 3 4 Checking and Cleaning the Heat Roller Cleaning Roller 1 2 3 4 3 5 Checking and Cleaning the Upper and Lower Heat Rollers 3 6 Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt 3 7 Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt Power Supply 3 8 Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt Cleaning Brush 2 4 ae BLID eex cm 4 1 Scanner System Related Service Call 4 2 Process System Related Service Call 43 Fliser Related Service Call etre ca ted ap a PS Rodia reee EMO A 4 4 Communication Related Service Call 4 5 ADF Related Service Call 4 6 Other Troubles on the ADF System 4 7 Other Service Calls 4 8 Laser Optical system Related Service Call 4 9 Finisher Related Service Call enne 4 10 Image Quality Maintenance Control Related Troubleshooting
19. 4 Install RING EXIT 24 UR 2 pieces to the exit roller groove from the front side Note The exit roller has the groove for installation Rear lt Front Exit roller lt RING EXIE24 UR 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 90 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA 5 Remove the following parts of the rear side refer to the figure on the right 1 pusher 2 gears GEAR WHITE 1 E ring PUSHER 2 screws GEAR BLACK 1 E ring 6 Remove the SHAFT TRAY 6 screws 1 at the rear 1 at the front Q COLLER 7 Install the COLLER SFT TRAY 2 pieces SHAFT TRAY COLLER Op e Notes When attaching the SHAFT TRAY Pay attention to whether it is facing the front or the rear see below Rear lt Front A A gt B When attaching the gear be careful to the direction of the gears See below both should face in the ae same direction Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 91 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 2 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 2 1 Inspection every 440 000 Copies 8070 every 400 000 Copies 6570 every 340 000 Copies 5570 every 280 000 Coies 4580 1 Preparation D Ask the copier operator about the present machine conditions and note them down 2 Before starting the maintenance work make and retain a few sample copies for comparison reference purposes 3 Turn the power switch OFF and disconnect the power cord plug 2
20. T Equidistant 2 Pyramidal error compensation Mirror plane is tilted The reflecting plane of the polygonal mir ror is tilted in either of two directions with respect to the perfect vertical Deviation of the laser light with respect to the perfect horizontal caused by this reflected plane s pyramidal error is compensated 3 Laser beam sectional shape The sectional shape of the laser beam on the drum is compensated Deviation 6 HSYNC detection PC board After the laser beams are scanned by any reflecting plane of the polygonal mirror they are reflected by the HSYNC detection mirror to become incident to the PIN diode on the HSYNC detection PC board The primary scanning synchronizing signal is formed by detection of these laser beams The pitch 42 3 um between the four laser beams and the laser beam power are detected on the drum surface 6570 5570 PRINTING 8 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 Laser drive board This drive board has the following functions 1 control function for compensating unevenness in the laser intensity caused by tempera ture 2 Laser ON OFF generating function 8 Function for generating synchronizing signals in the primary scanning direction 8 Reflection mirror The mirror reflects and guides laser light reflected by the polygonal mirror onto the drum 9 Slit glass The slit glass is located at the position where the laser beam is output fro
21. 45V TP23 1 2 1 IC3 5 3 1 2 1 2 11 10 9 gt REQ1 CN1 3 REQ gt 2 777 45V SGND A TP19 pai no2 IC2 3 3 4 9 2 2 1 5 9 8 ACK2 CN1 9 R32 _ 48 2 45V 1 SGND TP21 DA2 2 net 2 2 IC3 1 7 2 2 4 CN17 TxD 2 3 1 1 gt DF RxD Agi EB gt SGND This input circuit is for communicating with the copier body It is 1 at 5V and 0 at OV Logic at connector sections and the CPU input port is the same 16 11 2 DF ACK DF REQ and RXD signals om Joracc orrea RxD 5 18 R20 d R87 gt 42 13 1 04 J EN 42 1 3 ACK1 B 3 R52 if 2 c26 T tr TP22 SGND R21 NE 1 R88 5 AREG B 3 E 1 R53 2 IC2 5 ge 45V Uh 5 SGND 1892 T rn R22 24 1 89 el 2 R 0 lt B 3 E 1 R54 2 IC2 4 SGND This output circuit is for communicating with the copier body It is 1 at 5V and 0 at OV Logic at connector sections and the CPU output port is the same Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 45 6570 5570 ADF 16 11 3 Sensor input circuits y den gt REG AD IREGS DA Aliging sensor Timing sensor DTSLED DO DTS AD 08 lt IDTS DA DO EXIT CN75 EXITS
22. EX ZX E amp 1 92 amp 91 01 8 na 10 622 2 S m el i el 1 A aa miS V 60t2 eyot 14WSOHA EDI 14WySOHA 9291 ISNELZSTV 991 Bs S 2141 850190 EIN 9 1 Ivi 573 ISNYELESTV 21 IV sy EWO 68 18 6010 ENO 94 0 2 721 2621 2l OIV9IMID T8 6121 Hd DAO 059 LE d 61089 75541 Oo 91982091 8501 Oea 281000G0N 9721 E 5 Sed EO v y90207 A e ISNYELESTY 821 X e Pu 1 aur ISNYELESTV FIDL t Es 2 a 18288 O dd CEC ere Zt Bg wt JX 4 5 1 5 g Qua 0181 20101 8521 22 fdr 5 18 258 298 EE 3087 ISNZESWV 10 800 6221 247 rsivgsty 1121 LU E NON 1991 480851 ped 400451 6570 5570 PC BOARD 18 1 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 2 PWA F MTB 300 6570 5570 PC BOARD C lt 0 01 50 CT 0 01 50 C11 0 01 50 18 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 3 PWA F LGC 300
23. T Replacing toner filter 1 Remove the feed cover 2 Remove the screw and the filter cover Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 27 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 3 Draw out the toner filter 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 28 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 13 CLEANER UNIT 13 1 Construction The cleaner unit consists of a driver section cleaning section waste toner carry section fur brush toner adhesion amount sensor separation claw toner full switch and toner bag Recovery blade Main blade Drum thermistor Weight T RR Na Fur brush Fr 1 Toner recovery auger FO M va Toner adhesion amount sensor Separation claw G16 G17 30 G25 G15 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 13 1 6570 5570 CLEANER Fur brush Main blade Toner adhesion amount sensor Recovery blade Drum thermistor Separation claw 13 2 Description of Functions 1 Main blade Scrapes off residual toner on the drum surface The blade is pushed against the drum at a constant pressure by a weight The main blade is separated from the drum by manually turning the lever 2 Recovery blade Catches the toner after it is scraped off by the main blade 3 Toner recovery auger Carries s
24. TERMINALBLOCK Wr WHITE D 3 U e N eea Noise filter reaker BLACK BLACK BLACK L O 4 2 GREEN _ BROWN TERMINAL BLOCK OUTLET BROWN BLUE BLACK LI D D L _ BLACK GREEN BLACK OUTLET BROWN BLACK E 7 Noise filter Breaker 10A 2 BROWN BLUE 4 8070 6570 5570 4580 WIRING DIAGRAMS WH 7 2 BLACK BROWN 1 501 13 BROWN HTR SW Z D B tc m MAIN SW 2 25 2 F BLACK BROWN Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC J510 1 WHITE WHITE DOOR SW J600 3 RVS SW 4511 1 J511 3 J510 7 739 1 J739 3 Q D BULE WHITE WHITE WHITE BULE BULE BULE ey SW REG 4152222 Damp heater U ENG WHITE i SSR U SSR S DHTR U1 DHTR U2 i MAIN SUB BLACK E BULE J725 5 J725 6 J50 1 a BULE O Qpuso1 12 D 1501 24 J501 2 WHITE WHITE uso
25. golo hom oO dio LOS D O E do 1 EY eT ee O 505 k D 22 5 9o 22 8 255 L uz GY xc 7 LOIS c Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 69 6570 5570 ADF 13 Reversion roller cushions reversal roller mylar sheets reversal roller cushion Fixing reference 0 5 Reversal roller cushions 3 locations Fixing reference when pushed against this line Fix these cushions between the ribs so that they do not overlap the ribs reversal roller cushion 3 locations o9 Reversal roller mylar sheets i 3 locations SEE 9550592690 o 0 lt 9 lt OD gt II 5 0 o o AL we oo oScog COLE gt Oo wn 122058 xo Oe rsoe reversal roller mylar sheet Fixing reference 0 to 0 5mm 6570 5570 ADF 16 70 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 14 Discharge brush T Fixing reference 0 to 0 5mm hold end reference line w out crimp Discharge brush
26. Coat so that screw periphery rises up slightly Detailed View of Screw Lock Section 1 44 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Note Each can contains 1kg agent so you should divide up the amount into smaller containers for easy operation ae No Part Name 4406361350 ae 1401E Screw locking agent f Image inclination adjustment Direction of the copy paper Direction of the copy paper movement movement Image 1 1 Og i 1 If inclination of the image occurs even the edges of the original are properly aligned with the scale adjust it by moving the stopper holder on the front side 2 In case of A Move the stopper holder in the direc tion indicated by mm In case of B Move the stopper holder in the direc tion indicated by Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 45 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 5 3 Adjusting the scanner section a Polygonal motor 600 dpi PPC Primary scanning reproduction ratio 1 Place the scale on the original glass as shown in the illustration below and make an A4 LT 100 test copy from LCF 2 Measure the copy and compare its size with the actual scale 3 Follow the procedure below to adjust value so that the interval between 10 mm and 210 mm on the scale is 200 0 5 mm 405 START Adjust by digital keys SETy INT gt E S gt 1 Test copy An increase in the value
27. 4 Move the carriage to the feed side b Remove each screw fixing carriage 1 on the front and rear 6 Move carriage 1 to the center tilt the entire carriage 1 using the notch on the frame and draw out upwards to remove I Mirror 1 1 Remove carriage 1 2 Remove the 2 leaf springs fixing mirror 1 95 e BEHE ere 7 2 Plate spring Plate spring Mirror 1 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 21 6570 5570 SCANNER J Carriage 2 and carriage drive wire 1 Remove the original glass top rear cover top Rear top frame left cover top right cover control panel PC board 2 ADF brackets and top rear frame 9 Screws 2 Remove the top front frame 8 screws 3 Remove the 11 screws 1 connector and the lens cover 4 Remove the 4 screws and disconnect the 7 connectors Then remove the scanner control PC board SLG board 5b Loosen the wire tension bracket and remove the spring 6 Remove carriage 2 Note When assembling carriage 2 adjustment is Hook
28. LEFT HINGE RIGHT HINGE Clockwise rotation CW Counterclockwise rotation CCW Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 79 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 22 2 Adjustment of ADF horizontal deviation caused for ADF 1 Make a test original as shown First draw a center line on an A4 sized copy paper Center line PS size 2 Place the test original on the original feed tray with the center line side facing up and align the side guides to the sides of the original Test original 3 Press the START key to make copy Fold the copy in half and check that the center line is in the center of the copy If it is not adjust the original feed tray until the center line is copied in the center After adjustment tighten the two screws securely to fasten the original feed tray Original feed tray 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 80 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 22 8 Adjustment of ADF leading edge position If the original fed from the ADF has not stopped in the preset position make adjustment using the follow ing procedure While pressing the 0 and 5 keys on the copier s control panel simultaneously turn on the power switch 2 After confirming that TEST is shown on the display key in 3 5 and 0 and press the START key 8 To make the original stop at the feed side of the ADF key in a number smaller than the one
29. vrsaraa coag ON MEN aan Vrasod ON VOINNVI vrasaa aan 1 04 ON 8590 ETT ON Er 2500 LT series AS EG Personal Comp aN auo 2189525 0 045 FAN SYS 01844 TINN FANSSP 0A FANSON OA FANSSP 0A FANSON OA FAN2SP 0A FANZONOA FANISP 0A FANIONOA FAN2SP 0A FANZONOA FANISP 0A 113 1 am 1 1 aT 1 2 E 3 PWA LDR E GND GND E GND OPT FAN2 OPT FAN1 SLG FAN OPT FAN2 OPT FAN1 SLG FAN ang SD D 102 00 03 AB TOSHIBA TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION 1 1 KANDA NISHIKI CHO CHIYODA KU TOKYO 101 8442 JAPAN
30. 5 c a AL Gate solenoid 1999 TOSHIBA 15 23 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU AC Transport reversal roller x 1 Open the exit unit Ne 2 Remove the rear E ring gear pin and bush INNI 3 Remove the E ring slide the transport reversal b R NN roller to the front remove the bush from the q N frame and then take out transport reversal e AAN n roller OE A Transport reverse 4 Remove the E ring from the transport reversal 5422 roller roller and bush and replace the transport re E e a versal roller e F 5 2 Lo 52 AD ADU drive motor e f 1 Remove the main unit rear cover 2 Disconnect the connector 3 Remove the 3 screws fixing the drive motor 12 bracket and then the drive motor bracket p 4 Remove the 2 screws fixing the ADU drive Bc B motor and then the ADU ie motor at z AT al Assembly of clutch and solenoid connector As the clutch and solenoid connector have the same shape it is possible that they may contact with each other Using the following figure and list carry out
31. T Lower thermistor Harness cover Jam release unit 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 2 Remove the upper separation claw unit 1 screw on the front side Notes 1 When fixing screws onto the shaft make sure that the D cut section of the shaft fits into the D cut hole on the bracket 2 The separation claw positions can be moved 3 mm each to the front and rear by the position of the E ring on the shaft Before the copier is shipped from the factory the E ring is at the center groove Before the copier is shipped from the factory the E ring is at the center groove Rear side x Front side AP 3 Remove the spring and upper separation claw Note The spring is attached in the direction shown in the following figure Separation claw F Lower separation claw cleaning roller 4 1 Remove 1 screw for each from the front and rear sides and open the lower separation claw unit 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 12 Spring Separation claw Lower separation claw unit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Remove the spring and lower separation claw 8 Cleaning roller 4 opens together with the lower separation claw unit Cleaning roller 4 is at tached to the lower separation claw unit via bushes and springs 2 heater lamps 1 Remove the front lamp bracket 1 screw 2 Disconnect the 2 conn
32. Switches detect at the bottom and top positions of the elevator tray and the presence of paper When the belt winding pulleys rotate counter clockwise arrow A the elevator tray moves up using the principle of a tackle Wire winding pulley 2 Paper feeding section This unit sends paper which is set in the LCF or the manual feed tray to the aligning section The paper feed secton is mainly comprised of pick up rollers feed rollers separation rollers manual feed switch paper empty switch tray up switch paper start switch and also their drive mechanism The drive mechanism has the feed motors for driving and the manual pick up solenoid for up and down operation Pick up roller This roller is for feeding paper out of the manual feed tray or LCF unit to the feed roller The manual pickup roller feeds paper vertically 2 Feed roller This roller is opposite of the separation roller It is responsible for feeding paper to the aligning roller 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 3 Separation roller This roller is responsible for allowing only one copy paper to pass through during a paper feeding process When more than one sheet of paper is present at the feed roller area the tendency for more than one paper to feed through The separation roller reverse rotates and that action pushes the paper that is below the sheet that is to be fed backwards thus not allowing it t
33. bu dass 06 29 4116 ud 1625 01 0 m OOO Q 012501631 08 2501631 DNE M 1c19 1620 623084F 62308AF Ex 15225 1632 MCTAHC2ASFL 40 HCZ44FL 1 33 HCO7FT k ZIMER 1615 O O 03K 0207557 811255 20 1645 62503 88347PFGBN Ct 10 50 ACO 1 Le 102 8428 5 92 05 Midis 23 DEVCK IC3 7407F 16 244b 4100 26 X V 62385AF 1 27 15225 9 ICM HC32FT 1622 324M D I TOI 1079416 166 62308 IC12 MCHHCZT3AFL 1616 221 1290 89787 1 199 20 1301 2007212 1024 1629 10 75393FT MCTAHC273AFL 4100 22K 1637 PG 4700 22K HCTOOFT RR4 ul 11 62308 NCTAHC2T3AFL 1617 TC30 MCTAHC2 HCZ44FL HC2AAFL 141 TP25 1044 7407F 1049 EL GA LCA300 9
34. 119 515 VOTIS Aver 179 438 CEN Me 108 09 E UNS aan VEIOUUV I Wr VOOulV STO 21 250N oo T EXPO OUT dj vovid aNd Bdd voaxidd Gad Bdd voiNOdd Gad dd dj BUCWHILINE vous VELAS VOSLAIS vouas 050005 aNd TYNNSH TINGS 05155 Vooxus 0154545 0100455 EXPO OUT 2 457 457 RED 2 DRV POL t 1noodxa z ON 1n004x3 love m VONIA jaan ar 5105 wes UND O ONASH VONSGHS 091015 Vosidis VOZLdIS vooda voonoa voanoa T TNGUNG 2590 e s 55696 a ino 545505 09089 SIS 55205 VEBUNNVOS 515505 jane 2 EI vivaidd 5 ras ON vo ivso vrediad raais vo 0vso wredidd 245 meny 4315 lavo aN DN IONOS 8590 229 01380 ON vodowo 158805 nee 0115405 E ITE CONO Wrasod jaan BMAD10 0 BMAD11 0 T PWA SDV PWA LDR nee EET SN vrasaa 5 8500 me ANGI MMO ramia PWA SLG and 8590 7 ans 2 ON ae nee ano 11207 veoviva aw T
35. Blue Lower guide roller Black 16 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC D Developer magnetic roller 1 Remove the developer material 2 Remove the E ring and then the spring 8 Remove the front guide rollers 4 Remove the front side plate 3 screws b Remove the 2 fixing screws on the front mag netic roller holder 6 Remove the rear side plate 4 screws 7 Remove the 2 fixing screws on the rear mag netic roller holder 8 Remove the entire upper and lower roller sub unit from the developer 9 Remove the 2 pole fixing holders and the 2 E rings on the inside Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 Front side plate Magnetic roller Magnetic roller holder Magnetic roller OK Oe INN d 9 23 07 EC Lm NND E STP 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 10 Remove the 2 pushers 11 Remove the 2 E rings and 2 gears 12 Remove the magnetic roller holders from the front and the rear sides 13 Remove the 2 seals the 4 shield bushes on both ends of the developer roller scraper and the upper and lower magnetic rollers E Transport magnetic roller 1 Remove the upper and lower developer roller sub unit 2 Remove the front gear and the E ring Shield bush Seal Seal
36. TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 R65 1 1 1 1 MODED 1 2 4 CN8 4 cLocko mr n cwep 85 2 4 i 1 R99 2 2 B 2 RESETB gt eed motor B A gt 1 1 B CN8 1 1 E 1 i Lo 8 5 CN amp 5 735 7901 1 11 6 2 55 2 58 2 C81 C79 C78 PM 24V CN amp 6 2 2 41 22 2 2 C39 1 2 phase excitation 1 2 phase excitation can be selected by the excitation mode setting signal MODE On this document feeder the feed and reversal motors are fixed to 1 2 phase excitation and the trans port motor is fixed to 2 phase excitation The rotating speed of the motor and direction of rotation can be controlled by the drive clock signal CLOCK and rotation direction signal CWB When the reset signal RESETB turns Low all outputs of the drive IC are turned OFF regardless of the state of other signals The motor current value can be set by inputting the analog voltage to the current setting terminal Vref 16 11 5 Solenoid drive circuit diagram 5 D 24 gt i 24V CN73 aati 5V F everse solenoi ale RSOL CN7 4 TP41 R105 IC3 2 4012 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 ORD 1 R100 G i S 3 R104 2 PGND SGND When the CPU output port is Low level Q12 turns ON to actuate the solenoid The solenoid drive signal is a PWM signal When the solenoid starts to actuate the solenoid actuates at its maximum torque at 100 duty After actuation
37. 00 HQ T VMd seseq 00 91d 4 VWMd 00 d90 4 WMd 8 1 9ISV gt ejeq sng 1va uav 3 1095 006 915 4 5 dav 5 Lg h lt gt gt 3 nav 5 0 Odd 391 5 aye lt gt ddd 008 99T 4 YMd J rjeues J rreues OSIu lIqv9 E sng 1Dd 215 gt NVES dISV sng vsl tU 00 SAS 4 WMd Finisher Jejouuoo ASM F PNL 300 WVHAN 00 8 1IA 4 VMd ZHWEE SNE 10d 10 pJe9 NV1 preog jeuondo ISOS Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 2 30 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 4 Removal of Covers and PC Boards 2 4 1 Removal of covers A Right front cover 1 Open the right front cover 2 Remove the screws on the hinges at both ends 2 screws for each B Left front cover 1 Open the right front cover then open the left front cover 2 Remove the top and bottom hinge brackets 2 screws for each C Lower front cover 1 Remove the intermediate and lower cassettes 2 Rem
38. gt 0 eS LOL 890 vi 460 460 0 691 260 961 OZ IN 69 I 760 90 870 460 08 0 470 80 0 1 0 eunsodx3 0 990 Ort 99 0 690 17920 05 80 0 920 821 80 0 Si 0 8 0 0 9 70 0 620 euin eynsodx3 HOL 160 760 680 9c0 260 91 0951 00 V9 HS 260 ELT 9LT PSO LE O 660 780 991 vel NO Josues 440 NO Josuas 440 330 Josues BU NO 3340 Josues NO NO plougjos 1edde J 440 330 JOJOW 9SJ9A9H NO MOO 440 Modsuel MO 440 pee MO G34 34d dlS DHO 1 0 940 NI DHO 6570 5570 ADF 16 37 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 9 Descriptions of Symbols Layout of Electrical Parts and Signal Block Dia grams 16 9 1 Symbols 1 Motors Code name Function Remarks FMOT feed motor Drives pick up roller feed roller and aligning roller Pulse motor TMOT transport motor Drives transport belt Pulse motor RMOT reversal motor Drives reversal roller and exit roller Pulse motor ADF FAN MOT ADF fan motor ADF PC board cooling IC motor 2 Solenoid Symbol Code name Function Remarks RSOL RSOL reversal solenoid Drives reversal flapper DC solenoid 8 Sensors Symbol Code name Function Remark
39. Print movement direction Notes 1 Before making a test print make sure that 100 A is appeared on the top of the message display after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test print 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range 1 to 15 The default adjustment value is 8 The adjustment range is 0 to 40 for code 443 only and the default is 20 3 LCF 443 values become the reference for all adjustment values So be sure to execute the adjustment in the order described above 4 The first line in the primary scanning direction may not be printed depending on the initial setting for the leading edge margin Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 43 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT e Image distortion adjustment Step 1 Step 2 en Direction of the copy paper movement Image Direction of the copy paper movement PERSEE 1 Make an A3 size copy 2 Remove the original glass Adjustment order step 1 step 2 Step 1 In case of A Loosen the mirror 2 adjustment screw CCW In case of B Tighten the mirror 2 adjustment screw CW Step 2 In case of C Loosen the mirror 1 adjustment screw CCW In case of D Thighten the mirror 1 adjustment screw CW 3 Coat with screw lock after the image dis tortion adjustment 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT i a
40. necessary Carriage wire 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 22 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 Remove the shaft cover 1 screw only on TWD ASD MJD destination models 8 Remove the shaft and pulley assembly 1 stop ring and remove the wire from the pulley Notes 1 When attaching the wire make sure that the wire is hooked on as shown in the figure below 2 When attaching the wire refer to the Service Handbook 3 When attaching carriage 1 carriage 2 and the wire adjustment is necessary CRG 2 pulley CRG 2 CRG 1 27 Idler pulley 27 27 Wire windup pulley motor deceleration pulley 39 75 3GT Z28 K Mirrors 2 and 3 1 Remove carriage 2 Mirror 2 2 Remove each of the 2 leaf springs Mirror 3 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 23 6570 5570 SCANNER L Lensunit 1 Remove the damp heater 2 Remove the shield bracket 2 screws 3 Remove the 5 screws and disconnect the 2 connectors 4 Draw out the lens unit upwards Notes 1 When replacing the lens unit do not touch the fixing screw
41. Connector MG de To 00 00 ABT 90 _ c Developer unit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 4 Fill with new developer material b Rotate the gear several times to distribute the developer material evenly 6 Install the top cover Note When installing the top cover position it securely on its hooks and be sure not catch the urethane seal Top cover Seat of topcover Mylar of sideframe Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 15 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT C Guide roller 1 Remove the developer unit 2 Remove the developer unit handles 2 screws 3 Remove the E ring and then the spring 4 Remove the 2 E rings and both the front guide rollers from the magnetic roller shaft Note Pay attention to the color of the rollers when assembling the upper and lower guide roll ers 5 Remove the E ring and then the gear 6 Remove the rear side plate 4 screws and then disconnect the bias connector 7 Remove the 2 E rings and bias plate 8 Remove the spring and the 2 rear guide rollers from the magnetic roller shaft Note Pay attention to the color of the rollers when assembling the upper and lower guide roll ers 8070 6570 5570 4580 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 Handle
42. av stv var Gad wo UNS av MS di3 401 ty sw VOMSTON VOMSTON VOMON K Siar vrana MS d1Sd oN ae E HIO AdH m vriDand ona E ovo vi d34nd ado vi gadnd vi d34nd t aaa vona vraoind MS ZANAZANL E mi Vranand TA Vrdrand Vranand NS aan aan Cte 25 MS dNF ENL er inr ir ET VodnaL GND aan 0107 40107 MS d01 391 UNS VEGSHOT VEGSUOT VraaioT aan aan OND ona MS dOH HNL vrmsdoH Ong MS 0333 491 PWA LGC ON ON voanay aan z z YI A1OW HNL VOSSNUL ong VOSANEL hu vaar ser NS ong 8 4154 aan aan a Wound ON avo avo vo d19d Nv4NF1OnQ onal dan MS H3AOO LIX3 2 MS 0334 E VENSDE bn vase OND aan aan wo ong and 135 145 401 ONS OND QNS vi 13891 138901 Nv4 8JS vroad mm NN Vi dOLNd VEdOLNd sor 1590 VEMSNEL VONSNUL MS CdNILdNL qvo No No OND Wied NaN Vi diaWd VEHdNINd IBN voaa GI inr mr 37 D gt ONSMVLS
43. 0 9 Exit adjustment mode 100 A A4 TEST MODE Note The adjustment value indicates the output voltage of the DA converters IC47 148 on the logic output voltage adjustment value 1 256x5V 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 60 PC board and conforms to the following relationship Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Sequence of Operation Pattern 3 Display messages 0 5 100 A4 PWR TEST MODE Y Digital Keys Enter code o START 0 A4 TEST MODE Digital Keys Enter code value after hyphen Value after XXX A4 0 1 2 START TEST MODE Current P Zu ZZZ adjustment value Y Digital Keys Enter adjustment value ZZ Z Y SET or INTERRUPT The 222 value after adjustment is recorded to NVM lf you switch to another adjustment 10076 A 4 mode go to TEST MODE Y 0 9 Exit adjustment mode Note The adjustment value indicates the output voltage of the DA converters IC47 148 on the logic PC board and conforms to the following relationship output voltage adjustment value 1 256 5V r Precautions During Developer Bias Adjustment If the entire image is foggy in spite of appropriate main charger grid voltage or toner density adjust the devel
44. 5 Weight holder GS 7 5 8s 2 a Rig 5 858 2 158 2 ogcGcSO 7 LES SS LOG GO 7 852 Q 2 555869 2 525565 2 EF 6570 5570 ADF 16 64 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA jou Guide mylar sheet 2 3 locations again m indentation Fixing reference Clearance Overlapping 0 to 0 5m when pus not allowe jou Bulddepuano A A cross section jou Buiddeuano DuixiJ WLUG 0 010 BUIXI4 7 Guide mylar sheet 2 6570 5570 ADF 16 65 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 Guide mylar sheet 3 Arrow view OC 0 Fix in order 1 2 and 3 so that mylar does not sag Fixing reference 0 5mm Sagging not allowed Make sure that edges of mylar guide do not deviate Arrow View re o Guide mylar 8 t sheet 3 LL be 0 to 1 Fixing refer
45. This circuit suppresses to a fixed value the inrush current flowing to current generating capacitors C39 C40 and C41 that are included in the drive motor drive circuit It comprises a posistor PTH1 for limiting the current and a FET for allowing a current to flow during constant operation From the time that the ADF open close switch feed cover switch and exit cover switch up to the cathode voltage of ZD3 reaches the Zener voltage by the time constants of R38 and C45 base current is not supplied to Q2 to set Q2 to an OFF state and turns OFF so that current flows through PTH1 When the cathode voltage of ZD3 exceeds the Zener voltage after a delay provided by the time con stants of R38 and C45 base current is supplied to Q2 to set Q2 to an ON state and Q3 turns This allows the current that was flowing through PTH1 to flow through and cancels the current limitation Discharge resistor R7 immediately extracts the load that accumulates in C39 C40 and C41 when one of the ADF open close switch feed cover switch and exit cover switch becomes open The circuit compris ing R67 R68 R71 and Q13 immediately extracts the load that accumulates in C45 when one of the ADF open close switch feed cover switch and exit cover switch becomes open and limits the inrush current that flows when the cover is opened or closed momentarily Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 41 6570 5570 ADF 16 10 4 Pulse motor drive circuit This item describes
46. lt Keys used in operation gt lt Display messages gt The code XXX entered with digital 10095 A A3 keys is displayed 0 5 TEST MODE PWR Digital Keys Enter code E Code 100 XXX A3 START TEST MODE Digital Keys Enter adjustment YYY ZZZ Entered adjustment use pr Current entered adjustment value value 0 correct value If no enter YYY T o SET Values 222 are 100 A stored in BC in or place of YYY TEST MODE INTERRUPT ENERGY SAVER Test copy 100 A COPYING Notes 1 Only copy of single sided originals can be made 2 Duplex copying cannot be carried out Make test copies in these modes after exiting the adjustment mode L Return and repeat 3 Test copies can be made immediately after the power is turned ON adjustment procedure 0 9 Exit the adjustment mode Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 9 Data Correction If the user wants to change the gamma curve adjust the gamma slope correction in adjustment correction mode 05 Image mode Adjustment item Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 593 594 595 PPC Gamma data slope 0 Default used same as set Code value 5 1 to 9 Slope correction The larger the setting the darker the image becomes Input procedure of the adjustment value is sa
47. 360 1 072 d atu 1 10 50 10 Phase B Phase Phase D Phase E Phase N S N N S N S N S N A Phase B Phase Phase D Phase E Phase S N S N S N S Fig 7 4 3 Movement of Poles at 1 phase Excitation Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 7 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 4 3 5 phase motor drive circuit fixed current type The drive circuit mainly comprises the following microstep drive controller IC4 driver IC5 e current detection resistor R2 R18 1 110W4 7K Ogemol t R31 1 10 1 09 489 PULSEM TP13 287 4 SCNCLK 0A SCNDIR 0A 207 207 4 SCNRST 0A MOT A 2 MOTB 382 MOT C 382 287 x 382 4 SDATAO 0A MOTE x 382 2D7 SDATA1 0A SDATA2 0A 207 4 SDATAS 0A 382 A SCNVREFA SCNVREF Pt i nr U1ZB12 100 25 Excitation Process of Phase A H OFF is set to ON High 2 CLK signal rotation direction DIR signal and division data DATA 0 to 3 are input 8 After about 10 ms SCCLK is input Fig 7 4 4 PWA SDV 4 4 outputs excitation ON according to the division data from PA1 Pch side and NA to NE Nch side IC5 receives this excitation signal d
48. 4 pcs Paddle shaft 2 pcs Developer roller U 1 pc Developer roller L 1 pc Transport roller 1 pc Replace the 9 oil seals on the developer unit every 800 000 copies 6570 880 000 copies 8070 680 000 copies 5570 560 000 copies 4580 During replacement coat the oil seal with grease Alvania No 2 using the following steps Oil Seal 1 Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mount ing hole section of the developer frame or outside of the nozzle mixer Pay attention to the direction in which the oil seal is attached See figure on right 2 Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of the oil seal Amount About two small drops 3 Wipe off any grease exuded from the in side Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Inside lt Developer frame Nozzle mixer Ex Out side Grease i a Oil seal 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE Mixer Shaft Apply a coating of grease Alvania No 2 to the entire periphery of the mixer shaft before at taching the bearing 17 Transfer belt Bearing Refer to section 3 6 Checking and Replacing the Transfer Belt 18 Transfer belt power supply roller Refer to section 3 7 Checking and Replacing the Transfer Belt Power Supply Roller 19 Transport belt cleaning brush Refer to section 3 8 Checking and Replacing the Tr
49. 99 dois 9v c 9 440 806 982 LEZ 202 SET 440 San 9L pee 291 LOYNd NO 724 ere NG 440 440 192 661 19ulNd NO NO vat sot 201 440 TI NE 902 eei 201 6 2 812 671791 GE 1961 330 0 NO 440 440 dOLWd sez 060 NO 440 0 og dn Keq INH LINd 440 1 O60 NO NO Ms diSd 982 OLT 102 330 1 H PEE Vesaas 191 991 Bonds mes Ge orcs LHVLSH 90 7 07 ge H 1 UST SUA Ies ee 191 99177 260 160 1 H NNYO jeu1 u ye sjeubis epis au ye sjeubis 9 34 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM B Abnormality detection A Jam detection 1 A paper misfeed in PFP is detected under the following conditions 1 When the paper start switch S28 S32 or S36 does not come ON within 1 6 seconds of the shart of paper feeding 2 When the leading edge of the paper does not pass the paper stop switch within a constant time 2 To clear a jam slide the LCF unit remove all paper from the transport mechanism and then close the front cover If any of the PFP paper stop switches S27
50. Yes Replace the harness 1 Is the mechanism normal No Correct the mechanism Yes y Is the problem solved by replacing the punch motor M1P Yes END y Is the problem solved by replacing the punch driver board Yes END No Y Replace the finisher controller PC board Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 29 4 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 10 Image Quality Maintenance Control Related Troubleshooting Corrective action when Service Recommended for IQC is flashing Check the value of self diagnostics 05 291 control completion state m gt Self diagnostics 05 291 value is 2 pattern trouble pattern cannot be read correctly v Check the value of self diagnostics 08 805 test pattern data setting The value of self diagnostics 08 805 is not the self diagnostics code default Set the default and perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirma tion described later The value of self diagnostics 08 805 is the self diagnostics code default Execute self diagnostics 04 113 test print of secondary scanning 33 gradations correct image is printed out Replace the sensor and perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later Incorrect image image no output uneven etc Is the developer unit firmly locked Yes No Lock the developer unit an
51. 3 Hall elements A to C are used to detect the rotation position of the motor or rotor 4 The excited phase switching unit switches the excitation for each phase By repeating steps 2 through 4 above the motor keeps rotating b An FG pulse is generated by the rotation of the heat roller motor 6 The phases and velocities of the FG pulse and the reference frequency from the SUB are compared and the differences are added up In addition to this are added the fluctuations in the supply voltage Signal generation 7 The switching timing for the excited phase switching unit is changed to match the signal obtained in step 6 That is control ensures that the FG pulse and reference frequency are equal The heat roller motor runs at a constant speed Locked range state 8 When the HTRMOT signal changes to level the heat roller motor stops 9 During standby the HTRMOTL level changes to 17 if the temperature of the lower heat roller drops below the reference temperature and the heat roller motor rotates at low speed Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 7 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 5 2 Control signals 1 HMOT REF signal LGC MOT Input This signal is a reference clock signal for the heat roller motor to rotate at a fixed speed The frequency of the reference clock is 1247 6Hz 2 HTRMOTL signal LGC MOT Input This signal switches low speed heat roller motor rotation ON OFF When the signal is L
52. Yes No END Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the sensor normal No Yes Y Correct the wiring Is the voltage across J6 2 and J6 4 on the finisher controller board 5V DC No Yes L Replace the finisher controller board Re adjust the height sensor Replace the height sensor if this trouble occurs frequently Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 21 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING Procedure 2 Is connector J6 on the finisher controller board J114 on the height sensor or relay connector J212 disconnected Yes Re connect the connector s y Is the voltage across J6 2 and J6 4 on the finisher controller board 5V DC No Replace the finisher controller board Yes Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the sensor normal No Correct the wiring Yes Replace the height sensor Procedure 3 Does re adjusting by the DIP switches rectify the trouble Yes END Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the sensor normal No Correct the wiring Yes Is the voltage across J6 2 and J6 4 on the finisher controller board 5V DC No Replace the finisher controller board Yes Replace the height sensor CB8 Backup RAM data is abnormal Is the condition modified by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the copier Yes END No Replace the finisher controller
53. 2 Disconnect the connector and release the switch claw from the bracket to remove the aligning switch 6570 5570 ADU 15 DA gp demo m GH E EA F U JU Om Feed switch Aligning switch Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC R ADU feed unit 1 Remove the ADU front cover 2 Remove the ADU feed cover 8 Remove the transport clutch holder 4 4 Disconnect the 5 connectors and release the harness from the feed unit b Remove the 2 E ring from the front side of the fulcrum shaft fixing the ADU feed unit 6 Remove the rear E ring 7 Remove the rear spring 8 Draw out the fulcrum shaft to the front 9 Remove the feeder unit by lifting it upwards S Forward rotation clutch and reverse rotation clutch 1 Remove the ADU feed unit 2 Remove the 2 E rings 2 screws and then the feed drive unit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 17A 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 3 Remove the 2 E rings 2 screws and bracket 4 Remove the 2 E rings and bush b Remove each of the 2 set screws fixing the for ward rotation clutch and reverse rotation clutch an
54. 3 Change the cassette size on the control panel For details refer to the setting mode 08 item Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 69 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 14 2 paper sizes Before the copier is shipped from the factory A4 R A3 and B4 LT R LG and LD are set to the upper middle and lower cassettes respectively The following procedure describes how to change the paper sizes of the cassettes in accordance with a request from the user Note Since the PFP upper is not usable for B5 size paper do not change its size to B5 Mechanical Modifications 1 Draw out the cassette that you want to modify remove the stopper screws one each on feed and exit side and draw out the cassette Feed side Exit side 2 Remove the cassette side walls 2 screws for each on the front and rear sides and fix the cassette side walls with the screws matched to the paper size marked on the cassette guide 3 Remove the back plate 1 screw and fix the back plate with the screws matched to the pa per size marked on the base frame 4 Slide the cassette size label on the right front of the cassette to upward to remove it 5 The cassette size label should be folded to dis play the designated paper size and then in serted into the cassette 6 Insert the cassette into the feeder and tighten the 2 stopper screws Changes on the Control Panel Cassette side
55. Control panel Image processing circuit Key input Construction of exposure control circuit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 9 6570 5570 SCANNER B The exposure control circuit has two functions 1 Normal mode The duty ratio of the PWM signal is controlled at 55 lamp voltage 61 25V 2 Check mode Through input from the digital keys the PWM signal output is varied from 30 70 to allow the exposure to be set arbitrarily 7 5 2 Lamp regulator function The figure below shows a typical characteristic diagram Control is performed so that a voltage across the lamp voltage proportional to the duty ratio of PWM signal is produced Lamp voltage v 70 Actual use range 61 25 50 10 55 90 PWM duty Setting for normal operation Characteristic diagram of the lamp regulator 7 5 3 Control section The control section consists of the folllowing 2 blocks 1 Scanner CPU Comprised of software the main CPU calculates the voltage to be applied to the lamp according to the normal mode and check mode 2 PWM timer circuit This comprised by the following circuit The exposure data is converted to PWM signals by the scanner CPU and output to J9 26 via IC2 from the scanner CPU PWM output terminal 1 9 26 7407 Lamp regulator 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 5 4 Lamp regulator circuit The lamp regulator circuit ensures that illumination from the exposure lamp is con
56. DEV MOT developer motor Drives the developer unit and suction fans RGT MOT aligning motor Drives the aligning roller HTR MOT heat roller motor Drives the heat rollers EXIT FAN MOT exit fan motor Cools paper exit HTR FAN MOT heater fan motor Cools the drum and cleaner DEV FAN MOT developer fan motor Used for sucking air into the developer DUCT IN FAN MOT duct in fan motor Cools the machine inside DUCT OUT FAN MOT duct out fan motor Cools the machine inside ADU MOT ADU motor Drives the ADU paper feed TRB MOT transfer belt motor Drives the transport belt TRB CAM MOT transfer belt cam motor Contacts the transfer belt to the drum TR2 MOT PFP upper tray motor Drives vertical movement of the upper tray TR3 MOT PFP middle tray motor Drives vertical movement of the middle tray TR4 MOT lower tray motor Drives vertical movement of the lower tray TRAY MOT LCF tray motor Drives the LCF tray PFP MOT pedestal motor Drives all rollers in the feed and transport Systems FED MOT feed motor Drives the feed roller and manual roller Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 25 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 Solenoids Name Function Remarks GID SOL guide solenoid SOL3 scraper solenoid Drives the separation claw GATE SOL gate solenoid Drives the exit ADU switching gate MANUAL SOL manual Pick up solenoid 3 Electromagne
57. Heater lamp ON Start of initialization SCN MTR DCM MTR STOP MTR GUIDE MTR 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 4 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Initialization of laser optical system Y Main motor Toner full cancel operation 6 sec ON gt ES ES Toner replenishment Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 11 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION N Toner empty NO YES 4 Toner bag replacement Initialization NO over 20 sec passed NO YES since start of Carriage and indicator initialization indicate copy area 5 YES Service call C26 Heat roller pre running sufficient for fixing YES Pre running OFF Thermistor NO Heater NO Polygon motor NO broken broken NG YES YES YES Heat roller at ready temperature Service call Service call Service call MES C41 C44 CA1 READY NO 442 Automatic feed copying Start key ON Developer bias ON Fusing motor ON Main charger ON Developer motor ON Discharge lamp ON Transfer belt motor ON Drum motor ON Process system control Polygon mirror OK Transport system control NO Service call CA1 Transfer belt bias ON Feed clutch OFF Aligning clutch ON Counter ON OFF Scraper solenoid ON Scraper solenoid OFF Aligning clutch OFF Exposure Carriag Exposure Transfer belt bias OFF YES Carriage Service call CA2 Number of re
58. J503 BROWN WHITE J401 BLACK BROWN i SW REG HTRU 0401 4 MAIN BROWN J514 WHITE BE J6006 7 47252 4002 Thermostat 5 BROWN gt Ve BLACK a Sm 725 4 g 608780 o BLACK BROWN Q BLACK J501 6 J739 4 2 BROWN DOOR SW J600 4 J51 2 J511 4 510 8 _ 739 2 OTOL 0 Or Og OOS O snow lo lt lt o 3 24 d tr m en m 7 J510 2 BLACK Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 7 3 8070 6570 5570 4580 WIRING DIAGRAMS 7 2 DC Wire Harness 8070 6570 5570 4580 WIRING DIAGRAMS 7 4 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 5 Y1O WLOL 2 UT wo SNC NS NS VNSSIV No YONOUIO rz ON No 77 viusod land Gan onal ona MS 1 LSO d4d MS W LSO ddd UNS VEWILOT ON av VONON d vanad 290 290 JON ddd vonon 154154 5 111 1 JON DNY OND 154154 1 6570 4580 162 15 4 Agee OND OND MS N 189 ddd aA ra 7 2 DC Wire Harness A1OW un4 VESIV VPUASIV Ez Vrdnuna VOMSISU an ast as VESIN VEUASIV awe VENIN 70245154 Er lavo E vonin ong ona ona ona ons ong NL LAH Sd 30
59. the heat roller rotates at a low speed 3 HTRMOT ON signal LGC gt MOT Input This signal is the heat roller motor ON OFF control signal When the signal changes to L the heat roller motor is turned ON Signal level of motor circuit Signal H level L level HMOT REF Reference clock 1247 6Hz HTRMOTL Motor OFF Motor low speed ON HTRMOT Motor OFF Motor ON 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 8 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 6 Disassembly and Replacement A Fuser unit 1 Draw out the belt transport unit 2 Remove the screw 8 Disconnect the connector from the rear side of the fuser unit 115V 230V 4 Draw out the fuser unit to the front by about 6 mm and lift up horizontally to remove Note The fuser unit must be held by holding the handles on the front and rear sides Replacement of parts on the fuser section is described assuming that the fuser unit has been removed B Cleaning roller 1 2 1 Remove the fuser front cover and the rear cover 2 screws 2 Remove the fuser unit guard 3 screws 3 Remove one rear E ring each Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 Front cover Rear cover Cleaning roller 1 2 Spring black d Rear side Cleaning roller 2 Spring silver 6570 5570
60. writing to the device verifying the device cleaning flags G Successful Updated data version number Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Firmware version up completed 2 Version 001 003 Press CLEAR Key gt Press START key to continue Press START Ke Ll i Change the number by pressing key Firmware Version Up Mode 1 Target 6 Target 1 Target 1 E Press Ten Key gt Press START key to install new firmware Target 1 gt Please select a target with DIGITAL keys Press START Press CLEAR key key In the case of 1 3 Press START key Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Installing a new firmware reading a file Target Version 1 installing 7 successful Failed eres CLEAR Displaying current data area being G Successful Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Firmware version up completed Target Version 1 001 2 002 3 002 4 003 5 003 6 003 Cancele Power Off Message will change as follows reading a file checking a read file checking the device setting flags erasing the device writing to the device verifying the device cleaning flags Updated data version numbers Area 6 12 2 Press CLEAR k
61. Atthe power on if the heater is not turned ON and the copier goes into C41 CALL SERVICE check the Thermistor status counter to see if it is 2 or more If itis 2 or more be sure to check the thermistor and heater lamp and after repair reset the Thermistor status counter 08 code 400 to 0 and then turn ON the power switch If the value of the Thermistor status counter is more than 10 11 for example it may be possible that BC RAM or the data in it have been destroyed by charger leaking etc In this case check the guide bias high voltage transformers charger wires etc for any defects Also all the data inside BC RAM need to be rechecked 2 Relationship between the output voltage and the fusing temperature 200 C corresponds to approx 2 5V and 0 25 V corresponds to approx 40 C 3 Relationship between heat roller surface temperature and thermistor 1 resistance Temperature Thermistor resistance Heater lamp state Less than 200 C More than 0 8 kQ ON 200 C 0 8 Maintains previous status More than 200 C Less than 0 8 kQ OFF Warm up Standby 200 C Copying 200 C ra pt pt 200 Heat roller temperature distribution Heater lamp ON OFF ON OFF ION OFF ON OFF ON ON 4 Temperature control at heat roller ends During multicopying the temperature at each end no paper contact area of the heat roller normally tends
62. Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 Claws 6570 5570 SCANNER 8 PRINTING 8 1 Function Outline The laser optical system functions to irradiate the photosensitive drum with a laser beam producing a latent image The printer controller circuit generates the laser beam The Laser drive board converts the image signals to light emissions that are ultimately sent to the laser diode for irradiation The polygonal mirrors the lenses the reflective mirrors as well as other optical elements play a role in directing the laser beam to the photosensitive drum The unit should not be disassembled in the field as they are susceptible to dust which would deteriorate the quality of its output Laser unit Laser diode Cylinder lens Rear side Polygonal mirror motor 5 G po i Y Y Half mirror 102 lens D Polygonal mirror motor drive board E EP mirror HSYNC detection board X G 27 To the drum Front side 45 ST Slit glass f61 lens Laser light window Feed side HSYNC detection mirror Fig 8 1 1 Laser Scanning Overview Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 1 6570 5570 PRINTING Rear side Feed side PLG PCboard Fig 8 1 2 Laser Opti
63. Replace the LGC board C58 Communication error between IPC and the finisher 1 2 3 DAR ey Make sure that only the specified finisher is attached Check the pattern on the IPC board for open or short circuits Check the harness connected to connector J2 on the IPC board for disconnected pins and open circuits Check fuse F5 on the power supply unit to see if it is blown Check the pattern on the control board inside the finisher for open or short circuits Check the connectors leading up to the PPC board for disconnected pins and the harness for open circuits Replace the IPC board Replace the LGC board C59 Communication error between M CPU and L CPU 1 BOR Check the harness between the LGC board and the laser unit for disconnection and open circuits Check mainly the IC circuits on the LGC board for open or short circuits Replace the LGC board Replace the laser optical unit F07 Communication error between SYS and LGC boards F11 Communication error between SYS and SLG boards 1 2 a I 8 6 9 1 1 0 1 Check the connectors J102 and J108 on the SYS board for disconnection Check the connector J330 on the LGC for disconnection Check the connector J2 on the SLG board for disconnection Check the harness between the SYS and the SLG for breaks and disconnected pins Check the harness between the SYS and the LGC for breaks and disconnected pi
64. Take care not to bump and scratch the surface of the heat roller against the bracket or other parts Take care not to scratch the thermistor Make sure that the screws of the pres sure springs are firmly fastened 2 loca tions When thin paper is frequently used and paper frequently wrinkles loosen these screws to adjust If paper jams occur frequently in the fuser or paper frequently wrinkles make ad justments referenced to the markings lower inlet guide on the 2 screws Exit roller 1 Remove the front and rear stop ring then re 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT move the exit roller Pressure lever Lower heat roller Lower inlet guide Stamped mark 14 16 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Remove the 2 stop rings screw handle gear and 2 pins Then draw out the shaft to replace the exit roller Stop ring Pin Screw spring Handle Stop ring Stop ring Stop ring S Bush Pin Spring Screw Gear Pin Bush Rear side Front side J Exit switch 1 Remove the front cover 2 screws 2 Disconnect the connector 3 Release the claw from the bracket and remove the exit switch Connector K Heat roller motor o us 1 Remove the rear cover Sw 2
65. Upper feed clutch FD2 CLT Upper cassette switch CST2 SW PFP middle paper stop switch PSTP3 SW Upper aligning clutch RGT2 CLT Middle aligning clutch RGT3 CLT PFP middle paper start switch FEED3 SW Lower aligning clutch RGT4 CLT Manual paper width detector switch SFB SIZE SW PFP middle empty switch EMP3 SW Manual pick up solenoid MANUAL SOL PFP middle tray up switch TUP3 SW Manual feed switch M FEED SW PFP lower paper stop switch PSTP4 SW LCF switch LCF SW PFP lower paper start switch FEED4 SW LCF door switch LCF DOOR SW LCF paper start switch LCF FEED SW PFP lower empty switch EMP4 SW LCF paper empty switch LCF EMP SW PFP lower tray up switch TUP4 SW LCF tray up switch T UP SW PFP upper paper stop switch PSTP2 SW LCF tray bottom switch LCF BOTTOM SW PFP upper paper start switch FEED2 SW Middle feed clutch FD3 CLT PFP upper paper empty switch EMP2 SW Lower feed clutch FD3 CLT Middle cassette switch CST3 SW PFP upper tray up switch TUP2 SW 6570 5570 OUTLINE Lower cassette switch CST3 SW LCF door switch 2 LCF DOOR SW Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC G 3 Motors Rear side Lower unit Bm Name PFP upper tray motor TR2 MOT PFP middle tray motor TR3 MOT PFP lower tray motor TR4 MOT LCF tra
66. e Check connector J206 on the PLG board for disconnection Check connector CN1 on the POL board for disconnection Check the harness for open circuit or the connector pins for discon nection Check the patterns on the PLG and POL boards for open or short circuits Replace the POL board Replace the PLG board Yes T Are pins 2 and of connector on the POL board always at the level L7 No 7 Check the patterns on the and POL boards for open or short circuits Replace the POL board Replace the PLG board Yes Check the pattern on the PLG board for open or short circuits Replace the PLG board CA2 HSYNC is abnormal Is the harness between the PLG and the HSYNC boards open circuited Is the connector between the PLG and HSYNC boards disconnected Yes Replace the harness and re connect the connector No Replace the PLG board Replace the unit Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 13 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING CA4 CA5 CA6 CAA CAB CAC CAD CAE CAF CD0 Laser beam adjustment trouble Between the PLG board and the galvanomirror PLG board and laser drive board and PLG board and HSYNC board are the harnesses open circuited or connectors disconnected Yes Replace the harness es and re connect the connector s No Replace the PLG board Replace the unit CA9 Image data transmission error SYS board Is the harnes
67. 1 Functions of auto toner sensor 1 Initialization function When the copier is set up or when the developer material is replaced Automatic or semi automatic adjustment is made so that the output of the auto toner sensor input value of the main CPU will be 2 45 to 2 55V for the toner density of new developer mate rial 2 Toner the density stabilization function During the copying operation e Toner consumptiontoner density decreases detection that the auto toner sensor output changestoner motor drive supply of toner to the developer unit from the toner hopper Maintains toner density at a constant level 8 Toner empty detection release function e Detects toner empty situation inside toner hopper Drives toner motorauto toner sensor output is not changed the toner density does not change judges that there is no toner toner empty e Release of toner empty situation Toner supplydriving the toner motor auto toner sensor output changes returning of toner density of normal valuetoner empty release 2 Mechanism of auto toner sensor The auto toner sensor is composed of the following circuits e Drive winding Magnetic head with a high frequency magnetic field primary side Placed in developer material and forms magnetic circuit Detection winding Receives the changes in magnetic resistance of the developer material via a magnetic circuit Secondary side DC conversion circuit Converts the high frequency o
68. 4 Remove the lower exit cover 4 screws 5 Remove the PFP exit cover 4 screws J Left top cover 1 Remove the 2 screws Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 2 99099990000 E Feed side upper rear cover Toner bag cover Toner bag cover Rear exit cover Front exit cover Left top cover em LAE Res PFP exit cover 33 6570 5570 OUTLINE Rear top cover 1 Remove the ADF unit 2 Remove the 2 screws Rear top cover L Right top cover 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the 3 screws Right top cover Up M Toner supply cover 1 Remove the right top cover 2 Remove the two hinges 1 screw for each and remove the toner supply cover N Middle inner cover 1 Open the right and left front covers 2 Remove the 3 screws OE A 5 O Right inner cover SUSI 1 Remove the middle inner cover B
69. 5 43 Paper guide C 5 44 Brush 2 A feed 46 Paper feed system drive gears section tooth faces 47 Aligning unit support bush 4 1 and pressurizing leaf spring 69 Upper heat roller Teflon roller 400 8 840 lt P31 117 gt 70 Lower heat roller rubber roller 400 8 840 lt P31 119 gt 71 Upper separation claw 400 9 340 lt P32 120 gt 72 Lower separation claw 5 9 73 Cleaning roller 1 400 10 340 lt P33 17 gt 74 Cleaning roller 2 400 10 340 lt P33 15 gt Fuser unit 75 Cleaning roller 3 400 10 340 lt P33 116 gt 75 1 Cleaning roller 4 400 10 340 lt P32 137 gt 76 Upper and lower thermistors 5 77 Heat roller entrance guide 78 Heat roller exit guide 79 Paper dust recovery bracket 80 Exit roller 81 Heat roller cleaning roller drive 6 gear 82 Cleaning roller bush 6 83 Transfer belt 400 517 340 lt 29 142 gt 84 Transfer belt power supply 400 18 roller 340 lt P29 138 gt 85 Transfer belt cleaning brush 400 19 340 lt P29 18 gt Transfer 86 Transfer belt drive roller 5 87 Transfer belt follower roller 5 88 Transfer belt separation 5 auxiliary roller 89 1 Transfer belt cleaning blade 400 21 840 lt 29 127 gt 89 2 Flicker periphery Q 89 3 GCB bush and plastic bush Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 3 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 6570 5570
70. 6 D 6560 6 D 6570 7 Developer bias 7 DC 200 V 7 DC 400 V AC 6 Discharge before cleaning Variable output semiconductor transformer None 7 Transfer bias DC 1 4 1 6 kV None 8 Transfer Transfer charger system Transfer belt system 9 Separation Separation charge system Separation claw applied Static electricity separation by transfer belt Separation claw applied 10 Discharge Tungsten lamp white LED red Digital copiers of the 8070 6570 5570 have a maintenance of image quality so the values of Drum surface potential and Developer bias are changed in response to the image quality based on the adjustment value This maintenance of image quality is applied from the first production of the 8070 6570 5570 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 8070 6570 5570 4580 COPYING PROCESS Process 8070 6570 5570 11 Pre cleaning discharge None 12 Cleaning 1 System 1 Blade system brush 2 Recovered toner 2 Non reusable 13 Fur brush bias Earth 14 Fixing 1 System e Fixing 1 Long life heat roller system Heat roller Teflon coated roller 260 lamp rating 900W 1 Long life heat roller system Upper heat roller Teflon coated roller 260 lamp rating 700 600W Pressure e Pressure roller PFA tube roller 060 lamp rating 250W Lower heat roller PFA tube roller 60 without lam
71. Exit roller Upper elevator Exit switch S10 PFP middle pick up roller Cleaning roller 4 Middle elevator Manual feed inlet fan PFP upper pick up roller System fan Lower elevator Laser unit fan Lower cassette Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Transfer belt cleaning blade 6570 5570 OUTLINE B Front Drive System i de cc 9 135 s NJ o 9 Cleaning roller 2 Gate solenoid Cleaning roller 1 End guide motor M8 Upper heat roller Side guide motor M9 Belt for the toner auger M15 ADU inlet reversal roller Main cleaning motor M11 Forward rotation clutch Toner recovery auger Reversal clutch Toner transport auger Holding gate solenoid Fur brush Transport roller clutch Transport roller G23 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC C Rear Drive System ee Ea I COE AOOO Mo omg
72. Je 36 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 4 Remove the PC board fastener hook and draw out the developer bias transformer G Switching power supply unit 1 Remove the front exit cover 3 screws 2 Remove the rear exit cover 2 screws 3 Remove the PFP exit cover 4 screws 4 Remove the power supply inner cover 5 Screws 5 Disconnect the 9 connectors 6 Remove the 4 screws and remove the switch ing power supply unit Note Claws are located on the base frame side floor side of the connector shown in the view A and are difficult to see Base frame floor sid Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 2 37 6570 5570 OUTLINE System PC board PWA SYS 1 Remove the glass holder original glass and left top cover 2 Remove the indicator screw and slide the indi cator to remove the scanner section lens cover 3 Disconnect the connector from the system PC board side of the harness connecting the scan ner logic PC board and the system PC board and remove the cover on the rear side 3 4 Remove the system PC board side of the har EZ ness connecting the system PC board and the PLG PC board 5 Remove the screw fastening the system electrics unit 6 Remove the up
73. Josues JOSUOS Josues Josues BuiuBily JOJOW 9SJ9A9H JOJOUI 1j0dsueJ pee Qq33 3ud dlS 9uO 1no 5uo NI DHO 6570 5570 ADF 16 35 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 2 sheets double sided mode 16 8 3 eui 10 eui y m sjueJejiip euim eunsodx3 ejnsodx3 eun eun ejnsodx3 gt gt eun ejnsodx3 euin eynsodx3 172 7 90 96 0 agg o 950 ee 060 060 LOT 060 ogo 01 Co T T HY 9201000 020 561 LO Ero ___ 990 vet 680 819 96 eee ree d v9 0 ero 10 aa ero 0 BER en 10 Er 0 Vv v90 990 VLL 680 Sv 0 NO suos 340 108095 1IX3 340 340 JOSUSS 33O suos NO NO plougjos jedde J 440 440 JOJOW NO MOO 440 40 0W uodsuej MO 440 pee MO Qqad aud dlS OuO 10 40 LNO DYO NI DHO Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 36 6570 5570 ADF 2 sheets double sided mode 16 8 4 eui 10 y sjueJ4eyip euin eunsodx3 eun eansodx3 gt 890 990 PE 290 260 690 990 9 0 pL Ox 80 Sc 0 0 920 0 920 260 0 eco euin
74. Memorizing Procedure to register ID codes ID code Counter value 7 digits 7 F 8 START displayed ES displayed amp PWR ort an ID code Memorizing of four figures ex 0525 C To correct Up to 120 ID codes gt E S 2 no can be registered 5 Warm up Input next ID C Procedure to change ID codes 8 START 9525 ed C2 PWR displayed C iscleved E S START Warm up To cancel PIE Memorizing 2 COPY 0525 1960 E S START Warm up Correct the Input the Memorizing number of copies number of copies Key in XXXXXX Next ID code pe gen Peber em eee snas pst ISI ISTABTI Warmup Add ID START Warm up 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 33 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 3 Formatting the Hard Disk Procedure 1 Turn the power switch ON while pressing 0 and 8 keys simultaneously 2 Make sure that the display indicates the system mode enter the code 690 and press the START key 3 Next input 2 and press the INT key 4 Wait appears on the display 5 When wait disappears turn the power switch OFF 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 34 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 4 Auto Toner Sensor Adjustment Note Before performing this adjustment make sure that the m
75. No Yes Is the alignme Replace the sensor nt motor M5S operating at the specified timing Yes No Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal No Yes Y e Correct the mechanism Does replacement of the alignment motor M5S rectify the trouble No Yes Y END Replace the saddle stitcher controller board CBD Saddle stitcher guide motor is abnormal Is the guide plate home position sensor PI13S normal No Yes Y e Replace the sensor Is the guide motor M3S operating at the fixed timing Yes No Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal No Yes Y Correct the mechanism Does replacement of the guide motor MSS rectify the trouble No Yes END Replace the saddle stitcher controller board 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 24 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC CBE Saddle stitcher folding motor is abnormal Is the folding motor clock sensor PI4S normal Yes Replace the sensor Is the folding motor M2S operating at the specified timing NO Yes Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Is the folding roller drive mechanism normal Yes Correct the mechanism Does replacement of the folding motor M2S rectify the trouble Yes END
76. sided transport Double sided reversal ompleted pla started No 1 double sided transport Double sided reversal started double sided No started transport of original on platen Double sided reversal completed No ignmen completed Double sided reversal completed Next original on tray One sided feed started transport completed exit Double sided reversal started Initial alignment started Exit started Nc No D Doubl ouble Initial alignment No neste sided reversal completed net completed feed completed 6570 5570 ADF 16 32 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA Operating status monitoring Feed signal received No Exit signal received Back side setting in progress Initial alignment started No 2 double sided transport started double sided transport of original on platen Dummy exit started No One sided mode Initial alignment completed and dummy exit completed Double sided transport Exit started completed 2 originals on platen and normal Double sided reversal Double sided mode started eed Double sided reversal completed Exit completed 2 Exit started One sided feed started U Exit completed One sided feed completed Next original on tray Initial alignme
77. the assembly after checking the color of each con RSS nector and harness E wu es IG gt Le i AAS 557 Connected Point Connector Color Harness Color Connector Color Harness Color A Black Black Black Black Harness for reverse clutch Black Black Harness for forward clutch White Brown White Black Harness for solenoid 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 24 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC AC Transport reversal roller 1 Open the exit unit 2 Remove the rear E ring gear pin and bush 3 Remove the E ring slide the transport reversal roller to the front remove the bush from the frame and then take out the transport reversal roller fil DA Transport reverse 4 Remove the E ring from the transport reversal 2 v roller roller and bush and replace the transport re A e D ap iy 9 e ne A e versal roller AD ADU drive motor He rt 1 Remove the main unit rear cover FL e 8 e gt 2 Disconnect connector 2 3 o o QU 9 3 Remove the 3 screws fixing the drive motor gt bracket and then the drive motor bracket 4 Remove the 2 screws fixing the ADU drive RE c motor and then the ADU drive motor I Y 17 gt 7 E ke 4 A gt Mar 1999 TOSH
78. these 3 63 73 83 93 13 23 33 43 53 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 22 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Procedure Group 1 SET 0 5 Digital keys START Digital keys Or E S 0 9 PWR Code FC key INT Testcopy Exit Adjust Set to memory CANCEL C FC key is used for To correct input Group 2 SET 0 5 4 Digital keys START UP or DOWN 5 or 0 9 PWR Code Adjust INT Exit Set to memory C or CANCEL RESET To correct Group 3 SET 0 5 Digital keys START Or 0 9 PWR Code INT Exit Setting canno be changed Group 4 0 5 Digital keys START Automatic Adjustment 0 9 PWR Code Exit Group 5 When the output pattern selection is 1 SET 0 5 Cassette Digital E S Digital START Digital keys or gt 0 9 PWR keys keys Test keys Adjust INT Exit Cassette Outoput Memorize celeetion selection 1 Code 401 411 442 443 444 488 2 Code 580 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 23 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 6 CANCEL SET 0 5 L igital START Digital gt START Digital keys or E S 0 9 P
79. when pushed up against this line Jump mylar sheet A A cross section 6570 5570 ADF 16 60 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 2 Mirror seal feed cover mylar sheet When fixing the mirror seal do not scratch the mirror surface aq STN 2 Mirror seal Feed cover mylar sheet b Fixing reference Clearance 0 to 0 5mm j when pushed up against this rib Fixing reference Clearance 0 to 0 5mm when pushed up against this rib cross section b b cross section Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 61 6570 5570 ADF 3 Feed sheets 1 2 4 5 Feed sheet 2 Fixing reference Fixing reference when pushed up against this indented section am Feed sheet 4 6570 5570 ADF Fixing ref
80. 17407 ABZP I VSZ 168 pq em HCTSALAF 95Co63F 1 37 A x 109 7125654207 1611 7407M HC AMX HCL AMX 27C1024FN100 1613 1014 POTIOT Q ce OrP4 1015 4406377640 PWB F SLG 300 xz 0 HC32F HCTSALAF 7 HCT541AF ICIB HCT245AF 223C280TB 701 IC19 ACT541F 0 1021 7 PWA F SDV 300 1999 TOSHIBA TEC JOEG 421 0 7 P 330 50 08 2145 H 4406377700 PWB F SDV 300 1001 721 NIS 1d We IX 4 TP20 IC2 HC14 SCNCLKO TP9 TP18 Pr 2 5 STEP3JHOFFJSTEPO J72 VDD P GW lt 18 5 6570 5570 BOARD 8 PWA F PLG 300 xo 210 1 2 x outs s T Py 20810 BEEN DMTAALS5415JX ed 1 DMTA
81. 54 E ud owe VLHAOAH 0 bre pce lov MS NIVIN MyMBISU m 0 8 Ong Z 4454 HEG sare Ted 0 25081 025081 NS odeur bra MSO aan Bad GON gg EET TRSSIV EJ 29 aNd Suan 77 vis n aan aan von E 10N 034 497 VERGIOT VEWOJOT E VERHIDT WRIT oor D T j voaNoL voam Gad HH JON NYO BUL vovin 0987 UNS solr erst UNS UND Eg visa 7155825 VISS Wises 7155825 Mn mE VEUAGIS 839 VMd 7125855 VICSGHS VISES 7125825 LOWZYL 7 vo arou 7115855 VEISEIS Wises Wriseas r Y09194 LOW LOY 7145855 7145835 Wises Vises vedr voviou vane vare 2 8070 5570 7 HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS 7 2 DC Wire Harness ast UNS UNS NS TIMO TIMSTO 0 IMSTO UNS aan aN VENGGUS VENSIIS VENSR4S vonua VORIUG ON z 11004 Jen ON ON 24 Inver JOS TVNNYN EZ ar 844 3 JONNY wano Wamo DES WWE WOES Visas SN vovimo z 0950 170 803 n vood4d UNS Gad Tar aan H 008 S43 p ane Sc t rast ong VEOUT VEOSTOT KEN E lvisenaa 2000190 WOES Vordise3 5 ToT one ves VADOT VEADIOT a E TT Ir ong voo
82. 86 L 1 16 73 Tray sheet guide 6570 5570 ADF 17 Gasket transfer belt unit Aligning Gap 0 1mm 0 1mm Must not protrude beyond the window Must not protrude beyond the edge of the frame 18 Discharge Paper feeder area Attaching Position Attach it to the two edge positions in GUIDE ALGN IN A and B below Note1 Insert the discharge brush between the FRM FEED 794 and the GUIDE ALGN IN rear side only Note2 To perform correctly Note 1 be sure to make the discharge brush rise up from the GUIDE ALGN IN 7 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADF 16 74 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 19 Shield mylar DF cover Aligning with rib Shield mylar ULL TEILT dg n3 COV DF 794 20 Pad cushion 0 1 Pad cushion Must not protrude beyond the bracket BKT PAD SPT 794 Pad cushion 0 1 Must not protrude beyond the bracket Align and then attach Gap 0 0 5mm Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 16 75 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADF 21 Reverse section entrance mylar Unit mm SHEET RVS M Rounded corner end 0 0 5 Not to become stuck on the rib MYLAR RVS U R MYLAR RVS U F 0 0 5 Not to become stuck on the rib Unit mm 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADF 16 76 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA 23 Paper feed mylar 1 lt Gap up to 0 5mm A Aligning wi
83. Bearing Notes Assembling the oil seal Note 1 Push the new oil seal in parallel to the mounting holes of the developer frame or the nozzle mixer Pay attention to the direction that the oil seal is assembled See figure on right 2 Apply a uniform coating of grease to the inside surface of the oil seal Amount 2 large drops Grease Alvania No 2 3 Wipe off any surplus grease that oozes out from inside Assembling the bearing Coat the entire periphery of the mixer shaft with grease Alvania No 2 and assemble the bearing I Oil seal paddle section 1 Remove the front side plate rear side plate and nozzle mixer 2 Remove the E ring and then the gear and par allel pin Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Developer unit frame Nozzle mixer Outside a Inside Grease Oilseal 12 21 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 3 Remove the E ring and then the rear paddle bush 4 Remove the gear and then the E ring 5 Remove the front paddle bush 6 Remove each of the oil seals pressure fitted into the paddle bushes on the front and rear sides Note The oil seal installation follows the descrip tion in previous item H J Oil seal upper lower developer rollers and transport roller 1 Remove the 2 sealed bushes on the rear side from the upper and lower developer rollers 2 Remove each of the oil sea
84. Control Panel Dial Up Scheduled Networking Tasks Select an icon to view its description 5 8 Type something in a name for the computer you are dialing Select Direct Connection for Select a modem and click Configure button Make New Connection Click General tab in Direct Connection Properties box select 115200 for Maximum speed check Only connect at this speed Communications Port COM1 gt 5 9 Click Connection tab confirm that all check boxes in preferences are not selected and click Advanced button Direct Connection Properties Confirm that all check boxes in Advanced Connection Settings dialog box is not selected click OK button and then return to Make New Connection dialog box After returning to Make New Connection dialog box click Next button 5 10 Type 39 for Telephone number To change Country code click the arrow next to the country and select a country you want After that click Next button Make New Connection Click Finish button then Make New Connection is completed 5 11 5 4 Installation of FTP Server First it is necessary to install Free Software War FTP Daemon Version 1 65 as an FTP server War FTP Daemon can be downloaded from the following web site URL http www jgaa com downloadpage htm Download the file
85. Install so that the line formed by joining the arrow marks is horizontal If the ar row marks are out of alignment this causes the elevator tray to be an angle F Tray motor 1 Disconnect the connector take out the 3 Screws and then remove the tray motor unit 2 Remove the 3 screws and then take out tray motor Note Always carry this out with the elevator tray lowered If the tray motor unit is removed while the tray is up the tray is in danger of dropping G LCF door switch LCF motor switch 1 Remove the LCF front cover 2 Remove the 2 connectors 3 Remove the 2 screws and the LCF door switch unit 4 Remove the screw the cover bracket and the fast on terminal 5 Remove the 2 screws and LCF door switch 6 Remove the 2 screws and LCF motor switch Arrow marks Connector Tray motor Tray motor unit LCF door switch Fast on 9 tarminal 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 22 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA Tray bottom switch 1 Raise the elevator tray and stop at the middle 2 Remove the 2 screws and the bottom switch unit 3 Remove the and connector on the tray bottom switch from the tray bottom switch unit You can now remove the switch I
86. NO 10h Son 10v sov Tav aan NS Wage 17971984 23 Vo DD Id 179 2194 Onz 11797198 907 Eg voavam vrana S8Q0 LAH Sd 5 435 81 7 HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS Od VMd venu ons ME voona aan um v0 WQ321 Idd GUN MT VMSSLY LON HUL QNO OND 25 UNS vend HOL VL LSOHL VI LSOUL MSHOLUL Su vivo bald aan Q0 VIANHLOT E 10N 034 401 VNT VERE Wrona VFREIST VRIS Sor ONL oa ot p SEL WIL gg gg aNd SU r Ez 9 DE Wiss 79 BE VEUAGIS VEUAIO 83S 5 25015 KST vises LOWZHL EE EEN Visas VISUS vriseis ven 70109 10N Lou 715855 715655 Wiss 5 45 757 vane waver UNS NS TIMO TIMSTO 0 IMSTO aan aN VENSGUS VENGOIS VENSR4S vonua VORIUG ON z 11004 Jen et Inver JOS TVNNYN EZ ar 844 3 JONNY wano Wamo DES SES SN vovimo z 0950 170 803 n vood4d UNS Gad Tar aan H 008 S43 p ane Sc t rast ong VOU VEOSTOT E lvisenaa 2000190 WOES Vordise3 5 fwexwor one iL PERS VERDT a E TT voodund
87. OG 12 1t e e effe Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC O a 10750 C5 CT 10750 RR T QQ 24VC Cl2 100 50 TP28 100 50 0G C13 C14 100 50 100 50 36V RR8 4700722K 18 3 4700 22K gt P OW 0036 24VB QTP30 6570 5570 BOARD 4 PWA F ADU 300 5 PWA F MOT 300 6570 5570 PC BOARD 1 e 2 UB F ADU S00 4406877110 Q1 RN2201 p GU Ri EA 100 50 ORA E o 5607 6712BMK4 e PD 112 4 11 J420 C2 100 50 4406376750 M 300 18 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 PWA F SLG 300 1C3 HC132MX M 13 162
88. SCN MOT veia 8590 04580 8500 nee kl Todd UE 00084 1207 8590 ruya MING m pronao visaidd adn 0039505 de vi eviva IDA ae 015401 ON COIN Wrasod ON ON ON vrasiag VO INISOS aan 12446 75031 od 008180 48Md vredad ano vrana 8590 zag HEN LAN ADP OPTION PWA SYS PWA CCD PWA LDR as OAM DW sod ETT 0 051 SN voso T m ano CTS ron ano 05 PWA MTB PWA PLG BMADED BMADSD BMAD100 BMADII O GND GND 8590 003044 8500 ON 104 ON visaidd 20 wreaidd wreaidd Vi MOddo vioaiad vom ONG aar viua 8590 and ketil vodo WD 0085 EN 135005 298 Vrasod CONTROL PANEL 7 Terav ACE FAN2SP 0A FANZON OA FANISP DA FANIONGA FANSSP 0A FANSON OA FAN2SP 0A FANZON OA FANISP DA FANTON OA FANSSP 0A FANSON OA GND 5 0 GND 1 2 2 1 1 2 PWA LDR nee 04015 vrasaa 8590 vanvid 8590 a I e vreau Tay 0 51 ETT P me FT net
89. The CPU works to detect the breakage of the thermistor and prevents the condition mentioned above The following abnormalities are detected 1 Abnormal detection during warming up 25 sec after the power has been turned ON if the thermistor output voltage does not exceed 0 078 V CALL SERVICE C41 is displayed 2 Abnormal detection during stand by copying If the thermistor output voltage decreases to and remains at 0 078 V or lower for 500 msec or more CALL SERVICE C43 is displayed 3 Thermistor status counter control e For improved fuser unit safety the CPU works as follows After a C41 error occurs two times in succession even when the power is turned ON the heater will not come ON and the C41 error will be immediately displayed However with 1 or less stored in the Thermistor status counter if the copier becomes ready correctly the Thermistor status counter clears to 0 e After CALL SERVICE C41 C45 has occurred and the thermistor heater lamp etc have been repaired or replaced if turning ON the power switch does not cause the heater to energize resulting in an error check the Thermistor status counter 08 code 400 and reset it to 0 Surface temperature of heat roller 200 C Thermistor resistance value about 0 8 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC r Reference 1 Avalue other than 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or 9 is never written in the Thermistor status counter
90. The periodic inspection should be conducted in accordance with the Periodic Inspection Check list shown below Perform the inspection by referring to the figures as well as to the explanation in the Service Manual when necessary 3 After the inspection has been completed plug in the machine and turn the power switch ON and check the general operation of the machine by making a few copies and comparing them to those made previously 2 2 Inspection and Overhaul every 880 000 Copies 8070 every 800 000 Copies 6570 5570 4580 1 Replace all the consumables 2 Check that if there is any damage to the parts in the driving section gear pulley timing belt etc In principle replace those parts at this time 3 Check to see if there is any damage or peeling of adhered parts tape Mylar sheet etc Replace any affected parts if necessary 4 Check that if all the switches and sensors operate properly Replace them if they are not operating properly 5 Clean the inside of the machine thoroughly Note Before inspecting and overhauling the feed section of the 3 cassette feed unit remove the PFP upper aligning unit and PFP feed unit from the copier 2 3 Periodic Inspection Check List Symbols used in the Periodic Inspection Check List Cleaning Lubrication Replacement Operation check Date amp Cleaning with alcohol D Launa 40 100 Every 100 000 copies D Checkfor User s Cleaning with soft Application 280
91. Wiring is as follows Thin wire Ni White Transparent 27 connector White Blue White Thick wire Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 19 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 15 AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT ADU 15 1 Introduction The Automatic Duplexing Unit ADU is a device for automatically making copies on both the front and rear sides of paper The ADU also has a stack function that allows up to 60 copies to be made on both sides of the paper in a single operation In other words the stack function operates to make copies on the rear side for the number of sets specified when making multiple sets of copies and stacking these sets Up to 60 sheets can be stacked Double sided copying is completed by making the next copy on the rear side of the paper by re feeding the stacked copies for the specified number of copies As the ADU uses the FIFO First In First Out system it is structured to re feed copy paper from the bottom side The exit section is provided with a reversal mechanism for offsetting the order of double sided copying depending on the double sided copy mode for example when the one sided and double sided mode are selected for odd numbered originals without the number of originals specified using the ADF The ADU comprises the following mechanisms 1 ADU exit switching gate This gate is for guiding paper output from the fuser to the ADU During one sided copying and after double sided copying
92. YYY INTERRUPT M ENERGY SAVER Test copy Return to 1 and repeat adjustment procedure Y 0 9 Exit the adjustment mode 100 A A3 TEST MODE Code No 100 XXX TEST MODE YYY 227 Entered adjust ment value Current entered adjustment value If no enter YYY 100 TEST MODE 100 WAIT WARMING UP 100 COPYING Notes 1 Only one copy of single sided originals can be made 2 Duplex copying cannot be carried out Make test copies in these modes after exiting the adjustment mode 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 52 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 7 Automatic Adjustment of Gamma correction 1 At the time of unpacking When the gradation reproduction deviation is too large it can be corrected by the automatic adjust ment of gamma correction This adjustment shall be done upon user s request when the gradation reproduction is too high or too low When any of the following parts are replaced check the image and judge whether adjustment is necessary or not Exposure lamp Indicator unit with shading board Lens unit Laser optical system unit When any of the following parts is replaced or adjusted check the copy image and determine the necessity of this adjustment Optical system position CRG1 CRG2 position Mirror 1 2 3 Reflector Drum Developer Main charger Development bias
93. a b Image distortion Primary scanning reproduction ratio Polygonal motor 600 dpi PPC 405 Primary scanning position CCD primary scanning deviation 306 e Secondary scanning reproduction ratio Scanner secondary scanning reproduction ratio 340 e Secondary scanning position Scanner secondary scanning deviation 305 f Top margin 430 9 Right margin 432 h Bottom margin 433 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA 1 37 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT How to Enter Adjustment Values key Follow the procedure below to adjust each of the adjustment values so that the measurement values obtained from the test copy satisfy specification values After starting up in adjustment mode 05 only single sided test copies in the regular copy mode can be made with the ENERGY SAVER Keys used in operation Display message Code becomes xxx according to the entered code 10096 A 0 5 TEST MODE PWR DERE Y Digital Keys Enter code Code No 100 START TEST MODE Y Digital Keys Enter adjustment T YYY ZZZ Entered adjust used Blue Current entered adjustment value ment value tci correct value If no enter YYY SET values ieza E 100 Of plaeof YvY TEST MODE INTERRUPT place of YYY Y ENERGY SAVER Test copy 100 WAIT WARM
94. and then remove the manual feed switch LCF paper empty switch tray up switch 1 Open the LCF cover 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors and remove the screw to remove the switch bracket 8 Unhook the 4 claws to remove the switches Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Connector 27 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM U LCF paper start switch 1 Draw out the LCF unit and remove the manual feed tray unit 2 Remove the paper guide 2 screws on the rear side 3 Remove the screw disconnect the connector and remove the switch bracket 4 Unhook the 4 claws to remove the switches V Manual feed tray unit 1 Draw out the LCF unit and disconnect the 2 connectors on the rear side 2 Remove the 2 screws fixing the manual feed tray unit 3 Bring the width guide towards the outside and draw out the manual feed tray unit while press ing the manual pick up roller down 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 28 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 4 Paper Feed Pedestal 9 4 1 Introduction The paper feed pedestal PFP consists of three front loading cassettes which can feed paper inde pendently The PFP consists of the following components 1 Font loading cassette A cassette which allows paper to be loaded fro
95. arrow in the figure 8 points Pay attention to the two screws see above figure on the rear side see in the figure A gt Front side A Rear side 2 Also when handling the unit take suffi cient care not to hold the adjustment sec tion and the lens 8070 6570 5570 4580 SCANNER 7 24 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 3 When installing the lens unit lens scal ing adjustment is necessary Refer to the Service Handbook D O 75 Setting holes Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 7 24 4 8070 6570 5570 4580 SCANNER M Upper damp heater 1 Remove the lens cover 2 Remove the 1 screw disconnect cable from the clamp and disconnect the 2 relay connec tors Then remove the upper damp heater 3 Remove the screw fixing the damp heater for the mirror Remove the clamp fixing the cable 4 Remove the 2 screw fixing the cable bracket b Disconnect the connector and remove the ca ble Then remove the damp heater unit N SLG board cooling fan 1 Remove the original glass and the lens cover 2 Remove the 2 screws and the harness from the clamp and disconnect the connector con nected to the APS harness from the lens cover to remove the fan O Home switch 1 Remove the 2 claws fastening the home switch mounting section on the base to remove the home switch
96. back ON TIME FOR PERIODIC MAINTENANCE Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Indication of PM cycle Indicated when it is time for periodic maintenance and inspec tion Capable of copying Fig 5 2 4 Maintenance and inspection by a qualified service technician 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT 5 3 Relation between Copier Conditions and Operator s Actions uone14edo Buiuueos Buunp e qejdoooe jou 1nq BuiAdoo Buunp ejqeidoeooe si x jeded ul Aew siy souls uonejedo BuiKdoo eui uonjesur 09S JO pesn 10 SI SI uonipuoo uondnaoju 910N Ady I HVIS 9U 10 je es B19u3 y Bursseud Aq peseejai SI UONIPUOO 1 uonejedo ay se1ouD uoneuado eui JO suuopag O peidnuejul yun 84 ui auo paa Jo YOR Jeded jo oe1 p jqeu Dunes amasay gt BUIYONMS 2 O O CO CO O O 0 O pee
97. enuey uonipuoo Key Koy Kay shay dnueju ayesse Aysue 1 Hi 1 a 1999 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT 5 4 Description of Operation 5 4 1 Dot matrix LCD circuit 1 Structure The DSP LCD 230 is an STN black amp white mode transmissive type LCD with a 320x240 dot display capacity It includes a driver LSI frame print board and lateral CFL backlighting STN Super Twisted Nematic 2 Block diagram XSCL UDO UD1 UD2 UD3 WF LCD PANEL 320 x 240 DOTS Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 5 7 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT 3 LCD drive operation The following describes the drive operation to display the message 100 READY PWA F SYS 300 1 The SM CPU requests the data for displaying 100 READY from the PROM 2 The PROM outputs the data for dis playing the message to the SM CPU 3 TheSM CPU writes the data for LCD display to RAM IC41 4 The LCD controller driver IC42 reads the display data from RAM 41 and outputs the data to the Key switches and touch panel PWA F DSP 300 4 Data Transmission Method 1AF 1 lt 4 gt 51 4 5 LOAD LOAD re s a PEN zd OUUU CP x 320 4 pulses UUUU Lil UL Do D3 X XO XXX X X XIX X X 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT 5 8 Mar 1999 TOSH
98. increases the aligning paper buckle by 0 9mm 459 PFP upper paper alignment paper buckle A 4 0 15 ncreasing the value by at the PFP upper registration roller increases the aligning paper buckle by 0 9mm 460 PFP middle paper alignment paper buckle A 7 0 15 ncreasing the value by at the PFP middle registration roller increases the aligning paper buckle by 0 9mm 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 18 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 05 MODE CODE ADJUSMENT MODE DEFAULT RANGE DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE GROUP 461 lower paper alignment paper buckle at the PFP lower registration roller All 7 0 15 Increasing the value by 1 increases the aligning paper buckle by 0 9mm 1 462 Duplexer registration roller paper alignment paper buckle All 0 15 Increasing the value by 1 increases the aligning paper buckle by 0 9mm 464 Duplexer end guide shifting amount All 0 3 In stacking of only a few sheets in the case of the following values only the end guide is moved towards the pickup roller compared with the standard pickup roller position If the paper is a large size than the standard one or it has much curing or the edges are turned then if a jam occurs the position of the end guide is lowered This will help to decrease the possibility of future jams 0 AS LD 0 2mm other 0 2mm 1 0 2mm other 0 Omm 2 A3 LD 0 4mm other 0 2mm 3 AS L
99. pin 8 of IC3 turns Low to reset the CPU and stop system operation Resistor R27 is for stopping the watchdog timer and is normally not mounted Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 43 6570 5570 ADF 16 10 7 EEPROM circuit diagram This circuit comprises an EEPROM for storing ADF data and other peripheral circuits 5 E2PROM 5V 1 D11 1 2 75 D10 A RA2 4 1 q R74 2 RA1 4 7 8 RA1 3 CLK gt 2 PAI2 4 DID RA2 1 IC11 is memory for storing the adjustment values of reflection type sensors Data transactions with the CPU are performed on 4 lead type serial interface Once data is stored it is held in memory and does not disappear even when the power is turned OFF Pin 1 CS of IC11 is the chip select terminal and is High when data transactions are in progress Pin 2 CLK of IC11 is the serial clock terminal and is sent synchronized with the clock that is input to this terminal Pin 3 DI of IC11 is the serial data input terminal and pin 4 DO is the serial data output terminal IC11 is powered by 5V from E2PROM IC11 power is held by D11 R74 and C42 until writing of data is completed even if something causes the power voltage to fall during writing of data 6570 5570 ADF 16 44 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 16 11 Description of I O signals 16 11 1 REG ACK and TXD signals
100. the double sided copy sheets are fed inside the ADU inlet guide by During this operation the leading edge of the paper is detected by the reversal Switch and the inlet reversal roller rotates in the forward direction to transfer the paper to the ADU stack section When the paper passes through the reversal gate and the trailing edge of the paper passes the reversal Switch the inlet reversal roller rotates in the reverse direction by the reverse direction clutch and the paper is guided to the reversal guide section by the reversal gate After the paper is guided to the reversal guide section it is output to the copy tray by the exit roller 1 The reversal switch detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper passing through the reversal gate It is also used for detecting paper jams Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 9A 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 4 Disassembly and Replacement A Removing the ADU covers A 1 Removing the ADU front cover 1 Draw out the ADU from the copier 2 Remove the screw fixing the rotation knob and then remove the rotation knob 3 Remove the 3 screws fixing the ADU front cover 4 Remove the upper guide cover fastened by the stop ring A 2 Removing the ADU feed cover 1 Remove the 2 screws fixing the ADU feed cover B Stack guide unit 1 Remove the 6 screws fixing the stack guide unit 2 Disconnect the connector 3 Remove the stack guide unit Stop ring Upper g
101. the hear on the aligning clutch side is Z22 N Feed roller 1 Remove the ADU front cover 2 Remove the stack guide unit 3 Remove the pick up roller guide unit 4 Remove the ADU drive unit 5 Remove the transport clutch guide 6 Remove the front E ring and bush Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 14 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 7 Remove the rear E ring gear black and pin 8 Remove the E ring and bearing 9 Remove the spring from the transport guide 10 Slide the feed roller to the rear to remove 11 Remove the spring and separation belt gear drive unit 12 Remove the E ring pick up gear drive unit and pin O Aligning roller 1 Remove the ADU front cover 2 Remove the stack guide unit 8 Remove the pick up roller guide unit 4 Remove the ADU drive unit S 6 5 Remove the transport clutch guide 6 Remove the front E ring and bearing Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 15 6570 5570 ADU 7 Remove the rear E ring gear white and pin 8 Remove the E ring and bearing 9 Slide the aligning roller to the rear to remove P Feed switch 1 Remove the ADU feed cover 2 Remove the screw fixing the feed switch bracket 3 Disconnect the connector and release the switch claw from the bracket to remove the feed Switch Q Aligning switch 1 Remove the ADU feed cover
102. 1006 MJ 1007 MJ 1015 MJ1016 Hole punch MJ 6002N MJ 6002E MJ 6002F MJ 6002S Staple cartridge STAPLE 600 STAPLE 700 Key counter MU 8 MU 10 Working tray KK 6570 1 4 Supplies Drum OD 6570 Developer D 6570 Toner bag TB 6550 TB 6550E Toner T 6570 T 6570E 8070 6570 5570 4580 SPECIFICATIONS 1 4 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 5 System List 1 For DP4580 5570 6570 8070 Staple cartridge Finisher STAPLE 600 STAPLE 700 MJ 1016 MJ 1017 Working tray KK 6570 Key counter MU 10 Key counter socket MU 8 Toner bag Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Developer 8070 6570 5570 4580 SPECIFICATIONS 2 For DP5500 6500 8000 Hole punch MJ 6002N MJ 6002E MJ 6002F 60025 Staple cartridge Finisher STAPLE 600 STAPLE 700 MJ 1015 MJ 1016 Key counter MU 10 Working tray KK 6570 Key counter socket MU 8 Drum SS Toner bag 8070 6570 5570 4580 SPECIFICATIONS Developer 8 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 2 1 Sectional Views and Electrical Parts Location Diagram Sectional View
103. 15 reserved 16 reserved 17 reserved 5 Select the area for update using digital keys Using 1 to 6 keys and INTERRUPT key you can select a target area A selected number is displayed at target area Press INTERRUPT to input The relation of target area number and firmware data is as follows Only Program data Fixed UI data Common UI data Ist language UI data 2nd language UI data 6 3rd language UI data 1 All data 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 2 All UI data 2 3 4 5 and 6 3 All language UI data 4 5 and 6 Depress START key and copier starts to update the data Do not turn off the power to the copier or the computer or disconnect the connection between the copier and computer after pressing the Start key Interrupting the transmission of a file to the copier will result in corrupting the file in F ROM of the copier If this file is corrupted you have to re install the data again Inthe case of 1 6 Firmware Version Up Mode Displaying current status as follows reading a file erasing the device writing to the device In the case of 1 3 Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Installing a new firmware reading a file Target Version installing Displaying current data area being loaded 7 The following screen will be displayed after firmware data is updated In the case of 1 6 If you want to update other area con
104. 2 screws 3 Loosen the front side screw fixing the holder 4 Remove the exposure lamp from the blade Note When installing the exposure lamp on the holder face the projection of the lamp op posite to the reflector Do not touch the glass surface of the exposure lamp with your bare hand Exit side lt Lamp Protrusion ad Reflector Upper D Thermostat 1 Remove the screw and draw out the thermo stat from the carriage 2 Release the harness from the terminal and remove the thermostat Note If the thermostat has been used once it should be replaced with a new one because itis designed basically for one time use only Do not push the reset pin to reuse a ther mostat that has been operated once Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 Reflector Lower 0 Exposure lamp gt Thermostat en 19 6570 5570 SCANNER E Copy area indicator unit 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the top left cover 3 Disconnect the connector from the relay har ness 4 Remove the 8 screws fixing the indicator unit and then remove the indicator unit 5 When removing the document motor remove the 2 screws 6 When removing the belt remove the 2 screws and the cover first 7 When removing
105. 297 that the size entered here will limit the maximum size paper the customer can load in a drawer when the Universal paper size is selected from the display 250 Telephone number for All 0 14 digits A telephone number up to 14 digits can be 1 CALL FOR SERVICE entered Use the HELP key to enter hyphens 251 PM Preventative Maintenance All 400000 0 99999999 Set the counter to the amount of copies prints that 1 counter setting value the customer wants to have preventative mainte nance performed at Note When this counter is set to 0 the counter in code 252 will not count up it remains at 0 252 PM Preventative Maintenance All 0 0 99999999 Set to 0 after the PM is performed 1 counter Current value When code 251 is set to 0 this counter will remain at 0 253 Error code history display All See page from 1 1 to 1 4 for complete error code 2 history information 300 Maximum number of copies Copier 0 0 2 0 999 1 99 2 9 1 allowed 302 Resettable Copy and Original All 0 0 3 0 off 1 counter display 3 EUR 1 Resettable Copy counter 2 Resettable Original counter 3 Resettable Copy and Original counters 351 Electronic total copy print All 0 0 99999999 Electronic counter counts all copies and prints 1 counter including all test mode copies Note The mechanical counter only counts the customers copies and prints not test mode copies or prints 352 Ledger A3 double count All 0 6570 0 1
106. 49 6570 5570 ADF 3 Rotate the belt tension plate to provide the transport belt with slack 4 Remove the transport belt from the front side Magnet catch side Notes 1 During assembly make sure that the edges of the transport belt are at the in side of the transport unit side frame 2 After assembly is completed make sure that the belt is carried in the center and does not drift to either side C Belt tension roller brush 1 Remove the transport belt Belt tension roller 1 Replace the feed side belt tension roller after removing the feed side drop roller Replace the exit side belt tension roller with the belt tension plate brought down The drop roller need not be removed Notes 1 When the belt tension roller is replaced is replaced do not remove the transport unit side frame Do not remove the side frame fixing screws except when replac ing the side frame 2 The belttension roller in the feed and exit side is different in the shape of the leaf spring at the central one and the end So pay attention the shape difference at installation 6570 5570 ADF 16 50 Transport belt Belt tension plate Transport belt Belt tension roller feed side Belt tension roller exit side Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Brush 1 Remove the 2 screws and brush fastening bracket D Original feeding tray 1 Loosen the two M4 screws and sli
107. 831 or 835 are ON when the door is closed it is assumed that there is still paper in the transport mechanism and the jam is not cleared 3 When a jam occurs in the PFP during multiple copying paper fed prior to the jammed paper will be copied normally B Service call 1 If the PFP tray up switch S30 834 or S38 does not come ON within two seconds of the tray s starting to rise at the following times when the power is turned on removing and inserting the cas sette or starting to copy then that cassette can no longer be used and Add paper will appear on the message display 2 In order to clear the above condition the cassette must be removed and installed or the power must be switched OFF and ON It will not be cleared by opening closing the door Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 35 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM All motors and clutches OFF ADD PAPER symbol flashes 3 PFP paper empty Branch according to each level s PFP paper empty switch paper empty detection NO Only when a cassette with no switch ON Is the copier s CRUN signal H seconds passed since tray NO YES tray motor CW Tray lowers Two second delay PFP tray motor OFF Standby In the copier s paper is selected ADD PAPER flashing Lower PFP tray motor CW ON tray Two second delay Tray stop PFP tray motor OFF 3 Tray stops Cassette sw
108. ADU transporting section FED SW feed switch Detects a leading edge of the paper in the ADU 6570 5570 OUTLINE EMP SW empty switch 26 Detects a paper on the ADU stacking tray Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Function Remarks RGT SW aligning switch Detects aligning position of the paper in the ADU SID SW side switch Detects the side guide position of the ADU EXIT SW fuser exit switch Detects exiting paper TNR HOP SW toner supply cover switch Detects opening closing of the toner supply cover TNR EMP SW toner empty switch Detects a no toner state in the toner hopper P STP SW paper stop switch Used for stopping the feed roller DEV SW developer switch Detects attachment of the developer unit T FULL SW toner full switch Detects a waste toner full state CLN M SW main cleaning switch Detects the position of the main charger wire cleaning pad TRNE SW reversal exit switch TRN SW reversal switch EXC SW reversal door switch CST2 SW upper cassette switch Detects misplacement of the upper cassette SFB SIZE SW manual paper width detector switch Detects width of the paper M FEED SW manual feed switch Detects manual feed LCF SW LCF switch Detects attachment of the LCF unit LCF DOOR SW LCF door switch Detects opening closing of the LCF door LCF FEED SW
109. All 2 0 3 0 OFF 1 STAPLE 2 SORT 3 STACK 1 the RADF 642 Finisher mode priority Copier All 0 0 3 0 NON SORT 1 STAPLE 2 SORT 3 STACK 1 selection at power on 645 Reproduction ratio in the Copier All 10 0 10 0 90 3 9396 6 9696 9 99 1 editing mode 1 9196 4 9496 7 97 10 100 2 92 5 95 8 98 646 2 on 1 and 4 on 1 placement Copier All 0 0 1 0 Horizontally centers the 2 on 1 images 1 of images 1 Vertically centers 4 on 1 images 648 Finisher tray reset All 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 1 Enabled 649 Magazine sort Copier All 0 0 1 0 Opening from the front of the book 1 1 Opening from the rear of the book 650 2 on 1 and 4 on 1 order of Copier All 0 0 1 0 Forward image placement 1 image placement 1 Reverse image placement 651 Page Numbering Copier All 0 0 3 Hyphen White area provided on black 1 Solids for number 0 OFF OFF 1 ON OFF 2 OFF ON 3 ON ON hyphen 1 Example of Hyphen and White area 652 Cascade operation setting Copier 0 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON 1 653 Cascade operation setting Printer 0 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON 1 657 Annotation default direction Copier All 0 0 1 0 Short edge 1 when the power is turned on 1 Long edge 658 Restart setting when Printer 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 supplying paper during the 1 Enabled bypass feeding job 680 SCSI ID setting DSS 0 0 15 1 681 Tandem copy setting DSS 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 682 Language DSS 0 0 1 0 Enabled 1 supported
110. Also remove your rings and wristwatch before starting cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum Do not use alcohol selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an adverse effect on the drum Scratches on OPC Drum Surface If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed black spots or streaks will be produced on the copy images In addition the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a new drum will be necessary Collecting Used OPC Drums Regarding the recovery and disposal of used OPC drums we recommend following the relevant local regulations or rules 3 3 3 Checking and Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Blade Transfer belt cleaning blade 1 Handling Precautions Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its edge Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge Do not rub the edge with a dry cloth or soft pad 2 Do not stain the edge with any oil or fingerprints Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade 2 Do not leave any lint or dirt on the blade edge 5 Do not place the blade near a heat source 2 Cleaning Procedure D Clean the blade edge lightly with a cloth moistened with water 8070 6570 5570 4580 SUPPLIES 3 2 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 3 4 Checking and Cleaning the Heat Roller Cleaning Roller 1 2 3 4 1 Handling Prec
111. Also while pressing carriages 1 and 2 against the feed side frame C amp D tighten the screws fixing carriage 1 D Carriage 2 Feed side frame Front side Rear side 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 62 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 11 3 Carriage drive wire assembling Winding the wire to the wire winding pulley 1 Fit the 93 spherical terminal on the central part of the wire into the hole of the wire winding pulley Set the wire so that the part of the wire with a ar Spherical terminal hook on its crimped side be on the upperside Wind the wire to the each front and rear side pulleys Winding turns are 2 and 3 4 turns on the opposite to the boss side outside of the pulley 4 3 4 turn on the boss side inside After winding secure the wire with the wire holder jig 9 Wire winding pulley Front side Rear side Pulley Rear 9 Pulley J Front Hooks Wire winding pulley Po BN T m terminals Front Wire winding pulley Wire holder Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 63 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT Notes 1 When winding the wires on pulleys take the following precautions Never twist the wire when winding Wind the wire tightly to make it come into close contact with the pulley Wind the wire taking care not to leave any gap between the wraps 2 When
112. E rings toothed washers in the wrong places Basically the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled Precautions Against Static Electricity The PC board must be stored in an anti electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wrist band because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity Caution Before using the wrist band pull out the power cord plug of the copier and make sure that there is no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity Caution Dispose of used RAM IC s including lithium battery according to the manufacturer s instructions Vorsicht Entsorgung des gebrauchten RAM IC s inklusive der Lithium Batterie nach Angaben des Herstellers 1 SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSORIES OPTIONS SUPPLIES 1 4 Specifications Copy process Indirect electrophotographic process dry 9 erede Console type Original platen Fixed type left side center reference e Acceptable originals Sheets books and 3 dimensional objects When the document feeder is used sheet originals only 60 to 90 g m or 16 Ib to 24 Ib without carbon backing staples and tape Maximum size A3 Ledger Item 6500 6570 5500 5570 8000 8070 Copy speed 65 cpm 55cpm 45 cpm 80cpm PM cycle 400K 340K 280K 440K Region NAD TWD SAD ASD AUD NAD ASD MJD NAD TWD SAD ASD AUD MJD UK
113. Every 280 000 copies abnormalities pad cloth or cleaner 6 Silicon Oil 340 Every 340 000 copies after cleaning Machine vacuum cleaner W White grease 400 Every 400 000 copies or No Molycoat 440 Every 440 000 copies replacement Inspector Alvania No 2 Same from here Q3 Replace in event of defor Remarks mation or other damage Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 1 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE PERIODIC INSPECTION CHECK LIST For 6570 5570 Replace Check Remarks Category Item to check 400 000 copies 400 000 copies 340 000 copies 940 000 copies 1 090 while on lt Page Item gt 1 Overall unit O 2 Main blade 400 1 340 lt P54 124 gt 3 Toner bag 100 Conducted by copier operator Cleaner lt P57 129 gt 4 Recovery blade O 5 2 5 Separation claw for Drum 400 O 3 340 lt 56 121 gt 6 Fur brush 400 340 lt P55 123 gt 7 Toner transport auger drive Ww 13 8 Cleaner lower guide C 8 1 Toner adhesion amount sensor OQ 22 8 2 Drum shaft bearing O 22 9 Discharge LED 10 Drum shaft C Drum 11 Drum 400 4 340 lt 47 1 gt 12 Ozone filter for exit fan 400 340 lt 61 111 gt 13 Glass CO or A 14 Glass holder C or A 15 Mirror 1 C 16 Mirror 2 17 3 O Scanner 18 Re
114. Exit sensor CN76 5V CN7 7 EXITSLED DO EXIT AD O 2 1 1 2 i 1 21 t ANN CIEXIT DA 010 61 RES AR C19 R66 i 4 R5 45V 1 2 47 CN3 1 APS APS 91 25 Size sensor 2 Size sensor 1 gt APS SIZES2 CN4 4 SIZE1 5V CN4 5 SGND R11 m DSIZE1 DSIZE2 R2 SIZES1 EMP 5V SGND EMP C3 gt C2 Empty sensor CN5 2 SGND SGND This is the input circuit from the optical sensors The following table shows the signal logic Connector section level OV 0 Sensor name Connector section level 5V 1 EMPS empty sensor No original With original With original connection section voltage 2 5V or less REGS aligning sensor No original connector section voltage 2 5V or more SIZES1 size sensor 1 With original No original SIZES2 size sensor 2 With original No original With original connection section voltage 2 5V or less TIM timing sensor No original connector section voltage 2 5V or more EXITS exit sensor With original connection section voltage 2 5V or less ADF closed No original connector section voltage 2 5V or more ADF open APSSW APS start switch 6570 5570 ADF 16 46 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 11 4 Pulse motor drive circuit diagram
115. GE FFNET ODER DIE TROMMEL ENTFERNT UND DIE VERRIEGELUNG UNWIRKSAM GEMACHT WIRD NICHT DIREKT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN DANGER RAYON LASER LORSQUE LE BLOC OPTIQUE EST OUVERT LE TAMBOUR RETIRE ET LE VERROUILLAGE HORS D USAGE EVITER L EXPOSITION DIRECTE AU RAYON NG CAUTION e Do not insert tools that are highly reflective into the path of the laser beam Remove all watches rings bracelets etc 2 Galvanomirror Four laser units are mounted on this scanning unit and 4 line scanning is possible by scanning of one plane of the polygonal mirror The galvanomirror controls the position of the laser beams in the secondary scanning direction so that optimum pitch 42 3 um between the four laser beams can be maintained at all times Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 3 6570 5570 PRINTING 3 Half mirror Half mirrors are used for combining and aligning to separate optical axes the laser beams that are emitted from the four laser units The transmissivity and reflectivity of each half mirror are designed so that the laser power is the same at the point that the four laser beams are combined Laser 1 Half mirror 1 Half mirror 2 Half mirror 3 DOCO 6570 5570 PRINTING 8 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Polygonal Mirror Motor Unit Laser beams The polygonal mirror motor unit comprises a polygonal mirror and a polygonal mirror motor 1 Polygonal mirror motor The polygonal mirror motor rotates the po lygonal mirror at high sp
116. Install the counter socket onto the frame 2 M3 screws 6 Reinstall the right top cover and rear cover Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 0 Harness connector Short connector Socket connector Connector of key copy counter Screw M3 1 85 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 7 Insert the key copy counter with its arrow fac ing up and pointing toward the copier 8 In the 08 setting mode enter 3 under code 202 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 86 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 24 Fine Adjustment of Binding Position Folding Position By moving the paper positioning plate up or down fine adjustment of the binding position folding position can be made Adjustment Code 05 Code 468 0 2 ncreasing the adjustment value shifts the binding position folding position towards the right hand page by 0 25mm for each step Decreasing the adjustment value shifts the binding position folding position towards the left hand page by 0 25mm for each step Adjustment value 0 Adjustment value Adjustment value Right hand page Left hand page Notes 1 When fine adjustment of the binding positio folding position is performed the follow ing result should be obtained 2 The outermost of the book in the figure below will be the book openin
117. Manual feed 1 SW SW SW SW paper width paper width paper width paper width Bottom Open Top Not empty switch 3 switch 2 switch 1 switch 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF ADU LCF paper JADU feed JADU LCF switch LCF tray Manual feed 2 transport start switch switch transport Disconnection down key switch _ _ switch 2 OFF ON Switch 1 OFF OFF ON ON ADU JADU ADU side ADU empty 3 switch aligning switch switch 2 switch ON Not empty T ON PFP U paper PFP U paper PFP U PFP U upper PFP middle PFP lower 4 start SW stop SW tray up SW SW cassette SW cassette SW cassette SW OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON PFP M paper PFP M paper PFP M PFP M 5 start SW stop SW tray up SW SW OFF OFF ON OFF PFP L paper PFP L paper PFP L PFP L empty 6 start SW stop SW tray up SW SW OFF OFF ON OFF ADU Copier 7 _ connection stop E Disconnection switch ON Front cover Reversal Exit switch Toner full Fuser exit 8 SW switch switch switch OFF ON ON ON OFF IPC Developer 9 connection unit not Disconnection mounted SW 0 5 z 5 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 8 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA B When the ENERGY SAVER key is ON LED indicating the energy saver mode is lit con B D E F G H Remar
118. Perform adjustment A477 Paper remaining indicator upper manual Al 2 0 3 code 475 first Then adjust as adjustment for MORE than 1 2 the capacity necessary Increase the value in these codes when the remaining 2478 Paper remaining indicator PFP middle manual Al LT 0 3 amount of paper indication is adjustment for MORE than 1 2 the capacity size 4 greater than the actual amount of paper size 8 Example When the paper A479 Paper remaining indicator lower manual Al LT 0 3 remaining adjustment for MORE than 1 2 the capacity size 7 indicator shows size 3 then changes suddenly to 2481 Drum motor speed fine adjustment Copier 128 0 255 Increasing the value by 1 1 increases the motor speed by A482 Drum motor speed fine adjustment Printer 120 0 255 0 067 Set value to 128 for the copier and 120 for the printer 4 483 Registration motor speed fine adjustment Copier 128 0 255 Increasing the value by 1 1 increases the motor speed by A484 Registration motor speed fine adjustment Printer 128 0 255 0 097 Set value to 128 for the copier and printer 485 Fuser drive motor speed fine adjustment Copier 128 0 255 Increasing the value by 1 1 increases the motor speed by A486 Fuser drive motor speed fine adjustment Printer 128 0 255 0 061 Set value to 128 for the copier and printer 4 487 Transfer belt drive motor speed fine adjustment Copier 128 0 255
119. Pressure The fuser has been set heat roller surface temperature 200 C pressurizing pressure 100 kg taking the fusing performance wrinkling curling and toner transfer deficiency on the leading trailing edge of duplexing copy into consideration when our company recommended paper is used This is to allow the characteristics of the paper to be demonstrated in a well balanced manner However various types of paper are used in the field and factors such as the paper thickness and surface flatness greatly affect the fusing performance in particular If the fusing performance deteriorates while using a specific type of paper adopt the following procedures to cope with each case Procedures Increase the preset temperature of the heat roller surface by keying in the temperature with the control panel Increase the pressurizing pressure of the heat rollers by inserting spacers the pressure springs 3 Carry out both 1 and 2 Perform this procedure in order to while confirming the effect and adverse influence of the adjust ment lt Procedure 0 Increase the preset temperature of the heat roller surface Change the heat roller preset temperature when the copier is ready by code 411 in setting mode 08 The default is 8 200 C and can be changed within the range 8 to 11 200 C to 209 C Notes 1 When a large value is set to increase the temperature the level of wrinkling
120. SW door switch Used for ensuring safety MAIN SW main switch Used for switching the main power supply ON and OFF TR TCH SW Transfer belt touch switch Used for touching the transfer belt TR SEP SW Used for separating the transfer belt Transfer belt estrangement switch EXIT AC SW Exit door inter lock switch Used for ensuring safety HTR SW Fuser switch Used for safety without fuser unit CST3 SW Middle cassette switch Detects misplacement of the middle cassette CST4 SW Lower cassette switch Detects misplacement of the lower cassette LCF DOOR2 SW LCF door switch 2 Detects opening closing of the LCF door 6 Heaters and lamps Name Function Remarks D HTR M damp heater M Maintains the optical system at the preset temperature D HTR L damp heater L Maintains the optical system at the preset temperature D HTR L damp heater lower Maintains the drum and transfer separation charger case at the preset temperature HTR LANMP heater lamp Used for fusing EXPO LAMP exposure lamp Exposes the original PS LRG 300 lamp regulator PC board Controls the exposure lamp ERS 300 discharge LED lamp Used for discharging the drum 7 PC boards Name Function Remarks PWA F CCD 300 Control CCD image pre processing CCD image pre processing PC board PWA F SLG 300 scanning optical Controls the scanning optical system system contr
121. T 15 23 ADU inlet reversal roller drive When the forward rotation clutch turns ON the in let roller rotates in the direction forward rotation for feeding paper to the stack section of the ADU When the reverse rotation clutch turns ON the in let roller rotates in the direction reverse direction for turning the paper over 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 4A Width guide motor Length guide motor Paper side guide Paper trailing edge guide Reverse rotation clutch NS 4 AN pA UY CG ee Y Lee x Inlet reversal roller TEN CO Y ie ONS FINS a N Forward rotation clutch Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 2 4 Holding gate drive When the flapper solenoid turns ON the projection on the spring clutch becomes disconnected and rotates When the flapper solenoid turns OFF the projection on the spring clutch stopped by the flap per solenoid to stop rotation 15 2 5 ADU pick up roller ADU feed roller and ADU separation belt drive e When the ADU feed clutch turns ON the ADU feed roller and ADU pick up roller rotates e The ADU separation belt rotates by the gear on the ADU feed roller in the direction opposite reverse direction to that of the ADU feed roller 15 2 6 ADU aligning roller drive When the ADU aligning clutch turns ON the ADU aligning rol
122. TT 6570 5570 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT J Mounting the lower damp heater 1 Remove the transfer belt unit 2 Remove the transport guide 1 screw 3 Attach the lower damp heater unit on the base of the belt transport unit 3 screws n 99 97 FETE X N Y 4 Attach the lower damp heater cover 2 screws 5 Pass the damp heater harness through the M band on the belt transport unit and attach lock ing supports 1 pc to the rear frame and 2 pcs to the base frame 6 Make sure that the damp heater connector is inserted into the rear side of the fuser unit Notes 1 When installing the damp heater cover SS a gt ir prevent the harness from becoming 5 2 Before installing the lower damp heater B a AR unit check the power voltage DA CS PS ES o NO 6570 5570 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 11 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 1 General Description Transport roller Lower developer sleeve ansport role Drum Upper developer sleeve Leveler 7 Mixer 1 Mixer 2 v fe E OG JE ra STN Suction duct Auto toner sensor S
123. The aligning section aligns the leading edge of paper fed from the LCF PFP and manual feed tray and transports the paper to the transfer position This section comprises an aligning roller paper stop switch and its drive mechanisms aligning motor 1 Aligning roller Paper fed from the feed roller is held in contact against the aligning roller which is at rest to align the leading edge The upper and lower aligning rollers then rotate to transport paper to the transfer position The aligning rollers are brushed to prevent paper dust from adhering to them BS Paper stop switch Detects that the leading edge of paper has arrived at the aligning roller It also detects that the trailing edge of paper has passed through the aligning roller In the former case the copier detects that the aligning rollers have completed paper alignment The switch also uses paper jam detection 9 2 2 Configuration and drive system Upper aligning roller G20 E Forward rotation Lower aligning rolle 4 gning Backward rotation Gear Timing pulley Timing belt Number of teeth Pich mm TP22 Aligning motor G25 TB Z58 P3 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 5 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 2 3 Disassembly and replacement A Upper aligning roller 1 Remove the aligning motor and developer stay front side and rear side 3 screws for each 2 Remove the front E ring bearing and bush 3 Slide the upper aligning to the rear
124. The tip must be firmly pressed against the DF cover The tip must not protrude Section a from the DF cover Insert into hole and fix to rib cross section Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 71 6570 5570 ADF 15 DF cover sheets 1 2 4 5 6 and 8 Each of the DF cover sheets must be fixed according to the rib contact reference in the direction of the arrows shown in the figure below Overlapping of ribs is not allowed Clearance must be 0 to 2mm Firmly fix the DF cover sheets so that they do not rise up along the curve of the DF cover DF cover sheet 6 DF cover sheet 5 DF cover sheet 4 DF cover sheet 2 DF cover sheet 8 Overlapping of the gate Up 9 DF cover sheet 1 SS 2 locations cs zo Overlapping of the gate s not allowed 29 ira 6570 5570 ADF 16 72 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 Tray sheet guides Fixing reference 0 to 0 5mm end face rounded corner end reference Tray sheet guide Fixing reference 0 to 0 5mm end face rounded corner end Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 0 reference zr ofc o g o SEI ST dod oen 5555 5988 TA LA o 100 5 5 9 lt 99 0
125. Transfer bias 9 Note This adjustment must be done only after the image adjustment described in 1 5 After this adjustment the image density adjustment described in 1 6 must be done Code Adjustment item Procedure 580 Automatic adjustment Procedure of gamma correction 1 Turn on the power switch with 0 5 2 Select A3 or LD paper for the output paper size 3 Press the 2 key and then ENERGY SAVER key One copy of the 33 gradation pattern is outputted Confirm that there is no blank or line on the gradation pattern outputted in the above step 3 and the density changes gradually f there is any problem in the gradation pattern repeat the step 3 to output a gradation pattern again 5 Face the darker side of the output gradation pattern to the original scale at the exit side and put it on the original glass with the printed face down 6 Input the code 580 through the control panel and press the START key The scanner automatically reads the original and the operation for the automatic adjustment of gamma correction will be done About 10 seconds 7 When the operation completes normally the machine returns to the stand by status If the operation ends abnormally TEST MODE ERROR will be displayed See the indication on the next page For the abnormal ending press the C key to release the error indication When released the display on the control panel returns to the stand by s
126. Transmission time out error C77 Transmission buffer full C78 ADF power ON I F error C79 Reception time out error 1 GROR Check the harness between the ADF control PC board and the scanner control PC board for disconnections or open circuits Check mainly the IC2 IC3 IC14 CN1 on the ADF control PC board for open or short circuits Check mainly the IC1 IC7 J8 on the scanner control PC board for open or short circuits Replace the ADF control PC board Replace the scanner control PC board SLG board C80 Error of timing sensor adjustment 1 95 o Mar 2000 Check between the timing sensor and the reflection mirror for foreign objects and the reflection mirror for dirt Check the harness between the timing sensor and the LGC board for open circuit Check mainly IC4 IC5 and CN6 on the LGC board for open or short circuits Replace the timing sensor Replace the LGC board Initialize the ADF EEPROM and perform automatic sensor adjustment TOSHIBA TEC 4 7 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 6 Other Troubles on the ADF System Originals other than set on the lowest are fed Have too many originals been placed No Yes Reset the originals with the recommended number Is the original curled or folded too much Yes Flatten and reset the original Are different size originals placed together Yes Y Set only same size ori
127. User paper size selection EUR FOLIO 0 255 Select the Icon of the paper size requested 1 for the OTHER key UC Note The customer can COMPUTER change the paper size using the adjust selections 618 Mixed size originals priority Copier All 0 0 1 0 Same size originals 1 Selection 1 Mixed originals Note For USA only Letter R and Legal size originals can be mixed For Europe only A4 and A3 size originals can be mixed 625 Non printed sheet Copier 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 prevention mode These new codes 487 488 are available from the 8070 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 30 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MODE DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 626 Bypass feed paper size Copier All 1 0 1 0 Disabled 1 recognition 1 Enabled 636 Image shift copying width All 0 0 1 0 Enabled 1 setting singly linkage of 1 Disabled front side and back side 638 Paper size change in Copier All 2 0 2 0 All menu operations allowed 1 drawer or LCC enable 1 All menu operations prohibited 2 Sheet cassette selectable 639 Date and Time display Copier All 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 640 Date format Copier All 0 Japan 0 2 0 1999 10 16 1 1 Europe 1 16 10 1999 2 UC 2 10 16 1999 Others 641 Automatic sorting mode from Copier
128. W 2 Remove the 3 screws IL P Left inner cover E f Left front cover Right front cover amp 1 Remove the middle inner cover n 2 Remove the 3 screws 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 34 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Belt transport unit right cover 2 5 Belt transport unit Belt transport unit 1 Push down the jam release in the direction of left cover right cover _ the arrow and draw out the belt transport unit towards you 2 Remove the 2 screws R Belt transport unit left cover 1 Remove the 2 screws S PFP inner cover 1 Draw out the ADU unit 2 Remove the 4 screws er cover 2 4 2 Removal of PC boards A Logic PC board PWA F LGC 300 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the 15 connectors 3 Remove the lock supports 2 pcs and the 2 screws then remove the logic PC board Locking 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 35 6570 5570 OUTLINE B Motor drive PC board P
129. a hole in the tray s platform When this happens the motor is energized and is made to rotate in the direction that allows the paper tray to lower Simultaneously the LCD panel displays the ADD PAPER symbol The tray motor stops when the LCF bottom switch is actuated 5 When the tray is loaded with paper and the door closed the motor turns ON and drives the paper tray upward until it reaches the paper feed mechanism which turns the motor OFF Note The other time the motor rotates in the direction to move the tray down is when the TRAY DOWN key is depressed Opening the door and then closing it allows the motor to energize and raise the tray 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 14 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Up and down movement of manual pick up Manual pick up roller roller When the manual pick up solenoid is energized the pick up bracket is lowered and allows the Manual pick up roller to also lower When the manual pick up solenoid is de ener gized the pick up bracket is raised by the ac tion of the solenoid s spring that pulls back the lever and thus the pick up roller Manual pick up solenoid Pick up bracket Manual pick up roller Manual pick up roller Pick up bracket Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 15 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM B LCF pick up roller The LCF pickup roller remains lowered due to the force of gravity The lower limit is fixed by the bracket The tray height for the LCF
130. amount of the paper drift using the scales on the unit as a guide rd T eee 2 After adjustment tighten the 4 fixing screws on Lower feed guide Adjustment width the stack guide unit Scale F side Note The 1mm interval scales are useful in mak ing this adjustment 3 After adjustment make a copy to check that horizontal deviation is corrected Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 71 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT C Checking the operation of empty detection lever 1 Move the empty detection lever up down by hand When the lever goes down check that the leading edge of the lever is always in the concave of the empty sensor as shown in the illustration 2 This operation should be repeated several times to ensure that no error condition occur as shown in the illustration Supplementary When determining the adjustment amount for the horizontal deviation make copies using the follow ing mode Decide the amount observing the 8th 9th and 10th copy images Mode Original A4 size or LT size manually placed origi nal 2 sheets Paper sheet A4 size or LT size LCF paper feeding is preferable Single sided original gt Duplexed copies Group mode copy Quantity 10 sheets Supplementary Several sheets from the head stacked in the Duplexer will be fed right after stacked for the pur pose of increasing efficiency of duplex copying At this time stacking operation comes as first priority Sot
131. between the inlet guide and lower heat roller Check the heat rollers for proper rotation 3 Cleaning Procedure for Heat Rollers When the heat roller becomes dirty it will cause paper jamming If this happens wipe the roller surface clean with cotton moistened in alcohol For a better cleaning effect clean the roller while it is Still warm Note Be careful not to rub the Teflon coated surface with your fingernails or hard objects because itis easily damaged Do not use silicon oil on the upper heat roller Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 3 3 8070 6570 5570 4580 SUPPLIES 3 6 Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt 1 Handling Precautions D Do not touch the belt surface with your bare hands 2 Prevent oil or other foreign matter from adhering to the belt surface 3 Do not touch the transfer belt with alcohol or other organic solvents Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt 3 7 Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt Power Supply Roller 1 Handling Precautions 7 Do not touch the charger roller surface with your bare hands 2 Be carefull not to scratch or hit on to the charger roller surface 3 8 Checking and Replacing Transfer Belt Cleaning Brush 1 Handling Precautions D Do not touch the brush surface with your bare hands 8070 6570 5570 4580 SUPPLIES 3 4 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 4 Scanner System Related Service Call C27 C28 Carriage initialization error Remov
132. by SC 2 1 Disabled English fixing 690 HDD formatting Hard Disk All 2 4 2 DSI Type formatted 1 Drive The power switch must be turned OFF ON after Perform the formatting when the WAIT message is no longer displayed the HDD is replaced or the 3 Tandem type formatted data has been corrupted 4 Only Tamdem area formatted 691 HDD Type display All 0 3 0 Not formatted 2 1 Not used 2 DSI Type formatted 3 Tandem type formatted This item is added from the 8070 Power must be turned OFF after WAIT is cleared Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 81 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MODE DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 692 HDD size display All mE X X GB 2 800 Toner adhesion amount All 0 0 16 1 sensor error count clear 802 Image quality maintenance 0 0 1 0 ON 1 OFF 1 control ON OFF 803 Image quality maintenance All 2 0 30 unit X1 000 sheets 1 control startup count setting 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 31 1 2000 TOSHIBA 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MODE DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 805 Test pattern data 1 setting All 88 0 255 1 814 Toner adhesion amount All 97 0 255 1 sensor abnormal value 900 Displays the System FLAS
133. changes to level the developer motor stops 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 8 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC C Control signals 1 DEVCK signal LGCDEV MOT input This signal is a reference clock signal for the developer motor to rotate at a fixed speed The fre quency of the reference clock is 821 2Hz When the cycle of FG pulse deviation from the reference frequency is within 6 25 this state is specified as lock range normal rotation Also at this time the LED LP1 light comes ON 2 DEVON signal LGC DEV MOT input This signal is the motor ON OFF control signal When it becomes L level the motor rotates Signal level of motor circuit level L level Reference clock 821 2Hz Motor OFF Motor ON Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 9 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 42 Brush motor toner motor M14 drive circuit The toner motor is provided to supply toner for the developer unit The toner motor is driven by transistor 2501415 Q1 on the logic PC board and its circuit is structured as follows 24 1 VDD 029 D1 Z Toner motor R213 gt ANN Q1 25D1415 R236 The motor winding is connected to the 24V at its side and to the collector of Q40 at its side When PH4 TNRMT signal of the gatearray becomes L level e Q29 is turned on gt Q1 is turned on e The 24V power supply supplies current to Q1 via the motor winding the motor
134. completion of the exit operation 8 Start of feed to setting the original at the exposure position completion of feed ope 6 9 C S When the feed signal is received the initial alignment signal is reset feed of the original standing by at the initial alignment position is started the same processes from 4 to 8 are carried out and the original is set at the exposure position When the exit signal is received during feed of the 2nd original onwards the DF operation in progress signal is set Then the reversal motor starts to operate in the forward direction to rotate the reversal roller and the exit operation is started to output the original Exposed originals are transported to the exit section side If the original transported to the exit sec tion can be drawn out and output they are drawn out and output from the platen top during exposure of the original If there is an original on the tray when feed is completed initial alignment of the next original is started This operation is repeated until all originals on the tray are fed 6570 5570 ADF 16 8 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Start of original feed and exit to exit sensor When the original is output the number of drive pulses up start of exit deceleration is set at the point when the exit sensor turns ON When the output original is nipped by the exit roller by a specified amount or more when setting
135. copying 1 The INTERRUPT key is pressed e The interruption LED is turned ON e The copying operation is temporarily halted and carriages 1 and 2 return to their home position e JOB INTERRUPTED JOB 1 SAVED is displayed e The copying mode is set to automatic exposure and 1 to 1 reproduction ratio The copy quantity indicator remains unchanged S The preferred copying modes are specified After interrupt copying is terminated e PRESS INTERRUPT TO RESUME JOB 1 is displayed e When the INTERRUPT key is pressed again the interrupt lamp goes OFF and the copier returns to the conditions before the interruption e READY TO RESUME JOB 1 is displayed The START key is pressed The copying operation before the interruption is resumed 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 4 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 3 Fault Detection If a fault occurs in the copier a symbol corresponding to the type of fault will be displayed in order to draw the attention of the operator 4 3 1 Classification of faults A Faults which can be cleared without resetting the door switch 1 ADD PAPER 2 BYPASS MISFEED 3 INSERT KEY COPY COUNTER 4 ADD TONER 5 REPLACE TONER BAG Faults which cannot be cleared without resetting the door switch 1 CLEAR PAPER 2 DEVELOPER UNIT MISLOADING Faults which cannot be cleared unless the main switch S1 is turned OFF 1 CALL SERVICE 4 3 2 Explanation of faults A 1 ADD PAPE
136. corresponds to an increase in the division of the reproduction scale in increments of 0 1mm step Notes 1 Before making a test print make sure that 100 A is appeared on the top of the message dispaly after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range 86 to 168 The default adjustment value is 128 Copy movement direction Copied scale Actual scale 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 46 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC b CCD primary scanning deviation 1 Place the scale on the original glass as shown in the illustration below and make an A4 LT 10096 test copy from LCF Place the scale with its leading edge aligned with the line on the rear side indicating A3 Ledger size on the left side original scale and the scale side face pushed up against the left side original scale 2 Adjust the distance A which should be 100 1 mm from the position copied to the edge of the paper using the following steps 806 START Adjust by digital keys SETy INT gt E S gt 1 Test copy When the value increases the image moves toward front side of the paper in increments of 0 169 mm step Notes 1 Before making a test copy make sure that 10096 A is appeared on the top of the message display after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range
137. cover 2 Remove the main charger and cleaner 3 Disconnect the connector remove the screw and remove the main charger guide unit H Main charger cleaning motor 1 Remove the main charger guide unit 2 Remove the connector and remove the charger cleaning motor unit 2 screws 3 Remove the motor 2 screws I Main charger cleaning switch 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors and remove the Screw Note When installing the switch press in the di rection of arrow Also insert the harness into the terminals paying attention to the color and bend the terminals to an angle of 45 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 10 Connector Main charger cleaning motor Connector Switch fixing screw o 6570 5570 DRUM J Discharge LED 1 Remove the stopper bracket 1 screw and dis connect the connector 2 Draw out the discharge LED Ozone filter 1 Remove the upper exit cover 2 Unlock the claw lock turn the knob and draw out the ozone filter 3 Remove the ozone filter from its holder L Ozone filter unit 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors remove the 2 Screws and remove the ozone filter unit 6570 5570 DRUM 10 TI Ozone filter Ozone filter
138. drive PC board Reflector cna Rail for CRG 1 Original glass Rail for CRG 2 Scanner control PC board SLG board Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 1 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 2 Configuration The following describes the configuration of the optical system and the purpose of its components 1 Original glass The original glass is where the original document is placed for scanning The exposure lamp illumi nates the original document 2 Carriage 1 Carriage 1 is the optical assembly that has the exposure lamp and is used for scanning the original document The illustration below shows some of the components that make up the assembly Thermostat Heel 3 iE 1 Carriage 1 a Exposure lamp The exposure lamp is the light source used for illuminating the original document It is a 180 watt Halogen lamp b Reflector The reflector s purpose is to maximize the amount light being directed to the original document that is emitted by the exposure lamp Reflector Original Glass zy Fr __ Exposure lamp Em Reflector c Mirror 1 Mirror 1 is for guiding light reflected from the original to mirror 2 Mirror 2 is described later on Mirror 1
139. error between SYS and SLG boards ADF related service call C72 Error of aligning sensor adjustment C73 EEPROM initializing error C74 Error of exit sensor adjustment C76 Transmission time out error C77 Transmission buffer full C78 ADF power ON I F error C79 Reception time out error C80 Error of timing sensor adjustment Other service calls C94 M CPU is abnormal C99 PFC microcomputer is abnormal Laser optical system related CA1 Polygonal mirror motor is abnormal service call CA2 H SYNC is abnormal Secondary scanning rough adjustment error 4 Primary scanning counter load error 5 Laser power adjustment error CA6 Laser PWM calibration error CA9 Image data transmission error from SYS board CAA Secondary scanning fine adjustment error CAB Secondary scanning inter page compensation error CAC Primary scanning dot adjustment error CAD Primary scanning tap adjustment error CAE Primary scanning tap amount measurement error CAF Primary scanning inter page compensation error CDO Laser initializing time out error Finisher related service call CB1 Feed motor is abnormal CB2 Delivery motor is abnormal CB3 Tray lift motor is abnormal CB4 Alignment motor is abnormal CB5 Staple motor is abnormal CB6 Stapler shift motor is abnormal CB7 Height sensor is abnormal CB8 Backup RAM data is abnormal CB9 Saddle stitcher paper pushing plate motor is abnormal Mar 2000 TOSHIB
140. feed motor and transport motor start to operate in the forward direction and the aligning roller and transport belt rotate to start transport of the original standing by at the initial alignment position to the exposure position From the 2nd original onwards the reversal motor also starts to rotate in the forward direction at the same time to start exit operation The number of pulses from start of transport of the original at the initial alignment position to when the trailing edge of the original passes the aligning sensor is counted to detect the length of the original At the same time the original size is determined also by the state of the width sensor that was stored to memory at completion of initial alignment If the original is a non standard size or the original size differs from that of the previously fed original the original size data is sent to the copier 6570 5570 ADF 16 12 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 5 Aligning sensor OFF to timing sensor OFF aS ZN Vo o o OY A The feed motor stops at the point when the timing sensor turns OFF and the trailing edge of the original is detected If exit operation is not carried out simultaneously or has already completed at this time the reversal motor starts to rotate in the forward direction simultaneously to rotate the reversal roller At the same time the flapper solenoid turns ON to switch the reversal flapper over to the reversal side When the exit ope
141. fixed time Paper misfeeding E15 16 17 19 The error code is different according to the cassette used 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 4 8 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 4 1 ADD Toner density has become low Toner empty detection Auto toner sensor Control circuit ADD TONER symbol appears copying is not possible Clearing method Open the toner supply cover and supply toner from the toner cartridge Toner supply operation copying is possible REPLACE TONER BAG The toner bag becomes full of toner l The toner bag tilts due to its own weight the toner full switch will be turned ON 4 REPLACE TONER BAG display e When the toner full switch comes ON during copying Copying will stop after the last sheet has exited during copying Clearing method Replace with a new toner bag Developer unit misloading Disconnection of the developer unit Developer unit loading abnormal is displayed Clearing method Connect the developer unit connector and close the front cover CALL SERVICE If the CLEAR STOP key and the 8 key are pressed simultaneously when the CALL SERVICE symbol is flashing one of the error codes will appear on the message display For the contents of the error codes refer to the SERVICE HANDBOOK Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 9 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 4 4 Flow Charts 4 4 1 Power ON to ready Main switch ON DC power ON YES Cover open
142. gear G17 Idle gear G24 Idle gear G20 Mixer 1 gear G45 G24 i L OS Input gear G27 Rear paddle gear G31 Lower magnetic roller gear G17 Mixer 2 gear G45 Rear side Transport roller gear G23 Idle gear G19 Front paddle gear G18 Front side Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 12 5 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT Developer Unit Drive Motor shaft Idle gear G10 5 P25 LJ Idlegear P25 Paddle Developer unit Drive input gear Copier rear side drive z G27 Rear side i Mixer 1 Idle gear Rear side gear Idle gear Lower and upper G24 H 64 GB L G20 14 magnetic rollers Mixer 2 ll G17 G45 45 P en ee Idle gear Transport Front side gear roller v G18 G23 Front side 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 4 Motors 12 4 1 Developer motor IC motor drive A IC motor V Hall elements Hall element Equivalent Circuit of Motor Structure of IC Motor Winding 0 U 1 30 U V 60 Hall element A Hall element B Hall element C Hall voltage Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 7 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT B Developer motor d
143. justed automatically when the front side drive gears are adjusted But the rear side drive gears sometimes do not follow the front Thus the procedure has been changed the front side drive gears are adjusted first and then that of the rear side will be adjusted to match the dowel This procedure has been performed starting with the following models 8070 From the first production 6570 From LJ913007 5570 NJ913571 4580 From ZJ910707 Note2 Adjust the front rear side gears with the central gear The spring clutch may lock when the gear is operated So push the projection of the clutch unit to turn the gear 2 Align the projection on the clutch unit of the holding gate and fasten with an E ring as shown figure Note3 When it is fixed by an E ring be sure to check that the holding gate position is as in the illustration correct position of holding gate Projection of clutch unit Holding gate Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 73 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 3 Make sure that drive gear is installed correctly checking the following points If it not installed correctly perform the above 1 2 procedures Note When new arbor is installed perform the groove for spring installation of 1 15 3 Holding gate position adjustment 2 SLEEVE P U 80 in B center 0 Open the bypass feed unit Check below while it is opened While the so
144. of each 01 9 00 D 4 PWR priority mode PM counter etc TEST MODE List print 94 STAR Printing of 05 08 code data lists 00 P 4 mode PWR OFF LIST PRINT Unit replace 6 4START Mode for executing auto toner adjustment PWR 00 K 4 mode 4 PWR and drum counter clear OFF TEST MODE Note To access the desired self diagnostic mode turn on the power switch while pressing the appropriate keys e g 0 5 Procedure All LEDs lit mode 01 Cl or 0 9 Exit 0 1 All LEDS light L START Key check C Exit PWR START Notes 1 The mode cannot be cleared by 0 9 during the key check it can be cleared only by C It can be cleared by both 0 9 and C when all LEDs on the control panel are lit 2 Key Check With LED Press to turn LED out Without LED Press to display this in message area 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 6 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Test mode 03 Refer to 1 2 1 and 1 2 2 Test print mode 04 Refer to 1 2 3 Test print mode Adjustment mode 05 Refer to 1 2 4 Adjustment mode List print mode 9 START code gt START PWR OFF PWR 101 05 adjustment code Start of operation 102 08 setting code 103 08 setting code For tandem 201 Job access code Unit replace mode 6 START code START ________ PWR OFF PWR 1 Auto toner adjustment Start of
145. p PEN b 90C402M HC2A4FL D _ 1C20 HCL4FL p HC244FL 183 GW lt 1641 40 1C48HC540 ee 1C55 HC540 6570 5570 PC BOARD 18 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC TOSHIBA SERVICE HANDBOOK DIGITAL PLAIN PAPER COPIER 6070 6570 5510 4500 File No 31110001 Copyright 2000 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR THE COPIER 8070 6570 5570 4580 The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician 1 Transportation Installation When transporting installing the copier move it by the casters while lifting the stoppers The copier is quite heavy and weighs approximately 250 kg 551 Ib therefore pay full attention when handling it e Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115V or 120V 20A 220V 230V 240V 10A or more for its power source The copier must be grounded for safety Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe Select a suitable place for installation Avoid excessive heat high humidity dust vibration and direct sunlight Also provide proper ventilation as the copier emits a slight amount of ozone To insure adequate working space for the copying operation keep a minimum clea
146. position sensor normal No Replace the sensor Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the alignment motor normal No un Correct the wiring Yes Is there a mechanical object caught on the alignment plate movement path Yes Yes Correct the mechanical mechanism No Does replacement of the alignment motor M3 rectify the trouble No M Replace the finisher controller board Yes END CB5 Stapler motor is abnormal Is the wiring between the stapler and the finisher controller board normal No Correct the wiring Yes Does replacement of the stapler rectify the trouble No Replace the finisher controller board Yes 1 END 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 20 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC CB6 Stapler shift motor is abnormal Is the stapler shift home position sensor PI7 normal No Yes Y e Replace the sensor Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the stapler shift motor normal No Yes Correct the wiring Is there any mechanical object caught on the stapler stand shift path Yes No Does replacem Correct the mechanical mechanism ent of the stapler shift motor M4 rectify the trouble No Yes END CB7 Hight sensor Procedure 1 e Replace the finisher controller board is abnormal Does turning the copier s power switch OFF then ON again rectify the trouble
147. press the START key Key in the value press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset 495 Developer drive motor speed fine adjustment Printer 6 0 15 Increasing the value by 1 increases the motor speed by 3 85 set value to 6 501 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the Copier 128 0 255 Increasing the value darkens center setting Photo the copy at the center setting 503 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the Copier 128 0 255 of manual exposure center setting Text Photo 504 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the Copier 128 0 255 center setting Text 505 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the Copier 20 0 255 the value lightens lighter setting Text Photo the copy at the lighter setting 506 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the Copier 10 0 255 of manual exposure lighter setting Photo 507 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the Copier 30 0 255 lighter setting Text 508 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the Copier 13 0 255 Increasing the value darkens darker setting Text Photo the copy at the darker setting 509 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the Copier 20 0 255 of manual exposure darker setting Photo 510 Manual exposure fine adjustment for the Copier 12 0 255 darker setting Text 512 Automatic exposure fine adjustment Copier 128 0 255 Increasing the value darke
148. ring and bush and then the trans port roller The transport roller 2 and 3 are same parts J Transport roller 1 1 Remove the front clutch guide and the trans port clutch 2 Remove the front E ring and bush 3 Remove the 3 screws fixing the rear connector bracket and then remove the connector bracket 4 Remove the rear E ring pulley pin and belt b Remove the E ring and bush and then the transport roller The transport roller 1 and 4 are same parts K Transport switch 2 1 Turn the ADU unit cover 2 Disconnect the connector and release the switch claw from the bracket to remove trans port switch 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 13A 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU L ADU drive unit 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 2 Remove the 5 screws fixing the ADU drive unit and then the ADU drive unit M Feed clutch and aligning clutch 1 Remove the ADU drive unit 2 Remove the bracket 2 screws 3 Remove the 4 bushes 4 Remove the E ring gear and pin 5 Remove the feed clutch and the 2 set screws fixing the aligning clutch Then remove the feed clutch and aligning clutch Note The gear on the feed clutch side is 232 and
149. rotates When TNRMT signal becomes H level Q29 is turned off gt Q1 is tuned off e The current which was flowing in the motor winding flows via the route of diode D1 t decreases at the rate of the time constant determined by the inductance and resistance of the winding e The motor stops 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 5 Auto Toner Sensor Circuit 12 5 1 Brief description e Functions of auto toner circuit e Detects the density of the toner in the developer material Density drops toner supply e Detects that the toner in the toner hopper has been used up toner empty Configuration of auto toner circuit e Auto toner sensor Detects toner density Control section Control to maintain the toner in the developer material at a constant specific density Toner motor Replenishes the toner in the developer material Display unit Displays the toner empty status Toner hopper qm A m my mem mad imm msn mn P mem ce Arithmetic and control unit PWA F LGC 300 I I I DA converter 1 15 88347 I A04 I I switch Control voltage signal Auto toner sensor Developer material Toner density signal Developer unit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 11 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 5 2 Operation of auto toner sensor
150. stop rings are firmly fitted in the groove Make sure that the spring is firmly fitted on the upper and lower projections After assembly make sure that the power supply roller rotates smoothly and moves vertically smoothly by the spring Do not touch the surface of the power supply roller directly with your hands 6570 5570 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT E Brush 1 Remove the transfer belt support power sup ply mechanism from the transfer belt unit 2 Remove the short transport guide fastening screw and slide the transport guide Then draw out the transport guide upwards 3 Remove the front stop ring and the 3 gears Note a and c have claws Remove in order a b and then c 4 Remove the stop ring on the rear brush axis and pull out the bushing 5b Press the brush temporarily to the rear rotate the shaft on the front side and draw out the brush upwards to the front Notes 1 When installing the gear install so that the projection on the inner diameter of the gear shaft fits firmly into the groove on the shaft 2 When the bush in the nozzle side comes off securely install it with care of the di rection 3 Do not directly touch the surface of the brush with your hands F Cleaning blade 1 Remove the transfer belt support and power supply mechanisms from the transfer belt unit 2 Remove the 3 screws the reinforcing plate and remove the cleanin
151. that specified the aligning value can be changed reduced as a measure However when the aligning value is reduced excessively this may cause the deviation of leading edge registra tion Therefore make sure that no deviation occurs while adjusting the value Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 39 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 5 2 Adjusting the printer section a Polygonal motor 600 dpi Primary scanning reproduction ratio of the printer unit Follow the procedure below to make a test print Paper source LCF Paper size A4 LT 1 0 5 PWR ON gt 1 gt E S 1 Digital keys 2 Measure the distance A the distance between the 1st line and 21st line 3 In order to set the distance A to 200 mm 0 5 mm adjust using the following steps D gt 401 gt START gt Set the value INT key or LCD SET icon Carry out the same in the following gt 1 gt E S 1 An increase in the value makes the reproduction scale distance A longer 0 05mm STEP Notes 1 Before making a test print make sure that 100 A is appeared on the top of the message display after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test print 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range 86 to 168 The default adjustment value is 128 Print movement direction 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 40 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC b Laser w
152. the transport belt and reversal roller rotate and the dummy exit operation is started After the alignment sensor detects the leading edge of the original the original is transported for a specified number of pulses and the leading edge of the original arrives and is aligned at the aligning roller The feed motor then stops Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 16 5 6570 5570 ADF 3 Restart to end of initial alignment The feed motor starts to operate in the forward direction to rotate the aligning roller transport of the original is started and the initial alignment operation is restarted After the timing sensor detects the leading edge of the original the original is transported by a speci fied number of pulses At the point that the original arrives at the initial alignment standby position the feed motor stops and the initial alignment operation is completed At this time forward rotation of the feed motor causes the weight plate to rise At the point that initial alignment operation is completed the status of the width sensor is checked and stored to memory The transport motor and reversal motor stop at the point when they have been driven by a specified number of pulses and exit operation is completed However note that if the original exit operation was in progress at this time dummy exit operation is completed at the point when the exit operation of this original is completed Start of original transpor
153. the D A converter output value 16 10 5 Solenoid drive circuit D4 24V i 5V lt x 4 Reverse solenoid gt RSOL CN7 4 TP6 R105 IC3 2 012 1 2 3 4 1 2 H 1 R100 S 3 R104 v 2 PGND SGND This circuit limits actuation and release of the reversal solenoid When the CPU output port is Low level pin 3 of IC3 turns Low and pin4 of IC3 turns High Q12 then turns ON to actuate the solenoid The solenoid drive signal is a PWM signal When the solenoid starts to actuate the solenoid actuates at its maximum torque at 100 duty After actuation is completed the duty ratio is reduced to hold actuation while heating of the solenoid is held in check 6570 5570 ADF 16 42 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 16 10 6 Reset circuit CK gt RES This circuit generates the CPU reset signal when the power is turned ON and when the power voltage is momentarily interrupted or low It has a watchdog timer for diagnosing CPU system operation After the power is turned ON pin 8 RES of IC3 is normally High However when the power is turned OFF or an error causes the 5 voltage to fall below 4 2V pin 8 of IC3 turns Low to reset the CPU and stop system operation During normal operation a fixed cycle clock is input to pin 3 CK of IC3 and IC3 s built in watchdog timer is cleared If a system error prevents the clock from being input from the CPU
154. the feed motor drive circuit As the feed motor transport motor and reversal motor share the same circuit configuration a description of the transport motor and reversal motor circuits is omitted in this item TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 R65 1 1 4 o 202 CLOCK 1 3972 4 N reseTao 1 002 one 1 Feed motor FEN 8 5 1 Ji Ji 81 C80 C79 C39 2 2 2 2 2 LEE PGND This circuit controls start stop direction of rotation and motor current of drive motor operation 2 phase excitation 1 2 phase excitation can be selected by inputting the D A converter output voltage either of two values or to pin 8 MODE of IC8 On this document feeder the feed and reversal motors are fixed to 1 2 phase excitation and the transport motor is fixed to 2 phase excitation The rotating speed of the motor and direction of rotation can be controlled by inputting the drive clock signal CLOCK and rotation direction signal CWB When the CPU sets the enable signal to Low pin 6 RESETB of IC8 turns Low all outputs of the drive IC are turned OFF regardless of the state of other signals The motor current value is set by dividing the D A converter output voltage by R73 and R59 and inputting the resultant voltage to pin 12 Vref of IC8 The motor current value can be set to any value by varying
155. the paper is separated The brush is made to electroconductive for electrostatically cleaning the toner A voltage opposite to that of the toner is applied to the toner The current flowing to the brush is controlled to a constant current of 5 Though the applied voltage changes as current is constant the voltage change is normally within the range 300 to 700V A voltage probe is required for measurement To prevent danger do not use a digital voltmeter Recovery auger Feeds scraped off residual toner to the waste toner transport auger section 7 Transport guide Guides paper that is held in contact by static electricity to the fuser unit This guide is made of material that prevents electrification caused by friction with the paper Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 11 3 6570 5570 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 8 Belt transport unit lock unlock mechanism The belt transport unit is locked inside the copier It is structured in such a way that it is locked when a paper jam is cleared and can be drawn out towards you The belt transport unit has a function for separating the transfer belt from the drum and a function for preventing erroneous operation of the handle when it is drawn out e When the handle is rotated left when viewed from the front the belt transport unit can be drawn out horizontally When the belt transport unit is inserted into the copier and the handle is rotated right when viewed from the front the unit is l
156. the range 0 to 255 The default adjustment value is 24 Copy movement direction 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 50 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC f Right margin 1 Make an A4 LT 100 test copy from LCF with the ADF open 2 Follow the procedure below so that the blank space at the right edge of the copy is adjusted at 2mm 0 5 mm Note The combination of the right edge blank space and the left edge blank space should be 4mm 1mm D gt 432 5 START Adjust by digital keys SET or INT gt E S gt 1 Test copy When the value increases margin becomes wider 0 0423 mm STEP Notes 1 Before making a test copy make sure that 10096 A is appeared on the top of the message display after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255 The default adjustment value is 0 Copy movement direction 2mm g Bottom margin Follow the procedure below to make a test copy 0 5 PWR ON gt C E S 1 Make an A4 LT 100 test copy from LCF with the ADF open 2 Follow the procedure below to adjust so that the blank space at the trailing edge of the copy is adjusted exactly to 2 mm 0 5 mm 0 gt 433 START Adjust by digital keys SET INT gt E S gt 1 Test copy When the value increases margin becomes wider 0 0423 mm STEP Notes 1 Before making a test copy make sure that 1009
157. the shooting plate board re move the 2 screws leaf springs and glass first F Scanning motor 1 Disconnect the connector 2 Remove the 2 screws and stepped screw then the scanning motor bracket 3 Remove the 3 screws and then the scanning motor 6570 5570 SCANNER t Ua Indicator unit at Document motor Shading board SS Plate spring Connector Mar 1999 TOSHIBA G Optical fan 1 Remove the top left cover Optical fan 2 Remove the indicator unit and disconnect the 2 connectors P N DA Ne o 3 Remove each of the 2 screws and the fan gt Mes T Q Q Carriage 1 1 Remove the original glass 0 9 9 e 29 Connector 2 Remove the blindfold cover on the control panel and top rear cover 8 Disconnect the power supply cable from the clamp disconnect the connector and remove the earth terminal 1 screw Ground terminal Clamp daba
158. the wire holder jig is installed do not slide or loosen the wound wire In full contact a Example Front side Installation phase Front side Rear side P Wire holder jig 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 64 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 12 Lens Unit It is impossible to adjust the lens unit Replace the entire unit with a new one Notes 1 Do not touch the fixing screw arrow in the figure 8 points indicated with arrows below when replacing the lens unit The screw color is red Pay attention to the two screws see above figure on the rear side see in the figure A Front side Rear side 2 Take sufficient care when handling the unit not to hold the adjustment area Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 65 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 12 1 Adjusting the lens magnification Notes 1 This adjustment must be carried out only when the scanner lens unit has been removed or replaced 2 Before this adjustment check that the primary scanning reproduction ratio of the printer is corrected 1 Place the scale on the original glass and make an A4 100 copy 2 Compare the copied scale with the actual scale to measure the error in the reproduction ratio 4 movement direction Copied scale Actual scale 3 Follow the procedure below to make adjustment so that the distance between eac
159. value by 6 at the main registration roller Paper length increases the aligning paper 219mm and less buckle by 0 9mm Key in Code 450 or 452 press the START key key in the Sub Code then press the START key Key in the value press SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset 455 Duplexer paper alignment paper buckle at A 10 0 31 ncreasing the value by 1 the main registration roller increases the aligning paper buckle by 0 9mm W456 0 lower paper alignment paper buckle A 2 0 31 ncreasing the value by 6 at the main registration roller Paper length increases the aligning paper 330mm and longer buckle by 0 9mm W456 1 lower paper alignment paper buckle A 8 0 31 ncreasing the value by 6 at the main registration roller Paper length increases the aligning paper 220mm to 329mm buckle by 0 9mm W456 2 lower paper alignment paper buckle A 5 0 31 ncreasing the value by 6 at the main registration roller Paper length increases the aligning paper 229mm and less buckle by 0 9mm in Code 456 press the START key key in the Sub Code then press the START key Key in the value press SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset 457 LCF paper alignment paper buckle at the A 16 0 31 ncreasing the value by main registration roller increases the aligning paper buckle by 0 9mm 458 Manual feed paper alignment paper buckle A 14 0 31 ncreasing the value by amount at he main registration roller
160. 0 Single count count LD or A3 copies and prints 1 5570 as a1 page 4580 1 Double count count LD or A3 copies and prints 1 8070 as 2 pages 353 Short size counter All 0 0 99999999 Each counter can be set to 0 zero or any other 1 354 Long size counter All 0 0 99999999 value 358 Bypass counter All 0 0 99999999 When set to 0 this will accurately record the 359 LCF counter All 0 0 99999999 number of pages from each area from the last PM 360 PFP upper counter All 0 0 99999999 or service call The counter information can also 370 PFP middle counter All 0 0 99999999 be supplied to the customer for tracking the usage 371 PFP lower counter All 0 0 99999999 of an area of the machine 372 Duplexer counter All 0 0 99999999 374 RADF original counter All 0 0 99999999 375 Copy job counter All 0 0 99999999 376 Pint job counter All 0 0 99999999 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 27 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MODE DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 382 LCF tray lockout counter All 0 0 1 The LCF tray operation is displayed when there is a 1 Note For tray lockout clearing to take effect set to 0 then turn the machinepower switch x machine ON problem detected with the tray raising or lowering The machine logic disables the LCF tray movement by placing a 1 in the memory at code 382 To enable the LCF set code 382 to
161. 0 0 1 0 Non standard Machine will not stop and prompt 1 of the original size operator to select copy size when non standard originals are used 1 Standard Machine will stop and prompt operator to select copy size when non standard originals are used 464 Correspondence for All 1 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Exposure fluetuations 480 Paper source priority All 1 0 4 0 LT A4 2 Upper drawer 1 selection 3 Middle drawer 4 Lower drawer 481 Automatic paper source All 1 0 2 0 OFF 1 Normal 3 Extended 1 change when 1 is set a paper source becomes empty and the same size paper is present in another source the machine will automatically switch to that source of paper 482 Paper feed retry All 0 0 1 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 when set to 0 the machine will only attempt to feed the paper 1 time before display a misfeed condition When set to 1 the machine will attempt to feed the paper 2 times before displaying a misfeed condition 483 Polygonal motor pre running All All 0 0 2 0 Enabled RADF when originals are placed in the 1 tray and Exposure Glass when RADF is lifted 1 Disabled Motor starts running when the START key is pressed This will delay the start of copying by 30 seconds 2 Enabled RADF only when originals are placed in the tray Note This code is effective only when 08 485 is set to 1 484 Polygonal motor stops at All 0 0 1 0 Enabled RADF and exposure glass 1 auto clear time out o
162. 0 and determine the cause of the LCF tray movement problem 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 27 1 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MODE DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 390 HDD Hard Disk Drive error Copier 0 0 32767 When an internal problem with the HDD occurs 2 counter an error is recorded in the memory at code 390 Note Only the counter value When too many errors occur it is then necessary can be displayed A to replace the HDD value cannot be entered or changed 393 HDD Hard Disk Drive machine Copier 0 0 32767 When there is a problem communicating to the 2 system error counter Printer HDD through the machine interfaces an error is Note Only the counter value system recorded in memory in code When this occurs can be displayed A often the machine interface cables and PWA s value cannot be that provide communications to the HDD must be entered or changed checked and replaced as necessary 400 Thermistor status counter All All 0 0 9 0 No error 1 To clear enter 0 then press 1 C41 occurred once SET or INTERRUPT 2 C41 occurs continuously Note Entering a value other 3 C46 error than 0 will create a 4 C43 error CALL FOR SERVICE 5 C44 error condition 6 C43 error 7 C44 error 8 C45 error 9 C44 error See the trouble shooting section for additional information 401 Drum coun
163. 0 to 90 The default adjustment value is 45 Copy movement direction 10 Copied scale Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 47 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT c Secondary scanning reproduction ratio 1 Place the scale on the original glass and make an A3 LD 100 test copy from middle or lower cassette 2 Compare the copy with the actual scale 3 Follow the procedure below to adjust so that the interval between 10 mm and 210 mm on the scale is adjusted at 200 0 5 mm D gt 840 gt START Adjust by digital keys gt SETy INT E S gt 1 Test copy When the value increases reproduction ratio decreases intervals of the scale become nar rower in increments of 0 1mm step Notes 1 Before making a test copy make sure that 10096 A is appeared on the top of the message display after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test print 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255 The default adjustment value is 128 Copied scale Copy movement direction Actual scale 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 48 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC d Scanner secondary scanning deviation 1 Set the top margin adjustment value to 0 zero D gt 430 START Enter 0 by digital keys SET or INT 1 2 Place the scale on the original glass and make an A4 LT 400 test copy from LCF Press the leading edge of the scale against the original sc
164. 1 Pull out the LCF unit 2 Slightly draw out the cassettes corresponding to the feed units of each of the top middle and lower cassettes from a loaded state 3 Remove the 2 screws III LI D e la E md pio T p E I Ei 4 Pull out the PFP feed unit Note When installing after installing the feed unit put in the cassette There are three PFP feed units upper middle and lower with identical units used for the upper and middle units The PFP aligning roller and PFP paper stop switch are not attached to the lower unit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 49 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM C PFP pick up roller upper middle and lower 1 Remove the PFP feed unit 2 Press the arm in the direction of allow to remove the PFP pick up roller from the arm and then take off the PFP pick up roller from the timing belt m j PFP pick up roller Arm D PFP feed roller PFP separation roller upper middle and lower 1 Remove the pre separation roller guide 2 screws See Fig C 2 Take out the clips and then remove the rollers f
165. 106 ADF size sensor 107 Exit sensor 108 ADF timing sensor 109 Transport belt cleaning brush 56 LCF pick up roller 440 280 lt 17 119 gt 57 LCF feed roller 440 24 280 lt 17 19 gt 58 LCF separation roller 440 14 24 280 lt P17 140 gt 59 Manual pick up roller 100 lt P18 119 gt 60 Manual feed roller 100 lt P18 115 gt 61 Manual separation roller 100 14 LCF lt P16 132 gt 62 Paper guide 63 Paper feed system drive gears w 64 GCB bush and plastic bush D 65 Gear W 15 66 Worm and worm wheel 15 67 Worm shaft 15 68 Wire pulley shaft 15 Note When lubricating do not allow oil to come in contact the rollers belts and belt pulleys Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 7 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 21 20 18 15 13 19 6 9 2 85 86 83 08 60 Front sectional view ec drive system 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 2 8 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Rear drive system Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 9 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE ADF front sectional view
166. 12 Ozone filter for exit fan 440 280 lt 61 111 gt 13 Glass C or A 14 Glass holder or A 15 Mirror 1 C 16 Mirror 2 O 17 Mirror 3 O 18 Reflector Scanner 19 Lens C 20 Exposure lamp A 21 Copy area indicator E 21 1 Shading glass O lt P44 17 gt 22 Automatic paper size detector O O 23 Slide sheet front rear C or A 24 Air filter Q 5 55 25 O 6 26 Charger wire 440 E 6 280 lt P46 116 gt Onarga 17 Jamal Contact O 28 Charger wire cleaner 440 280 lt P46 19 gt 29 Grid 440 280 lt P46 124 gt Around 30 Slit glass on the copier 23 20 laser unit 31 Overall unit 31 1 Duct cover O 23 Developer 32 Developer material 440 280 7 33 Front shield O 5 Notes 1 Figures in parentheses indicate the inspection cycle of the 4580 2 The Remarks column indicates page and item numbers in the Parts List for consumable parts The consumable replacement cycle on the feeding system is the number of sheets fed on each feeding line Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 5 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE For 8070 4580 Clean at Lubricate at Check Category Item to check 440 000 copies 440 000 copies SD aUe 3 2 rh 280 000 copies 280 000 copies 1000 while on lt 34 Oil seal 9 por
167. 2 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 5 Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through 5 1 Outline These instructions show how to set up your PC to use a system firmware download operation using FTP File Transfer Protocol 5 2 System Configuration Copier System board PC Serial Cable Software Requirements for PC Microsoft Windows95 Virtual Modem FTP Server tools Ex War FTP Daemon Serial Cable PC and System board are connected with the following cross line cable DTE DTE connections D SUB 9 PIN RS 232C 1 CD 1 CD 2 RXD 2 RXD 3 TXD 3 TXD 4 DTR 4 DTR 5 GND 5 GND 6 DSR 6 DSR 7RTS 7RTS 8 CTS 8 CTS 9CI 9CI Protocol specifications between PC and system board SPEED 115200bps DATA BITS 8 BITS PARITY NONE STOP BITS 1 BIT FLOW CONTROL NONE ECHO OFF 5 1 5 3 Preparation of PC to Use a Network 5 3 1 Setting Virtual Modem The connection between PC and copier is made using PPP Point to Point Protocol It is necessary to use a dial up networking and use a virtual modem First install the virtual modem The virtual modem can be downloaded from the following web site http www kevin wells com net mdmcbx4 inf After download set up the modem as follows Click Start button point at Settings and then click Control Panel Click on Modems Modems Properties Click Add Button and open Instal
168. 288 ADF reverse solenoid ON OFF 292 Laser unit fan ON OFF BLO ol wl wl wo msm IO CO IO CO IO IO MY O2 295 Power off mode List of System Output Check Functions Operation Code Function procedure group 401 Get mounted PM page memory size 2 402 PM page memory read write check 2 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 11 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT Procedure Group 1 0 3 mm START Operation START Operation 0 9 Warm up PWR ON 59 OFF Group 2 0 3 Code START Operation C Test mode standby 0 9 Warm up PWR One way Group 3 Code eem Operation START Operation 0 3 C Test mode 0 9 Warm up PWR ON OFF standby Group 4 0 3 Code START PWR OFF PWR 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 12 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA 1 2 3 Test print mode test mode 04 In test mode 04 you can print the test pattern generated by the following ASIC codes Code ASIC Test pattern type Remarks 111 SH Primary scanning 33 gradations error diffusion 113 SH Secondary scanning 33 gradations error diffusion 142 POPS 2 dots grid pattern 10mm Pitch Operation procedure 0 4 Code START Operat
169. 297mm 3 140 297 230 Paper size A4 R length width All 297 X 210 182 432 X 297 X 210mm 3 140 297 231 Paper size A5 R length width All 210 X 148 182 432 210 X 148mm 3 140 297 232 Paper size B4 length width All 364 X 257 182 432 X 364 X 257mm 3 140 297 233 Paper size B5 R length width All 257 X 182 182 432 257 X 182mm 3 140 297 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 26 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MODE DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 234 Paper size Letter R length width All 279 X 2161182 432 X 279 X 216mm 3 140 297 235 Paper size Ledger length width 432 X 279 182 432 432 X 279mm 3 140 297 236 Paper size Legal length width All 356 X 216 182 432 X 356 X 216mm 3 140 297 237 Paper size ST R length width All 216 X 1401182 432 X 216 X 140mm 3 140 297 238 Paper size Computer length All 356 X 257 182 432 356 X 257mm 3 width 140 297 239 Paper size Folio length width All 330 X 2101182 432 X 330 X 210mm 3 140 297 240 Paper size 13 inch Legal All 330 X 2161182 432 330 X 216mm 3 Officio length width 140 297 241 Paper size 8 5 X 8 5 inch All 216 X 2161182 432 X 216 X 216mm 3 square length width 140 297 242 Paper size Universal length All 432 X 279 182 432 When setting the Universal paper size remember 3 width 140
170. 3 Use this code only when 3 When the LED light source is turned OFF checking or troubleshooting This is the current value stored in memory Image Quality Control from the last time the machine performed the problems See Image Quality mage Quality Control compensation Control Troubleshooting adjustment It is not adjustable Section Normal value is 102 307 293 Density Sensor output check value All 0 0 1023 Use this code only when 3 When the LED light source is turned ON checking or troubleshooting This is the current value stored in memory Image Quality Control from the last time the machine performed the problems See Image Quality mage Quality Control compensation Control troubleshooting adjustment not adjustable Section Normal value is 388 819 296 Service Automatic adjustment of image All 0 0 255 Use this code only when 3 Density Sensor LED intensity The value checking or troubleshooting displayed is the output check value after the Image Quality Control problems light source is adjusted The higher the number the dirtier the sensor or the greater the amount of drum wear 255 sensor is too dirty or drum is too worn for compensa tion See Image Quality Control Troubleshooting section 305 Leading to trailing edge image shift Scanner All 128 0 255 When the value is increased 1 secondary scanning start position deviation by 1 the image shift Key in the value press SET key to store or approx
171. 348 E38 2278 ecol 2 MLOPL 0721 XGRGT i TSISS 91 00 2241 1291 Otdl Q 12 00388 09278 OOO 92 ary vdd 8091 761 ARGE rial vidi 8181 1181 18 NG gt 35861251 OEDI SJVYETT BEIT e GOAL P 18 2 ae am Ed 1 1 H 41619 ke SE Els 1251 eB 5 eg 915 8017 IN SNIPSST L4lyGOHA 8021 13 12 9621 z 841 5 fSIYSS W 6501 FSIPSSTY 090 2 ORGS T 95 01 INA Deg 18155 1 1 Oe 29 y a 301934 6121 91 01 m CY eg 91 01 Ia e Ea 429 012 83815615 S Eos _ Pi Lyd 3 654100970 BF 8 5 ttd 6 de senu uses 0Ld1 STOR CO 9 or 8 erd 0102018 621 je m y ye dod Oe il LEd osi Ot gt A lt 122 YN 2101 SU 62 N MO d 71 2541 691 0941 941 pdl OIN Ozan 91119919919 1991 51115915916 6921 m MS CEE Sn 92 137 HA 691 nia V8IHSOL 000060 0 QNO ODA SIN 00 SAS 4 WARAS AN 9 41 7 1 01911 90vy 15416541 141 Gdl 155 gt L 51116915916 9621 51116915916 221 601 2f99 L11E0L Y sv OY ay gy OV I YV AMAQ LH dNW T6 H933028Y v8203498rY Neu Ln ARA OW a DI NUN AMAD LU INN TH 33028
172. 5 063 1052 62308AF 1051 7407F 62385 ev CB 4 7116 13 Bil mO GORE LTXD I 1 5 TPi2 DUCK TP24 il a 1656 1401F 1057 ALS5415JX SERR CMD Qn 012 25 428Y E CB CERR BR TP7 TPB CACK 014g POS setozoi 2 5 521 1 8 P 11058 8428KS 7 b 015 0585 TP21 4 8 25M 15 10 50 ECB ANZ201 016 2501415 1635 TP6 358M Olctos ATS 2188 27001 x22 00Ly TP3 162 62385AF 1C28 ALS32NSE 227001 DRTMP LRXD 55 MCTAHCLAF R9 4700 22K TP18 PWB F LGC 300 4406377610 LCTS 38 TP40 C9 100 16 C10 100 50 TP42 RR 4700 22K RR O AT00 22K PD RV RR3 IC31 8429H 1 168 8428KS 7 11 14 84285 7 11018 21007226 8428KS 7 RR5 4T00722K 1 IC39 8428 5 7 TP44 1650 36VB
173. 56789 0123456789 Primary scanning pixel positions Primary scanning pixel positions b High pass filter circuit When images with sharp edges are scanned and directed to the CCD the edges of these char acters tend to become dull in appearance This is due to the physical imperfections of the CCD lens as well as the mirrors that direct the light to it To compensate for this phenomenon an edge enhancement operation is performed It recog nizes the differences in density between the targeted pixel and those adjacent to it an makes compensations to ensure that the final output image closely resembles the image of the original document See illustration below Solid black area Low contrast area Original Image signal After correction Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 5 6570 5570 IMAGE PROCESSING 2 Image memory editing Editing functions such as enlargement reduction and mirror image copying are performed by using line memory The line memory is used for storing one line of pixel data in the primary scanning direction and is updated with new pixel data each time the next line is scanned a Enlargement reduction This function is accomplished by using line memory control in the portion of the operation lt Example gt Enlargement 100 Hete ep NNN 200 lt Example gt Reduction b Mirror image This function reverses the right side and the left side in the primary direction of the original and this rever
174. 570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 05 MODE CODE ADJUSMENT MODE jDEFAUT RANGE DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE GROUP v340 Scanner copy length reproduction ratio adjustment Copier 128 0 255 Adjust the length of the copy image to 1 1 so that it is not stretched or compressed Use a millimeter scale and ledger paper to adjust Increasing the value decreases the length 0 05 step or 0 1mmp step 1 v350 RADF single sided original stop position All 8 0 15 The higher the value the more the original is fed towards the paper feed side of the machine 1 step is equal to approxi mately 1mm change Test copy can be made in 05 test mode v351 RADF double sided original side 2 stop position All 8 0 15 The higher the value the more the original is fed towards the exit side of the machine 1 step is equal to approxi mately 1mm change Test copy cannot be made in 05 test mode Press 09 to enter normal copy mode and toggle back to 05 mode to adjust 356 RADF sensor automatic adjustment and EEPROM initialization Press the START key WAIT is displayed while the automatic adjustment is performed All Perform RADF EEPROM Initialization when EEPROM RADF logic PWA or sensors are replaced v401 Polygonal motor speed fine adjustment Printer 128 0 255 Adjust the width of the printed image front to rear of machine to 1 1 so that it is not stretched o
175. 570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 12 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Paper feeding section Manual pick up roller TB Z105 P2 TP20 22 SA BX MS lt We PASS AN Manual separation roller gt TP30 du LCF pick up roller 3 TP20 NG TP20 Y 9 TB Z57 P2 xe LCF feed roller TB Z78 P3 TB Z96 P2 TP20 LCF separation roller pe 26 A P Rear side 2 A TP10 G20 G20 Manual feed roller Manual pick up solenoid Pv Feed motor Y 4 G22 Notes G30 diia Forward rotation Backward rotation G Gear TP Timing pulley TB Timing belt Z Number of teeth P Pitch mm O 7 TP27 TB Z110 P2 TP78 G18 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 13 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 3 3 Description of operation B Operation of elevator tray 1 When the LCF door is closed with the power ON the tray motor rotates in a forward direction and the elevator tray rises 2 When the paper rises it pushes the LCF pick up roller to which the tray switch and the LCF empty switch are connected When this happens the motor turns OFF 3 The LCF pick up roller moves down 2 to 3 mm when 10 to 20 sheets are fed When this happens the tray up switch is actuated and electrically turns on the motor that raises the tray up 2 to 3mm This raises the paper up to the level where it feeds efficiently 4 When paper supply runs out in the LCF the empty switch s actuator falls into
176. 570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM e When gear 20 rotates in a CCW direction Y the spring loosens and gear 15 becomes free As gear 15 becomes free gear 144 is pulled in a CCW direction by its spring lowering the elevator 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 44 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC PFP feed roller PFP separation roller release operation The PFP feed roller and PFP separation roller have a releasing mechanism to enable jams to be cleared if a paper misfeed occurs with the leading edge of the paper not clear of the PFP feed roller This releas ing mechanism prevents the paper from ripping inside the copier which would otherwise happen if the cassette was removed to clear a jam with the paper held between the PFP feed roller and PFP separa tion roller PFP separation roller 235 730 5 lever Cassette 250 Set lever el Cassette rail p Pressure lever fh Cassette rib Spring With the cassette installed When the cassette is inserted the PFP separation roller is pushed up against the PFP feed roller by the pressure lever connected to spring At this time the set lever is pushed by the cassette rib and rotates in the lt direction and is not in contact with the pressure lever E Spring B feed roller PFP s
177. 6 A is appeared on the top of the message display after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255 The default adjustment value is 0 Copy movement direction NN Mar 2000 TOSHIBA 1 51 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 6 Image Density If the user wants to change the image density adjust the image density in adjustment mode 05 Image mode 3 Adjustment item Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 503 501 504 Manual exposure center value The larger the value the darker the image 505 506 507 Light side The larger the value the lighter the light range Code Manual exposure step value 508 509 510 Dark side The larger the value the darker the dark range 514 512 515 Automatic exposure The larger the value the darker the image Follow the procedure below to adjust the image density to suit the user s preferences while comparing the image obtained in the test copy with the currently entered allowable values Keys used in operation Display messages The code entered with digital keys is displayed 0 5 PWR Y Digital Keys Enter code START Y Digital Keys Enter adjustment i value use to correct value SET Values 222 are stored in BC RAM in Of place of
178. 70 5570 ADF 16 26 Initial alignment END Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 7 4 One sided feed control One sided feed control START Aligning sensor ON Timing sensor ON Setting of feed delay pulse Transport motor forward rotation started gt No Feed delay pulse count up Setting of jam pulse from start of one sided feed to aligning sensor OFF Feed motor forward rotation started 2 originals on glass originals number of output inals Deceleration of all motors started Aligning sensor OFF No No No Aligning sensor non arrival jam Timing sensor non arrival jam Mar 1999 TOSHIBA No One sided feed control END 16 27 Jam pulse cleared Setting of jam pulse from aligning sensor OFF to timing sensor OFF a No Timing sensor OFF Jam pulse cleared Feed motor deceleration started Setting of transport motor deceleration request by timing sensor OFF interrupt deceleration started after specified pulse drive Feed motor and transport motor stopped 6570 5570 ADF 16 7 5 Aligning sensor non arrival jam Timing sensor non arrival jam No No 1 double sided transport started double sided transport of initially aligned original No 1 double sided transport control double sided transport of initially ali
179. 83 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 227 EEPROM Initialization Sensor Adjustment and Test Mode 1 EEPROM initialization and sensor adjustment Whenever the logic PC board aligning sensor timing sensor or exit sensor is replaced it is neces sary to initialize the EEPROM and adjust the sensor by adjustment mode 05 If the initialization and or adjustment is not performed errors paper jam etc may occur Test mode The independent test modes below can be performed by test mode output check 03 Refer to the Service Manual for the PPC Pick up roller rotation Aligning roller rotation Transport belt rotation CW Transport belt rotation CCW Reversal roller rotation 9 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 84 2000 5 1 23 Key Copy Counter MU 8 MU 10 The following two parts are needed for installing the key copy counter MU 10 counter socket MU 8 key copy counter Counter socket MU 10 Key copy counter MU 8 Installation Procedure gt 1 Remove the rear cover 1 screw 2 Remove the right top cover and cut the window for the counter 3 Draw out the harness connector from the frame hole and cut the short harness of the connec tor Treat the cut end of the harness properly to avoid it causing short circuit with the frame And then remove the short connector 4 Connect the counter socket connector to the harness connector of the machine 5
180. 90 ruya MING m pronao visaidd adn 0039505 de vi eviva IDA ae 015401 ON COIN Wrasod ON ON ON vrasiag VO INISOS aan 12446 75031 od 008180 48Md vredad ano vrana 8590 zag HEN LAN ADP OPTION PWA SYS PWA CCD PWA LDR as OAM DW sod ETT 0 051 SN voso T m ano CTS ron ano 05 PWA MTB PWA PLG BMADED BMADSD BMAD100 BMADII O GND GND 8590 003044 8500 ON 104 ON visaidd 20 wreaidd wreaidd Vi MOddo vioaiad vom ONG aar viua 8590 and ketil vodo WD 0085 EN 135005 298 Vrasod CONTROL PANEL 7 Terav ACE FAN2SP 0A FANZON OA FANISP DA FANON OA FANSSP OA FANSON OA FAN2SP 0A FANZON OA FANISP DA FANION GA FANSSP 0A FANSON OA GND 5 0 GND 1 2 1 2 PWA LDR nee 04015 vrasaa 8590 vanvid 8590 a I e vreau wesu 270 1 01525 4519 VEO V0 E1NO0d sod UNS 8590 TEN Tdd Em WEGE 8590 7
181. A Front views of copiers excluding drive systems 2 1 1 15 17 19 24 23 34 31 30 29 10 13 14 16 18 67 66 68 4g n 48 43 A F 42 82 75 10 83 87 77 10 89 9 93 94 96 0 100 99 97 101 6570 5570 OUTLINE Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Carriage 1 Transfer belt Mirror 1 Transfer belt drive roller Reflector Transfer belt cleaning brush Exposure lamp Transfer belt toner recovery auger Thermostat Transfer belt power supply roller Carriage 2 Lower damp heater Mirror 2 Lower damp heater cover Mirror 3 Transfer belt follower roller J JIN CCD drive PC board Transfer belt separation auxiliary roller Scanner control PC board Exit roller Lens ADU eject selector gate Original glass ADU reversal transport roller Scanner optical cooling fan ADU reversal selector gate SLG board cooling fan TR1 sensor Toner empty detection lever Empty sensor Toner hopper Holding gate Toner stirrer lever ADU inlet reversal roller Toner empty switch Separation belt Spiral shaft Feed sensor Toner transport auger unit Aligning sensor Upper magnetic roller ADU aligning roller Lower magnetic roller Feed roller Transport roller Pick up roller
182. A TEC 1 3 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT Error code Machine status Finisher related service call CBA Saddle stitcher front stitcher motor is abnormal CBB Saddle stitcher rear stitcher motor is abnormal CBC Saddle stitcher alignment motor is abnormal CBD Saddle stitcher guide motor is abnormal CBE Saddle stitcher folding motor is abnormal CBF Saddle stitcher paper positioning plate motor is abnormal CCO Sensor connector connection error CC1 Microswitch error CC2 Communications error between finisher saddle CC4 Swing motor is abnormal CC5 Horizontal registration motor is abnormal 6 Punch motor is abnormal Option units related service call F10 HDD formatting error Addition to the explanation 1 When a paper feeding error occurs Error has occurred in the unit Disabled No error has occurred in the unit Enabled To operate continuously error code 8 is not displayed 2 During C11 and C12 error codes If the mode which Duplexer is used is selected as single sided duplex or two sided duplex the install the Duplexer message is displayed and printing is not possible f the mode other than the above the Duplexer is not used is selected the operation can be normally accepted 3 During C15 16 17 error codes If a cassette in which an error has occurred is selected The Add Paper message is displayed even if the sheet is set and copying
183. ALS541SJX 2 30 2 2 a J 4 DMTAALS5415JX 1642 237716 90C031TM 144 5952AFP 1049 5952AFP L 1C27 DWIAALSBAISJX 41 25 1613 y y 1635 1538JCWG p D ct2 C3 100 50 1 36 7538JCWG 88347PFG 9 169 HCTOOFT cg 41 114 20230000 5 MCT4HCOAAFL C10 41 16 C13 41 25 12 VHCSALFT 1 HClAFL 975 Ice Msn 1031 7538086 b 46 HC138FT 4 1116 IC10 o HCIAFL 1C38 7538JCWG 25 1428 IC3 541 DI 172 DRDEN PTESTO PHDEN 66235FP200D 1631 cen 1 LU A VHCT4FRD 164 VHCT541AMEL 1641 1653 7407M 95C063F is ABC Rruy aac TP14 9 1P19 TP6 mE M AB 1639 1 199 20 tett teft Trio ERR VHCT54 IC32 HC123AFD 2 TC1024FN100 40 PWB F PLG 300 CALD LUC 108 TP23 4406377580 Pes Lit DOFF 1P20 CNTRD LOD
184. C1 ON OFF 3 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 10 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Operation Code Function procedure group 250 Developer bias DC2 ON OFF 3 251 Developer bias DC3 ON OFF 3 252 Main Charger ON OFF 3 255 Transfer belt cleaning brush bias ON OFF 3 257 Duct in out fan low speed ON OFF 3 259 Duct in out fan high speed ON OFF 3 261 Scanning motor ON 2 Automatically stops at the limit position its speed is variable using the ZOOM keys 262 Document indicator motor ON 2 Automatically stops at the limit position 263 Exposure lamp ON 3 Automatically goes OFF after 6 seconds and the fan motors rotate at low speed 264 Scanning optical system cooling fan motor 1 ON OFF 265 Scanning optical system cooling fan motor 2 ON OFF 266 SLG PC board cooling fan motor 3 ON OFF 270 LCF feed motor ON OFF 271 LCF tray motor UP DOWN 272 ADU side guide motor ON reciprocating 273 ADU end guide motor ON reciprocating 274 ADU exit switching gate solenoid ON OFF 275 ADU paper holding gate solenoid ON OFF 277 ADU reverse clutch ON OFF 278 PFP upper tray motor UP DOWN 279 PFP middle tray motor UP DOWN 280 PFP lower tray motor UP DOWN 281 ADF pick up roller rotation ON OFF 282 ADF aligning roller rotation ON OFF 283 ADF transport belt CW rotation ON OFF 284 ADF transport belt CCW rotation ON OFF 285 ADF reverse roller rotation ON OFF
185. D 0 4mm other 0 Omm 3t Key in the value press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset A468 0 Binding position folding position fine adjustment A4 R LT R All 0 14 14 A468 1 Binding position folding position fine adjustment B4 All 14 14 A468 2 Binding position folding position fine adjustment A3 LD All 14 14 Position shifts to the right page 0 25mm step 469 Finisher aligning speed adjustment All 0 4 0 High 1 Middle high 2 Middle 3 Middle low 4 Low If the adjustment value is made larger the finisher aligning Speed becomes slower If the paper exiting to the finisher becomes misaligned or there are staple jams then only on these occasions these codes should be used A Key in Code 468 press the Start key key in the Sub Code then press the START key Key in the value press SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset 470 Paper remaining indicator Automatic All 0 31 Remove all of the paper from 8 adjustment for EMPTY condition LCF and the LCF and then Drawers perform the automatic adjustment These new codes 464 469 are available from the 8070 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 19 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 05 MODE CODE ADJUSMENT MODE DERUI RANGE DESCRIPTION PR
186. D MJD UKD Copy speed CPM Paper Manual feeding supply Cassette Size selected No size selected Model 6570 8070 6570 8070 6570 8070 6570 8070 6500 8000 6500 8000 6500 8000 6500 8000 Paper 5570 5570 5570 5570 size 5500 5500 5500 5500 A4 B5 A5 R 65 80 65 76 48 48 33 33 LT S R 55 55 48 33 45 45 45 25 A4 R B5 R 51 61 42 42 33 33 LT R 45 42 33 35 35 25 B4 FOLIO 44 52 37 37 33 33 LG COMP 39 37 33 30 30 25 A3 LD 38 43 33 33 33 33 34 33 33 25 25 25 Manually placed originals one sided and continuous copy modes 1 In the models of 6500 6570 5500 5570 n the case of the automatic document feeder 65 55 sheets minute when an A4 LT size single sided original is fed in the continuous copy mode at original size by the LCF Re processing speed of automatic duplexing unit A4 A5 R LT ST R 65 55 sheets minute A4 R LT R 51 45 sheets minute LG 44 39 sheets minute A3 LD 38 34 sheets minute Note CPM in a parenthesis is the specification of the 5500 5570 2 In the models of 8000 8070 4580 n the case of the automatic documnent feeder 65 45 sheets minute when an A4 LT size single sided original is fed in the continuous copy mode at original size by the LCF Re processing speed of automatic duplexing unit A4 A5 R LT ST R 70 45 sheets minute A4 R LT R 57 35 sheets minute LG 50 30 sheets minute A3 LD 42 25 sheets minute Not
187. E DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 414 Developer powder life control All 0 0 4 0 X 10bit 1 switching 1 X 14bit 2 X 20bit 3 X 30bit 4 X X Correction control value before the following versions PRA 300M 09 PRA 302M 03 PRA 304M 01 418 Charge corona wire All 0 0 1 0 Enabled cleans every 2 000 copies prints 1 cleaning 1 Disabled no cleaning Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 28 1 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MODE DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 449 Temporary laser running service All 0 0 1 0 Normal Mode 1 mode when the laser beam the laser unit operates in this mode unless a position adjustment fails Key in service call is indicated when the beam position the value press the SET key to adjustment fails store or the CLEAR key to reset 1 Continuous Mode Set to 1 until copier laser unit Set to this mode when the laser beam adjust can be replaced Service call ment has failed The results of this setting Error Codes CA4 CA5 places the laser beam close to target even CA6 CAA CAB CAC CAD though the beam position adjustment has failed CAE CAF or See troubleshooting section for additional information 460 RADF reversing of transfer belt All 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 during original feed to align originals against the original stop 461 RADF automatic detection All
188. EC 16 39 Control board Driver 45V power circuit Driver Rush current limiting circuit 6570 5570 ADF 16 10 Description of Circuits 16 10 1 Aligning sensor timing sensor and exit sensor circuit diagrams This item describes the aligning sensor circuit A description of the timing sensor and exit sensor circuits is omitted in this item as the aligning sensor timing sensor and exit sensor share the same circuit con figuration Aligning sensor 45V 2 1 REG Al2 cji CN62 REGS Y en REGLED gt C904 TP45 2 2 KH E 2 nm gt REG AD SGND SGND SGND TP35 SGND dp c 12 d 5 3 4 T cREGS DA ES a 18362 2 SGND This aligning sensor circuit comprises two circuits a voltage current conversion circuit for adjusting the intensity of light emitted from the infra red LEDs and a voltage comparison circuit for comparing the output voltage of phototransistor PTr with the reference voltage and converting the output voltage to digital signals The aligning sensor is a mirror reflection type sensor and comprises a light emitting sensor infra red LED and light receiving sensor PTr pair each having the same optical axis A mirror is placed along an imaginary line extending from the optical axis of these sensors When there is no original between the sensors and the mirror the infra red rays radiated from the LED are refle
189. FUSER UNIT 4 Remove the shaft and 3 stage gear b Remove the cleaning roller 1 and the cleaning roller 2 Front d Shaft Bush Cleaning roller 2 Bush E ring Gear 22 ut EEE E ring E ring Pin iid Bush nm 27 i Cleaning roller 1 E ring Front side C Upper thermistor and thermostat ea 1 Remove the front cover rear cover and fuser Clamp bracket unit guard s 2 Remove the drawer connector bracket 1 connector Screw 3 Disconnect the thermistor connector and re move the 3 harness clamps 4 Remove the 2 upper thermistor brackets 1 screw for each 5 Remove the thermostat bracket 1 screw 6 Remove the thermostat 2 screws Thermistor connector Notes 1 When assembling make sure that the thermostat is attached as shown in the figure on the right 1mm 1 5mm 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 When removing the 2 upper thermistors and thermostats prevent the heat roll ers from becoming scratched Wind pa per onto the heat rollers as shown in the figure on the right D Lower thermistor 1 Remove the harness cover 1 screw 2 Remove the lower thermistor 1 screw E Upper separation claw 1 Remove the jam release unit 1 screw on the front side Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 11
190. H JPN T300SJXXXX 2 ROM version for all 6 UC T300SUXXXX programs data EU T300SEXXXX Others T300SXXXX 903 Displays the Main Logic All 30 M XXX 2 EPROM version 904 Displays the Laser Logic All 300L XXX 2 EPROM version 905 Displays the Scanner Logic All 300S XXX 2 EPROM version 921 Displays the System Logic All VXXX XXX FLASH ROM program data Example V006 148 U version 922 Displays the System Logic All VXXX XXX FLASH ROM Fixed Ul User Example V006 000 0 interface data fixed area version 923 Displays the System Logic All VXXX XXX FLASH ROM Example V005 000 0 Common Ul User interface data common area version 924 Displays the System Logic All VXXX XXX FLASH ROM ist language Ul Example V010 001 3 User interface data version 925 Displays the System Logic All VXXX XXX FLASH ROM 2nd language UI Example V006 000 0 User interface data version 926 Displays the System Logic All VXXX XXX FLASH ROM 3rd language UI Example V004 001 11 User interface data version Supplementary 1 Mode 08 203 When the K SRAM as a service part is installed the setting mode 08 203 must be changed at When it is set at 1 the copier may not be able to operate 2 Mode 08 449 Due to the error of an optical component such as the galvanomirror or an error caused by the passing time of the housing if the beam positioning adjustment is not finished correctly an tempor
191. HIBA TEC 1 35 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 7 If the numerical value in is not within the range of 245 255 use the Up Down icon to adjust the numerical values manually to within the range of 245 255 Note The relationship between the icon and the numerical values in and is as shown below Key used value value Up icon Increase Increase Down icon Decrease 8 Press the SET icon or the INTERRUPT key The drum developer unit etc will stop operating and the following will be displayed 0 9 100 5 or TEST INT Decrease 100 1 A4 READY 9 Simultaneously press 0 and 9 to exit the adjustment mode 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 36 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 5 Print Image Adjustment As for the print image adjustment the adjustment items are listed below The adjustment should be performed in the following order Adjustment Item Code 1 Aligning value 450 458 2 Printer unit adjustment a Primary scanning reproduction ratio Polygonal motor 600 dpi Printer 401 b Primary scanning position Laser write start position 411 410 c Secondary scanning reproduction ratio Transfer belt speed adjustment Printer 488 d Secondary scanning position Laser write start position 443 444 442 3 Scanner unit adjustment
192. IBA TEC 5 4 2 LED display circuit 1 Method of LED display The following description is based on the example of displaying TIME on the LED display Current I 6 LDONO D16 TIME LP1 1 7932 When the signal LDONO changes to L level the transistor is turned ON Also when pin 6 D16 of IC1 changes to L a current flows from 5VL via the transistor to LP1 TIME i e LP1 TIME is turned ON Conditions for LED to light 1 The transistor Q2 or Q3 connected to the LED anode is ON 2 The output connected to the cathode of that LED is L The LED comes ON when 1 and 2 above are satisfied Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 5 9 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT 5 5 Disassembly and Replacement A Control Panel 1 Open the control panel 2 Remove the left middle and right inner covers 8 screws for each 3 Disconnect the connector inserted into the copier frame 4 Remove the 3 screws fixing the control panel 5 Remove the control panel upwards 6 Disconnect the connector 7 Remove the 5 locking supports and screw 8 Disconnect the 7 connectors and remove the PC board 9 Remove the toothed screw and aluminum sheet 2 places 10 Remove the 4 screws and bracket 11 Remove the 8 screws and LCD board 12 Remove the 9 screws and KEY board 13 Remove the 4 screws and LCD 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT 5
193. IBA TEC 15 25 6570 5570 ADU 16 AUTOMATING DOCUMENT FEEDER ADF 16 1 Outline The ADF Automatic Document Feeder automatically feeds sheet originals onto the original glass and outputs them to the tray after they have been copied The figure below shows the configuration of the ADF 1 Original feed section This mechanism feeds originals one at a time onto the original glass It comprises a pickup roller feed roller separation pad aligning roller and other parts 2 Original transport section This section transports originals after they exit the original glass It comprises a transport belt and rollers for driving the transport belt 3 Original exit reversal section This section outputs originals onto the exit tray after copying is com pleted When making copies in the double sided mode the original is guided to the reversal section where it is turned over The original is then fed to the original glass again The original exit reversal sec tion comprises an exit roller flapper reversal roller and other parts Original face up Transport belt Pick up roller Original feeding tray Separation pad A d Exit roller Exit from ADF Waa WZ i Aligning roller Reverse roller Original stopper Original glass Sent onto the original glass for Feed roller duplex copying Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 1 6570 5570 ADF 16 2 Construction 16 2 1 ADF construction Contr
194. ING UP If the test print does not satisfy the specifi cations return to 1 and repeat the adjustment 10076 A COPYING 0 9 Adjustment mode canceled 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 38 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 5 1 Adjustment of paper aligning value If necessary you can extend the feed roller life slightly by increasing the paper aligning value as a temporary measure Procedure Use code 450 458 in the test mode 05 Copier cassette PFP Upper Middle Lower Manual Long Long wp Duplexer L feed 450 452 456 455 457 458 About No 450 452 456 1 0 5 4 5 0 START Digital keys START 0 8 PWR Setting item value value code display SET 1 5 Or Cassette E S 0 9 New valve INT Test copy input Memory set 2 Check the copy for image void and if there is any reduce the new value to 31 30 gt 29 until no void occurs Check for paper misfeeding When the aligning value is increased noise caused by the paper scraping against the mylar may possibly be increased The same procedure can be used for the void Duplexer LCF and manual feed Y X om eo Note When frequent paper jams occur near the aligning roller caused by using special thin paper other than
195. Increasing the value by 1 1 increases the motor speed by 0 127 step or 0 254mm A488 Transfer belt drive motor speed fine adjustment Printer 132 0 255 step Refer to the complete adjustment procedure before performing this adjustment A489 Pedestal drive motor speed fine adjustment Copier 128 0 255 Increasing the value by 1 1 increases the motor speed by A490 Pedestal drive motor speed fine adjustment Printer 128 0 255 0 061 Set value to 128 for the copier and printer 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 20 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 05 MODE CODE ADJUSMENT MODE DEFAULT RANGE DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE A491 Duplexer drive motor speed fine adjustment Copier 128 0 255 Increasing the value by 1 1 increases the motor speed by A492 Duplexer drive motor speed fine adjustment Printer 128 0 255 0 148 Set value to 128 for the copier and the printer A Key in the value press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset W493 0 Developer drive motor speed fine adjustment Copier 6 0 15 Increasing the value by 1 1 Set to the default value Text Photo increases the motor speed by 493 1 Developer drive motor speed fine adjustment Copier 6 0 15 3 85 Set value to 6 Set to the default value Text 7 493 2 Developer drive motor speed fine adjustment Copier 6 0 15 Set to the default value Photo V Key in code 493 press the START key key in the Sub Code then
196. LCF paper start switch Detects the LCF feed roller LCF EMP SW LCF paper empty switch Detects LCF paper empty PSTP2 SW PFP upper paper stop switch Used for aligning paper supply from the upper cassette FEED2 SW PFP upper paper start switch Detects paper supply from the upper cassette EMP2 SW PFP upper empty switch Detects a no paper state in the upper cassette TUP2 SW PFP upper tray up switch Detects rising of the upper tray PSTP3 SW PFP middle paper stop switch Used for aligning paper supply from the middle cassette FEED3 SW middle paper start switch Detects paper supply from the middle cassette EMP3 SW PFP middle empty switch Detects a no paper state in the middle cassette TUP3 SW middle tray up switch Detects rising of the middle tray PSTP4 SW lower paper stop switch Used for aligning paper supply from the lower cassette FEED4 SW lower paper start switch Detects paper supply from the lower cassette EMP4 SW lower empty switch Detects a no paper state in the lower cassette TUP4 SW PFP lower tray up switch Detects rising of the lower tray T UP SW LCF tray up switch Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 2 Detects rising of the LCF tray 27 6570 5570 OUTLINE Function Remarks T DOWN SW LCF tray down switch Detects the bottom position of the LCF tray DOOR
197. LCF switch PFP upper paper stop switch 1 Pull out the LCF unit 2 Remove the handle of front side and guide le ver 1 screw for each 3 Take off the top screw of link and then remove the 2 guides 2 screws for each Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 9 mL Bottom switch unit Tray bottom switch Connector 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 4 Disconnect the connector take out the 2 screws and then remove the LCF switch bracket Take out the 2 screws and then re move LCF switch 5b Take out the 2 screws and then remove the PFP upper paper stop switch bracket Discon nect the connector and take out the screw and then remove PFP upper paper stop switch J Manual pick up roller 1 Remove the clip and draw out the shaft from the holder arm by pressing down the manual pickup roller Then remove the pickup roller K Manual feed roller 1 Draw out the LCF unit 2 Remove the clip of the manual pick up roller 3 Take off the clip of the manual feed roller on the front and then remove the manual feed roller from the holder arm with the shaft L Manal separatin roller 1 Draw out the LCF unit 2 Remove the front paper guide 1 screw 3 Remove the clip and draw out the manual sepa ration roller from the shaft 6570 5570 PAPER FEED
198. Leveler Paper transport roller 1 Mixer 1 Paper transport roller 2 Mixer 2 Paper transport roller 3 Supply recovery paddle Paper transport roller 4 Auto toner sensor Manual pickup roller Fur brush Manual feed roller Main blade Manual feed separation roller Discharge LED LCF paper empty switch S26 tray up switch S39 Main charger Manual feed tray Main charger wire cleaner LCF feed roller Drum LCF pick up roller Toner adhesion sensor LCF separation roller Separation claw Aligning roller Toner recovery auger Elevator tray Recovery blade 6570 5570 OUTLINE LCF large capacity feeder Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Tray bottom switch S40 Middle cassette PFP upper aligning roller Upper cassette PFP upper feed roller Wire rewind roller PFP middle aligning roller Tray motor M30 PFP upper paper switch S28 Lower heat roller PFP upper separation roller Thermostat PFP lower aligning roller Cleaning roller 3 middle paper start switch S32 Lower separation claw PFP middle separation roller Upper separation claw PFP lower paper start switch S36 Heater lamp PFP middle feed roller Upper heat roller PFP lower separation roller Cleaning roller 1 PFP lower Feed roller Cleaning roller 2 PFP lower pick up roller
199. No Replace the saddle stitcher controller board CBF Saddle stitcher paper positioning plate is abnormal Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor PI7S normal Yes Replace the sensor Is the paper positioning plate operating at the specified timing No Yes Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal Yes Correct the mechanism Does replacement of the paper positioning plate motor MAS rectify the trouble Yes END Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 25 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING CCO Sensor connector connection error Procedure 1 Is the guide home position sensor 135 or saddle stitcher controller board connector con nected No Connect the connector Yes 1 Is there a open circuit between the sensor and the saddle stitcher No Correct this Yes 1 Is DC5V being supplied from J9 7 on the saddle stitcher control board No Replace the sabble stitcher controller board Yes 1 Is J9 8 of the saddle stitcher controller board correctly connected to the ground No _ Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Yes Y END Procedure 2 Is the connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor 1145 or the connector of the saddle stich controller board connected No Co
200. OCEDURE 471 Paper remaining indicator LCF manual Al 4 0 3 Perform the manual adjust 1 adjustment for LESS than 1 2 the capacity ment when the remaining Key in the value press the START key to store amount of paper is less than or the CLEAR key to reset 1 2 Perform adjustment code 472 Paper remaining indicator upper manual Al 10 0 3 470 first Then adjust as adjustment for LESS than 1 2 the capacity necessary Key in the value press the START key to Decrease the value in these store or the CLEAR key to reset codes when the remaining 473 remaining indicator middle Al 10 0 3 amount of paper indication is manual adjustment for LESS than 1 2 the slower than the actual amount capacity Key in the value press the START of paper key to store or the CLEAR key to reset Example When the paper 474 Paper remaining indicator lower manual Al 10 0 3 remaining adjustment for LESS than 1 2 the capacity indicator shows Key in the value press the START key to store or the CLEAR key to reset then changes suddenly to _ 475 Paper remaining indicator Automatic Al Load 4 000 sheets of paper in 8 adjustment for FULL condition LCF and the LCC and 500 sheets in the PFP Drawers then perform the automatic adjustment A476 Paper remaining indicator LCF manual Al 2 0 3 Perform the manual adjust 1 adjustment for MORE than 1 2 the capacity ment when the remaining amount of paper is greater than 1 2
201. OFF signal for the copier s aligning motor Is the copier s RSTART signal L 2 Aligning clutch ON PFP paper stop switch OFF Delay from the trailing edge of paper passing PFP paper stop switch PFP paper stop switch off until it has cleared the aligning roller Aligning clutch OFF 9 39 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM Paper feeding completed Aligning clutch ON Pedestal motor OFF PFP tray motor CW Tray lowers opying started YES Copier s CRUN H tray motor OFF Tray stops 50 msec delay NO Have two seconds passed since PFP tray motor CW came ON Paper feeding standby tray motor OFF Tray stops 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 40 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Jam All motors and clutches OFF CLEAR PAPER flashing NO gt Door open YES rom gt YES CLEAR PAPER goes OFF PFP paper stop switch NO 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 4 4 Configuration and drive system The paper feed pedestal PFP consists of the cassettes pick up rollers feed rollers separation rollers aligning rollers and their associated drive mechanisms Feed motor system The PFP pick up PFP feed PFP separation rollers in the cassettes and PFP aligning rollers are driven by the pedestal motor Tray up motor system Raises and lowers the t
202. R In the case of the copier and PFP cassettes When the cassette is not installed Detects the absence of the cassette tray When the cassette is not installed When the cassette is installed but Paper empty status there is no paper in the cassette AF Signal sent to control circuit l The ADD PAPER display will flash 1 START key will not function Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 5 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION In the case of the Copier LCF and the pedestal When the cassette is installed By combining the operation of the tray motor and the condition of the tray up switch and the empty switch the CPU detects whether or not there is paper When the power is turned ON or when the LCF door is opened closed for the pedestal when the power is turned ON or when the cassette is loaded The PFC Paper Feed Controller causes the LCF to initialize Detects whether or there is paper Tray motor comes ON The tray rises At this time both tray up and LCF empty switches are OFF mA fixed time later if the TR Switch is not turned ON The tray is The ADD PAPER is displayed regardless not normal of paper being present or not 2 Turning OFF ON the power clears this condition 25 Within a fixed time the tray up switch is turned ON The tray motor stops At this time if the empty switch is ON It is determined there is paper At this time if the empty switch is OFF It is de
203. RT key 1 The START key is pressed to ON e READY changes to COPYING The main charger developer bias and discharge lamp turns ON The fans operate at high speed e The drum transfer belt fuser and developer are running 2 Cassette feeding The PFU motor and feed clutch on the feed trays turn ON The pick up roller paper feed roller separation roller and transport roller start to rotate e Paper reaches the transport roller The paper stop switch of the paper feed tray turns ON e After a set amount of time the feed clutch is turned OFF e Paper reaches the aligning roller The aligning switch is turned ON and the aligning operation is carried out e After a set amount of time the feed roller stops rotating 3 Carriage operation The exposure lamp is turned ON White shading compensation is carried out e The scanning motor is turned ON Carries 1 and 2 start to advance e At this time if the toner density of the developer material is lower than the set value the copier enters the toner supply operation 4 After a set time lag after the carriage operation e The aligning motor is turned ON Paper is sent to the transfer unit e The counter is incremented 5 Shortly after the aligning motor is turned ON The transfer charge come ON 6 Termination of carriage scanning The scanning motor is turned OFF The exposure lamp is turned OFF The aligning motor is turned OFF after the tr
204. Remove the rear side cover NS e oh 3 Remove the connector cable bracket 2 noms Ord screws T D NS Connector cable brackets e Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 17 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 4 Disconnect the connector from the heat roller motor PC board 5 Remove the motor 3 screws L Heater fan motor 1 Remove the system electronics unit 2 Remove the screw and disconnect the 2 con nectors and then remove the heater fan duct in the direction of the arrow 3 Remove the rear side cover 4 Remove the connector cable bracket 2 Screws 5b Disconnect the motor connector 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 Heat roller motor PC board Connector Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 Remove the motor bracket 1 screw 7 Remove the heater fan motor from the bracket 2 screws Note When assembling the direction of the ar row on the blow out side of the heater fan motor must be as shown in the figure on the right M SSR for the upper heater lamp 1 Remove the protective cover 3 screws 2 Disconnect the 4 connectors and remove each of the 2 screws to remove the SSR Note
205. S 0334 MS LIX3 SAH ona OND OND OND NV4 SAH Eu SUN CNN rz vend E Bad vond wan Ue T MS rdNarvdnL oa ae ae KEN NYSULH wma IE mm Tao Ga Ga MS 8000 401 gg ous as enr enr Gr T ma d 40421 VI HOGOT nd 20 ES Em av vononav av VIGOR saa vase JON NAV Ba LK DRMTB OA LK DRMTD 0A BLK EXTSW IA BLK QNO E HTR MOT 8010034 viaisav Vidisav wou H aan Yoo10uv E aNd vranaav vranaav aan BEJ Vransav Voandis voanais vosnais vand wonais vraa vomas vovnais ON aan Mene av Voanans wianava QNO voanana voanana VFINDEV wonava Vomans vivan voands voonass voanass voviais voanass YO3OXIS LON VMd EXIT FAN MOT DUCT OUT FAN SSR SUB JON AIS DRM MOT TRB MOT JONW ONI v NW ov ow sv uv w atv ev ety av viv 918 9197 UNO ano vranaov vi anaov PWA ADU ON 170 034 rz 637 2637 voo198v 110 198 119 515 VOTIS Aver 179 438 EET Me 108 09 KE UNS aan VEIOUUV qvo Wr VOOulV STO 21 250N
206. SYSTEM d 1 LCF switch 5 upper paper stop Switch ALI Clip Pulley Manual feed pick up roller Holder arm Timing belt Manual feed pick up roller One way built in side Paper guide RA a a a Se LS Manual feed roller SN Clip Manual separation roller Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Notes Observe the following when assembling the pick up roller feed roller and separation roller 1 Mount the timing belt securely on the pulleys 2 Mountthe timing belt in the correct position 3 Clips are to engage securely into the grooves in the shafts 4 Check that there is no oil on the timing belt pulley or roller surfaces M LCF pick up roller 1 Open the LCF door 2 Remove the clip and remove the weight from the front side 3 Slide the shaft and remove the pick up roller N LCF feed roller 1 Open the LCF door and remove the paper guide 2 screws 2 Remove the clip and draw out the LCF feed roller from the shaft Note Theroller can be drawn out more easily from the shaft by pressing the separation roller shaft down O LCF separation roller 1 Open the LCF door and remove the paper guide 2 screws 2 Remove the clip and take the LCF separation roller off the shaft Note The roller can be drawn out more easily from the shaft by pressing the pick up roller up and pressing the separat
207. Scraper Transport roller E ring 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 18 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Remove rear side screw and then the trans port roller and pole fixing bush 4 Remove the front side bearing and transport roller F Leveler 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the 2 screws and then the leveler Note Wheninstalling the leveler both ends of the leveller must be contacting the protrusions on the front and rear side frames 2 screws G Auto toner sensor 1 Remove developer material 2 Remove the auto toner sensor 2 screws Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 Pole fixing bush Transport roller Leveler Leveler CN Lue Convex part of sideframe NE 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT Oil seal mixer section 1 Remove the rear side plate 2 Remove the 2 E rings and 2 gears 3 Remove the 2 screws and draw out the nozzle mixer 4 Remove the 2 E rings and 2 bushes 5 Remove the 2 oil seals from the nozzle mixer with the C ring pliers a 5 Oil seal Nozzle mixer 6 After removing the 2 bearings with the C ring pliers remove the 2 oil seals Cil seal I fol 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 20 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA
208. T Feed clutch FED CLT Side switch SID SW Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 15 6570 5570 OUTLINE 3 Motors Rear side End guide motor END MOT Side guide motor SID MOT 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 16 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC F Upper Unit F 1 PC board U Rear side No Name Symbol 1 Motor control PC board PWA F MOT 300 MOT Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 17 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 DC electrical parts except motors PC boards Upper unit Rear side z o INIIAI Fuser exit switch EXIT SW Scraper solenoid SOL3 Toner supply sensor TNR HOP SW Auto toner sensor SNR ATC 300 Toner empty sensor TNR EMP SW Paper stop switch P STP SW Developer switch DEV SW Toner full switch T FULL SW Main cleaning switch CLN M SW Heat roller thermistor THMS HTR 300 Developer bias transformer PS HVT DB 300 High voltage power supply for main charger and transfer belt PS HVT TM 300 Reversal exit switch TRNE SW Reversal switch TRN SW Reversal door switch EXC SW Discharge LED lamp ERS 300 Gate solenoid GATE SOL Transfer belt touch switch IR TCH SW Transfer belt separation switch TR SEP SW Toner adhesion sensor Drum thermister 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 18 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 3 Upper unit o Motors Rear side Fur br
209. TART Digital keys or 0 9 PWR Code 1st setting 2nd setting INT Exit Set to memory C To correct Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 25 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MODE DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 200 Date and time setting All 13 digits Year month date day hour minute second 1 Example 99 08 07 5 11 30 48 201 Country paper size change All 0 1 0 2 0 Europe A4 A3 Follio 1 1 USA Canada Letter Ledger 2 Japan A4 B4 202 Externally installed copy All 0 0 3 Function Clear counter control device 0 No external copy Not applied 1 counter control device 1 Coin controller Not applied 2 Copy key card Applied 3 Key counter Applied Condition for Function Clear 2 when card is pulled out 3 when key copy counter is pulled out 203 Line adjustment mode All 0 0 1 0 factory shipment 1 1 for line Field Indispensable 0 When exchanging K SRAM needed check 204 Clear control panel settings All 3 0 10 0 Disabled 1 and return to default settings 1 to 10 Set number X 15 seconds time out 205 Timer for switching from All 11 JPN 0 15 0 Disabled 6 3 min 12 20 min 1 Readymode to Energy Saver 11 UC 1 30 sec 7 4 min 13 30 min mode 11 EUR 2 60 sec 8 5 min 14 45 min 0 Others 3 90 sec 9 7 min 15 60 min 4 120
210. TEC 10 DRUM RELATED SECTION 10 1 Construction Main charger Discharge LED Main charger wire cleaner e Drum F gt S ws Transfer belt drive roller 9 p ON Transfer belt 0 Sea a Recovery auger Transfer belt follower roller Lower damp heater Transfer belt cleaning brush Lower damp heater cover Transfer belt separation auxiliary roller In this section the drum related parts including the drum are described Construction of the parts is as follows e Drum e Main charger Ozone filter unit Slot exhaust exhaust fan motor Discharge LED Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 10 1 6570 5570 DRUM 10 2 Functions 1 Drum The drum comprises a drum shaped Aluminum base coated with an organic photosensitive element photoconductor film The principle of Photoconductivity indicates that insulating properties of the material are evidenced in the dark Likewise its conductive properties are evidenced in the presence of light Main Charger The main charger is configured by stretching a special wire between two insulation blocks provided at both ends of a u shaped metal bracket When high voltage is applied to thi
211. TEC 16 57 6570 5570 ADF 4 Slide the reversal roller to the rear side remove the parallel pin 5 Draw out the reversal roller while tilting it on its side from beneath the unit S Exit sensor 1 Remove the stay 4 screws 2 Remove the sensor from the guide 1 screw T PC board 1 Remove the ADF unit 2 Remove the cover 3 Disconnect the 11 connectors 4 Remove the 2 screws and slide the PC board from the hooking section on the rear side to remove 6570 5570 ADF 16 58 Exit sensor Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC U ADF fan motor 1 Remove the PC board 2 Disconnect the connector and remove the i Connector 3 Remove the 2 screws Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 59 6570 5570 ADF V Mylar sheet etc When replacing damaged mylar sheets fix the new mylar sheet according to the reference positions shown below Before you fix a new mylar sheet first clean the fixing position with alcohol After fixing the mylar sheet make sure that it is not rising up and the ends of the sheet are not peeling up 1 Jump mylar sheet feed guide Feed guide Fixing reference Clearance _0 to 0 5mm
212. TENTS 1 ADJUSTMENT WD E i o o e M M 1 2 Self Diagnostic Modes 1 2 1 Input signal check test mode 03 1 2 2 Output signal check test mode 03 1 2 3 Test print mode test mode 04 1 2 4 Adjustment mode 05 1 2 5 Setting mode 08 1 2 6 How to register change ID codes access control mode 1 33 3 Formatting the Hard Disk 4 Auto Toner Sensor Adjustment 8 PIU AGS Museer sae road Ls Aere c te Pa ete n e id ti dle 1 5 1 Adjustment of paper aligning value 1 5 2 Adjusting the printer section 1 5 3 Adjusting the scanner section 0 2 6 Image Density 7 Automatic Adjustment of Gamma correction 8 Sharpriess HPF Adjustment ee teet ene thecal 9 Data Correction 10 High Voltage Adjustment 41 Installation of Carriage Drive Wire sess 1 11 1 Wire tension adjustment 1 11 2 Adjustment of carriage 1 and carriage 2 1 11 3 Carriage drive wire assembling 112 Lens Unit 1 12 1 Adjusting the lens magnification 113 Adjusting Horizontal Deviation Caused by Paper Feed 44 s Changing the Paper SiZe ie ie d e NU en a cde d e D Cc 1 141 LCF paper sizes 1 14 2 paper sizes 15 Adjustment of DUpIeXer 1 crc e e a ca E ED CS 1 15 1 Adjustment of the Stack Guide Unit 1 15 2 Holding gate position adjustment 116 Adjusting
213. TOSHIBA 16 7 6 No 2 double sided transport START double sided transport of original on platen Exit sensor OFF Flapper solenoid ON switchover to reversal direction Setting of jam pulse from start of No 2 double sided transport to exit sensor ON Transport motor forward rotation started Reversal motor forward rotation started Exit sensor ON Jam pulse cleared Setting of transport motor reversal motor deceleration start request by exit sensor ON interrupt deceleration started after specified pulse drive No 2 double sided transport END Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 29 No 2 double sided transport control double sided transport of original on platen No y Exit sensor accumulation jam 6570 5570 ADF 16 7 7 Double sided reversal control Double sided reversal control START Exit sensor ON Exit sensor Setting of double sided non arrival jam reversal pulse after specified pulse drive motor stopped Transport motor reverse rotation started Reversal motor forward rotation started Exit sensor OFF N Setting of pulse up to Exit sensor flapper solenoid OFF AP accumulation jam by exit sensor OFF Transport motor and reversal motor stopped Flapper solenoid OFF at pulse count up switchover to exit direction Transport motor and reversal motor stopped Double sided r
214. TOSHIBA SERVICE MANUAL DIGITAL PLAIN PAPER COPIER Ne ax n a OP 4 UO MEC Um v m 2 0a Er GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR THE COPIER 6570 5570 The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician Transportation Installation When transporting installing the copier move it by the casters while lifting the stoppers The copier is quite heavy and weighs approximately 250 kg 551 Ib therefore pay full attention when handling it Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115V or 120V 20A 220V 230V 240V 10A or more for its power source e The copier must be grounded for safety Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe Select a suitable place for installation Avoid excessive heat high humidity dust vibration and direct sunlight e Also provide proper ventilation as the copier emits a slight amount of ozone To insure adequate working space for the copying operation keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm 32 on the left 80 cm 32 on the right and 10 cm 4 in the rear Service of Machines Basically be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service Be sure not to touch high temperature sections such as the exposure lamp the fuser unit the damp heater and their periphery Be sure not to touch high voltage sections such as the chargers the transfer belt and the high voltage transfo
215. WA F MOT 300 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 3 Remove the lock supports 4 pcs then remove the motor drive PC board C Lampregulator PC board PS LRG JU 300 PS LRG E 300 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 3 Remove the 2 screws then remove the lamp regulator PC board D SDV PC board PWA F SDV 300 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 3 Remove the 2 screws and then remove the SDV PC board E High voltage transformer for main charger and transfer PS HVT TM 300 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the 5 connectors 3 Remove the lock supports 2 pcs and the 2 screws Then remove the high voltage trans former for main charger and transfer F Developer bias transformer PS HVT DB 300 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 3 Remove the 2 unit fixing screws and the earth lead fixing screws and take out the developer bias transformer 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 Motor driver PC board Locking support 1 Z IT High voltage transformer P for main charger transfer LE 4 LA NL He 0 h of wA on Lock supports S re EN M E
216. WR keys keys FC key INT Exit Code Enter Adjust Set to BH setting memory item value M C C To correct To correct When there are multiple setting items for a single item FC key is used for Group 7 CANCEL or C E CANCEL UP SET 0 5 1 Digital START Digital START Or E S 0 9 PWR keys keys DOWN INT Ge Exit Code Enter Adjust Set to setting memor item value RESET To correct To correct When there are multiple setting items for a single item Group 8 SET 0 5 4 Digital keys START START or 0 9 PWR Coe INT Exit 475 Memorize C Stop 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 24 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 2 5 Setting mode 08 In this mode the various special modes listed in the Setting Code List can be set or changed Procedure Group 1 CANCEL Digital keys SET 0 8 Digital keys START or Or 0 9 PWR Code Selectable icons INT Exit Set or change Set to memory a value C To correct Group 2 SET 0 B Digital keys START Or 0 9 PWR Code INT Exit Adjustment value cannot be changed Group 3 CANCEL SET 0 8 Digital keys START Digital keys S
217. War FTP Daemon has to be ONLINE mode 6 1 6 2 2 Preparation of updated files New files for update are stored in the following folder of the PC And also the files must be named as follows Folders C Webshare Ftproot Ftproot Miel File Edt View Go Favorites Help gt A X lAddess EQ CNWebshse Woo m Ftproot E A A E E sysfirm tz uidata tz uidatal tz uidata2 tz uidata3 tz Select an icon to view its description A uidataF tz 5 objects 11 70MB 29 My Computer 2 New files for update Kind of date File name Program date sysfirm tz Fixed UI data uidataf tz Common UI data uidata0 tz Ist language UI data uidatal tz 2nd language UI data uidata2 tz 3rd language UI data uidata3 tz 6 2 6 2 3 Connection between copier and Connect MMF FSMS port of the copier and serial communication port of PC specified by the setup of virtual modem using a crossing cable 6 3 6 3 Download Operation 1 Turn ON the power switch of the copier on pressing 3 and 9 keys 2 The following messages are displayed on the copier control panel Firmware Version Up Mode gt Make a connection from PC 3 Serial connection is made by dial up from PC Refer to Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through PC about procedures for dial up network connection f Dial Up Networking 6 4 4 The
218. Yes Clean the sensor window and perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later M Is the center of the drum scratched or dirty No Yes Replace the drum and perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later v Replace the sensor and LGC board and perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later Self diagnostics 05 293 gt 819 Replace the sensor and LGC board and perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later Perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 31 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING Image Quality Maintenance Forced Execution Confirmation gt gt START Y Value of self diagnostics 08 800 3 max error detection count or less When value of 08 800 3 clear by entering 0 v Value of self diagnostics 08 802 0 control enabled Y Value of self diagnostics 08 803 0 startup number of copies 0 v Self diagnostics 04 113 A4 size specification M Confirmation After the test print READY is displayed and the engine stops Y Judgment value of 05 291 is other than 2 or 4 and value of 08 800 0 Yes No Y GOOD NO GOOD Y Restore self diagnostics 08 803 2 startup number of copies 2k Y END 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 3
219. ailable for measurement Set Text complete adjustment to the value set in code 210 0 Check or adjust the output 4210 2 Charge corona grid voltage adjustment Copier 93 0 255 voltage using code 210 0 first 6 Output is NOT available for measurement Set Photo then set the remaining codes to the value set in code 210 0 210 1 210 2 and 212 to the 212 Charge corona grid voltage adjustment Printer 93 0 255 value set in 210 0 1 Output is NOT available for measurement Set to the value set in code 210 0 Key in Code 210 press the to change the value press code 210 0 press the SET START key key in the Sub Code then press the START key For 210 0 use the UP or DOWN key the SET key to store or the RESET key For codes 210 1 2 key to store or the CLEAR key to reset 0 2 and 212 key in the value set in 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 14 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 05 MODE CODE ADJUSMENT MODE DEFAULT RANGE DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE 291 Image Quality Control circuit check value not 0 0 255 value of 2 or 4 indicates an 3 adjustable error in the image Quality Value indicates Status Good or Error Control circuit All other values 0 255 indicate that the Image Quality Control circuit is working correctly For addi tional information refer to the Image Quality Control Troubleshooting section 292 Image Density Sensor output check value All 0 0 102
220. ailing edge of the paper exits the aligning roller 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 4 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 Exit operation The exit switch detects the passing of the paper s trailing edge The main charger developer bias and discharge lamp turns OFF Operation of the drum transfer belt fuser unit and developer unit stops The fans return to standby mode rotation e The copier displays READY and enters the standby mode Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 3 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 4 2 4 Bypass feed copying 1 A sheet of paper is inserted through the bypass guide The manual feed switch is turned ON READY FOR BYPASS FEEDING is displayed Carriages move to their home positions 2 The START key is pressed e READY FOR BYPASS FEEDING changes to COPYING The main charger developer bias and discharge lamp turns ON and the fans rotate at high speed e The drum transfer belt fuser and developer unit are running 3 Sheet bypass feeding The manual pickup solenoid turns ON and the LCF motor rotates in reverse The manual feed roller is lowered The manual feed roller paper feed roller and separation roller are running e Aligning operation e Paper reaches the aligning roller After a set time lag the manual pickup solenoid and LCF motor turns OFF Paper feeding is terminated 4 Same as operation 3 through 6 of automatic feed copying using the START key 4 2 5 Interrupt
221. ain blade is pressed against the drum Procedure Use code 200 in the 05 mode 1 Install the process unit to the copier main blade contacts with drum 2 Press the keys 0 and 5 at the same time and turn on the power switch The following display appears indicating that the adjustment mode has been entered 100 015 TEST MODE PWR 3 Enter 200 using the digital keys and press the START key The following display will appear ro 230 200 2 0 0 START TEST MODE 128 128 E Note A Indicates the control data value of the udis output Use the Up Down icon to change the numerical values 8 The above display indicates an output voltage of 2 30V Indicates the latest adjustment value The drum developer unit etc are operating at this time 4 After approximately two minutes the on the message display will automatically start changing 230 200 A3 TEST MODE WAIT 128 128 5 After a short time the on the message display will automatically stop changing and at the same time the message will also change as shown below indicating that the auto toner adjustment has finished completely 25096 200 ADJUSTMENT MODE 128 128 RO 6 In this status check if the numerical value in is within the range of 245 255 auto toner sensor output range of 2 45 V 2 55 V Mar 2000 TOS
222. ained with the thermistor 1 5 R1652 e The input voltage is obtained by voltage dividing R165 thermistor R170 and R174 e The surface temperature of the heat roller Thermistor 1 2 changes HTRTH Main The thermistor resistance value changes f MW Processor The input voltage also changes R170 e The main processor detects an abnormality C125 thermistor broken 11 14 4 8 Control for abnormal heater condition When something abnormal occurs in the heater turn ON circuit such as a shorted triac it may become incapable of ON OFF control In this case the microcomputer detects abnormal temperatures through the first and second thermistors determines the corresponding error codes and counter values and causes the main power to switch OFF to protect the fuser unit 1 Temperature detection The following abnormal temperatures are detected by the respective thermistors First thermistor 230 C Second thermistor 270 C 2 Error codes C44 Displayed when keys C Service Counter value 9 Displayed when you input 400 in the setting mode are pressed simultaneously at the time of Call 3 Machine condition After de energizing all outputs heater lamp exposure lamp control panel displays motors etc the microcomputer causes the main power to switch OFF 4 Corrective action After the error code and counter value in 2 have been determined abnormal t
223. al at the each locations stated in step 3 Combination charts for size determination of A4 series and LT series are shown below A4 Series 1 beam sensor No APS 3 APS 4 Original presence blank Original absence A Original presence or absence LT Series 1 beam sensor No APS 2 APS 3 Original presence blank Original absence Platen SW OFF Following judgement is performed by the APS sensor output signal Size decision Size is displayed on the LCD panel and select a specific paper or reproduction ratio Size not fixed Reproduction ratio and paper are not selected The carriage 1 is stay on the standby position even though the reproduction ratio is changed when original size is changed Platen SW ON Keep the recognized original size or no original state just before the platen SW is turned on regard less the APS sensor output signal 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 16 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Supplementary comments Concerning the reflecting photointerruptor The reflecting photointerruptor consists of an infrared diode and a phototransistor It detects originals by use of pulse modulation Original nn M cud 8usec 130psec Phototransistor The light emitting diode LED is driven by pulses with a period of 130 msec If a signal which has the same characteristics is received by the p
224. ale on the leading edge side 3 Follow the procedure below to adjust so that the scale on the copied paper starts from the 2 mm 0 5 mm position D 305 gt START gt Adjust by digital keys SET or INT E S gt D Test copy When the value increases the image moves to the leading edge in increments of 0 22 mm STEP Notes 1 Before making a test copy make sure that 100 A is appeared on the top of the message display unit after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test copy 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255 The default adjustment value is 128 mmm movement direction Copied scale Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 49 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT e Top margin Follow the procedure below to make a test copy 0 5 PWR ON gt C E S 1 Make an A4 LT 100 test copy from LCF with the ADF open 2 Follow the procedure below to adjust so that the blank space at the leading edge of the copy is adjusted exactly at 3 0 5 mm D gt 430 START Adjust by digital keys SET or INT gt E S gt 1 Test copy When the value increases the image moves to the leading edge 0 0423 mm STEP Notes 1 Before making a test copy make sure that 10096 A is appeared on the top of the message display after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test 2 The effective adjustment value is within
225. ansport Belt Cleaning Brush 20 Slit glass on the main unit Remove the slit glass and clean the front and back sides 21 Transfer belt cleaning blade Bring down Slit grass Surface to be cleaned front back side Refer to section 3 3 Checking and Cleaning the Drum Blade the Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 2 14 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 22 Cleaner Unit Be sure to connect the ground lead to the aluminum die cast on the rear of the cleaner exit side before you clean the cleaner unit Then clean the unit with for example a vacuum cleaner If the cleaner unit is not grounded static electricity may damage the toner adhesion amount sensor Also wipe the window of the toner adhesion amount sensor with a cotton wool bud or tissue If the window of the toner adhesion amount sensor is dirty the sensor may no longer function properly Connection to earth Ground wire E ECCE a ae 2 Toner adhesion amount sensor benc Next wipe the inner diameter of the drum shaft bearing with a cloth If toner adheres to the inner diameter you may no longer be able to draw out the drum shaft Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Drum shaft bearing 2 15 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 23 Duct cover Clean the duct cover by means of the following procedure im
226. ary coun termeasure will be brought about and a mode in which printing can continue to operate be applied if the HSYNK is not taken printing is impossible If there is an error in the galvanomirror then correction control is not performed and Service Call is displayed so the copier stops When image deterioration is allowable copier can be used without any judgement as to whether adjustment has been finished or not This can continue until a replacement unit is available and service technician can use this mode for that purpose 3 Mode 08 658 If paper runs out during printing with the bypass automatic start or not is set after paper has been added to the bypass 4 Mode 08 653 658 680 To use these codes each function should be mounted in advance 5 Mode 08 202 Function clear when there is no key copy counter When the key copy counter or the card is pulled out all the setting contents will be cleared Only when the setting value of 08 202 is 2 or 3 this funcion is effective Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 32 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 2 6 How to register change ID codes Access control mode When ID codes are registered copies made will be classified according to each ID code The copier will not start unless one of the ID codes registered is keyed in Preparation to enter the access control mode SET 0 8 6 0 0 START 1 Or PWR OFF R PWR Enabled INT
227. ass guide A in Fig 5 2 3 paper out from the bypass guide MISFEED IN COPIER Paper jammed in the machine Press the HELP INFO key and remove Indicated when paper jams in the the paper jammed in the copier by machine B in Fig 5 2 3 following the message MISFEED IN Cassette paper misfeed Press the HELP INFO key and remove COPIER Indicated when paper supplied the paper jammed in the copier by from the cassette does not reach following the message the sensor in front of the aligning roller in a set time C in Fig 5 2 3 MISFEED IN DOC Original jammed Open the jam access cover and ADF FEEDER Indicates when an original is unit and remove the jammed original jammed in the document feeder D in Fig 5 2 3 MISFEED IN Paper jammed in the finisher Remove the paper jammed in the FINISHER Indicates when paper is jammed in finisher and open and close the front the finisher E in Fig 5 2 3 cover once MISFEED IN Indicates when paper is jammed Press the HELP INFO key and remove DUPLEXER in the ADU section the paper jammed in the copier by F in Fig 5 2 3 following the message Fig 5 2 3 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT 5 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Message Abnormal state amp indication Solution CALL FOR SERVICE Some part of the mechanism motors switches or sensors is abnormal A in Fig 5 2 4 Turn OFF the machine remove the cause of the fault and turn the machine
228. at the point when the timing sensor turns OFF to stop the original being fed before the reversal section 15 Timing sensor OFF to pause of forward rotation transport After the timing sensor turns OFF the original is transport for a specified number of pulses and the feed motor stops at the point when the original being fed arrives at the specified position before the reversal section The original stands by until exit of the output original is completed The number of drive pulses up to start of exit deceleration is set at the point when the turn guide sensor turns ON by the leading edge of the output original deceleration of the reversal motor is started at the point when the timer has counted the number of pulses and the original is output at low speed 16 Completion of exit At the point when the original is completely output onto the exit tray the reversal motor stops and exit is completed Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 17 6570 5570 ADF 17 Restart of forward rotation transport to completion of forward rotation transport After exit of the output original is completed forward rotation transport of the original standing by before the reversal section is restarted The transport motor and reversal motor start to rotate in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and reversal roller At the same time the flapper solenoid turns ON to switch
229. autions Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to adhere to the cleaning roller 2 Defective Heat Roller Cleaning and Corrective treatment Defective heat roller cleaning should be judged by the toner deposited on the upper heat roller If toner is heavily adhered on the heat roller sarface defective cleaning any occur If this happens replace the cleaning roller The cleaning roller will be gradually degraded due to subjection to the heat from the heat roller over along period of time Replace it preferably after about 440 000 copies 8070 400 000 copies 6570 340 000 copies 5570 280 000 copies 4580 copies have been made 3 5 Checking and Cleaning the Upper and Lower Heat Rollers 1 Handling Precautions A Upper Heat Roller D Do not leave oil fingerprints etc on the upper heat roller 2 Be extremely careful not to allow hard object to hit or rub against the roller because the thin Teflon layer coated on the aluminum substrate is easily damaged and if damaged will result in defective drum cleaning B Lower Heat Roller Do not leave oil fingerprints etc on the lower heat roller 2 Checking Check for stain and damage on the heat roller and clean or replace if necessary 2 Clean the separation claws and check for chipped claws 8 Check the cleaning condition of the cleaning roller Check the thermistor for proper contact with the heat roller 5 Check the fused condition of the toner image Check the gap
230. being aligned by the copier s aligning roller the next sheet is being fed into the transport mechanism by the PFP When the preceding sheet is stopped the next one is also stopped When the preceding sheet restarts the next one also restarts This maintains a constant spacing between the sheets of paper 9 When copying is complete the copier sets the signal to L When the signal goes to L the PFP turns OFF the pedestal motor M31 and starts the PFP tray motor M27 M28 or M29 in the CW direction to lower the tray 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 32 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC ojesseo y Jeded jo sjeeus py OM 10 yeyo 8 4 dois Leg SOE 187 86 lye ELT ozz 65 897 vl 19 eve bla 6 71 98 S6 6 7 eL 97 zoz for LEE ayesq 29 261 bal POL 680 LE O 88 0 10 340 340 NO NO 340 440 NO NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 340 8G E 96 NO 340 H 1 i LOYWd OGHNd dOLWd MS dlSd LYVLSH NNYO sjeuBbls ye sjeubis SPIS 991 ye 5 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 33 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA onesseo eui Jaded sjeeus 11 ow yeyo
231. board and punch driver board MJ 1015 1016 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 22 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC CB9 Saddle stitcher paper pushing plate motor is abnormal Is the paper pushing plate home position sensor 145 normal No Replace the sensor Yes Is the paper pushing plate motor M8S operating at the specified timing Yes Replace the saddle stitcher controller board No Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal No Correct the mechanism Yes Does replacement of the paper pushing plate motor M8S rectify the problem No Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Yes END CBA CBB Saddle stitcher front rear stitcher motor is abnormal Are the front or rear stitcher and receptacles installed properly No __ Install them correctly Yes 4 Are the stitching home position switches PS4S PS2S on the front or rear stitchers normal 545 525 MJ 1006 1007 MS7S MS5S MJ 1015 1016 No Replace the front or rear stitcher Yes Is the front or rear stitcher operating at the predetermined timing No Replace the front or rear stitcher Yes Check the wiring between the stitcher and saddle stitcher controller board If it is normal replace the controller board Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 23 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING CBC Saddle stitcher alignment motor is abnormal Is the alignme nt plate home position sensor PI5S normal
232. brush Removes paper dust and foreign matter remaining on the drum surface after separation of the trans fer paper reduces blade wear lengths the blade life and improves image reliability Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 13 3 6570 5570 CLEANER 13 3 Drum Temperature Detection Circuit I J59 B1 I Thermistor Drum Temperature Detection Circuit 1 Temperature sensor In this detection circuit the voltage obtained by R12 thermistor R13 and R14 passes through the operation amplifier IC2 to be taken as input voltage B Input voltage is applied to pin No 2 of operation amplifier IC2 and is output as the temperature signal to the microcomputer and as the main charger control signal 2 High voltage transformer for the main charger control output unit Input voltage B connected to pin No 2 of operation amplifier IC2 via R11 is compared with reference voltage E that is applied by the divided voltage of R3 R2 and R1 amplified and is output from output terminal pin No 8 This output voltage is input to the A D converter of the microcomputer to control the temperature of the high voltage transformer for the main charger 6570 5570 CLEANER 13 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 13 4 Control for Maintaining Image Quality Using a Toner Adhesion Amount Sensor 1341 Outline The toner adhesion amount sensor performs the following functions e Controls the image formation conditions to an optimum state so that image density and line width ca
233. button is depressed the tray is lifted to the feed position and makes contact with the feed rollers The Tray Up Switch is directly connected to the feed roller assembly and thus it is actuated moments after the feed rollers make contact with the paper After the completion of every paper feed operation per tray unit the same unit is repositioned to the down position and is removed from the feed roller assembly and thus from the Tray Up Switch The PFC measures the period of time that it takes the Tray Up Switch of each cassette to be actuated turned ON for every time that it is used It does this for every paper feeding operation Obviously the Paper Feed Control Circuit PFC acknowledges the differences in the duration of time it takes for the Tray Up Switch to actuate during every print cycle and makes calculations based on time differ ences every time the tray is used These calculations are translated into icons depicting one of five displays on the LCD panel See illustrations below PFP cassette LCF Status i Status 0 Empty 0 1 N 125 Paper remaining 1 N 500 Paper remaining 125 lt N 250 Paper remaining 500 lt N 1000 Paper remaining 250 lt N 375 Paper remaining 1000 lt N 2000 Paper remaining 375 lt N Paper remaining 2000 lt N Paper remaining 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 9 2 Aligning Section 9 2 1 Introduction
234. cal Unit Overview Exit side Front side 6570 5570 PRINTING Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 2 Structure 1 Laser Unit The laser unit comprises a laser diode laser drive board finite lens and aperture 1 Laser diode and laser drive board The laser diode controls emission of laser beams based on the laser control ON OFF signals from the laser drive board Finite lens The finite lens focus the laser beam on the surface of the photosensitive drum Aperture The aperture regulates the shape of the laser beam at the laser beam irradiation position LASER SAFETY The beam of the semiconductor laser is itself extremely weak about 120 mW but focusing the parallel rays results in an increase in energy to which extended exposure is hazardous The laser optical system of the digital plain paper copier is encased in metal which in turn is housed in the external cover There is thus no risk of leaks during use nor during normal servic ing Note however extreme care must be exercised when servicing involves focusing the laser Such operations are hazardous and must not be attempted unless you are specifically trained to work in this area The warning label shown below is attached on the left side of the upper inner cover C gt PS lt DANGER LASER RADIATION WHEN OPTICAL UNIT OPEN OR DRUM UNIT REMOVED AND INTERLOCK DEFEATED AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM VORSICHT LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN DIE ABDECKUNG
235. can be performed when another paper cassette is selected If a cassette other than the above is selected the operation can be normally accepted 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 4 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Error history 08 253 Display example EA1 990326175732 64 64 236210000000 Error code YYMMDDHHMMSS MMM NNN ABCDEFGHIJKL 3 digit 12 digit Date time 3 digit 3 digit 12 digit Reproduction ratio Copy mode Copy mode A Paper feed cassette 0 Non select 1 Bypass 2 LCF 3 PFP U 4 PFP M 5 PFP L 6 ADU B Paper size code 0 Non select 1 A5 R 2 ST R 3 LT 4 4 5 BE R 6 7 A4 R 8 OTHER UNIV 9 B5 A FOL COM B LG B4 0 10 E A3 F 13 LG G 8 5 8 5 Sort mode Staple mode 0 Non select 1 Group 2 Sort 7 Staple Front 8 Staple 2 places 9 Staple Rear A Saddle stetch D DF mode 0 Not used 1 AUTO FEED SADF 2 STACK FEED E APS AMS mode 0 Non select 1 APS 2 AMS F Duplex mode 0 Non select 1 Book 2 Two sided Single sided 4 Two sided Duplexed 8 Single sided Duplexed G Not used 0 Not used H Image shift 0 Not used 1 Book 2 LEFT 3 RIGHT Editing O Not used 1 Masking 2 Trimming 3 Mirroring 4 Negative Positive J Edge erase Dual page 0 Not used 1 Edge erase 2 Dual page 3 Edge erase amp Dual page K Not used 0 Not used L Function 0 Not used 1 PPC 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 GDI 5 DSS Reproduct
236. ch and the paper is fed further into the stack section When the paper enters the stack section it is temporarily stacked on the holding gate receiving section and the paper is stacked between the pick up roller and the holding gate as the holding gate rotates At the stack section the paper is stacked with the copied side facing down This operation is repeated until the specified number of sheets of paper are stacked When paper stacking is started the paper side guides open to make a gap of 1 mm on both sides of the paper and are set at this position Each time that five sheets of paper are stacked continuously during stacking the side guides align the sides of the paper The ADU empty switch is for detecting whether or not paper is on the stack section 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 6A Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 3 2 Duplex copy re feed operation ADU exit switching gate Exit roller al Q ADU aligning switch Position detection switch 1 ADU aligning roller Pick up roller Position detection switch 2 ADU feed roller When the first sheet of paper is stacked the pick up roller located on the bottom side of the stack section rotates b
237. copier Model 4580 is only for NAD ASD and MJD Disposition of Consumable Parts Packing Materials Regarding the recovery and disposal of the copier supplies consumable parts and packing materials it is recommended to follow the relevant local regulations or rules When parts are disassembled reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents Be careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws washers pins E rings toothed washers in the wrong places Basically the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled Precautions Against Static Electricity The PC board must be stored in an anti electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wrist band because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity Caution Before using the wrist band pull out the power cord plug of the copier and make sure that there is no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity Caution Dispose of used RAM IC s including lithium battery according to the manufacturer s instructions Vorsicht Entsorgung des gebrauchten RAM IC s inklusive der Lithium Batterie nach Angaben des Herstellers ADJUSTMENT PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING amp HANDLING SUPPLIES TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIRMWARE UPDATE THROUGH PC MANUAL FOR FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS CON
238. craped residual toner to the toner bag via the waste toner carry auger unit 4 Toner bag Toner scraped off by the main blade is carried by the toner recovery auger and recovered to the toner bag via the waste toner carry auger unit 5 Toner full switch When the toner bag becomes full of recovered toner its weight causes both the toner bag and actuator to drop and the toggle switch to be turned OFF 6 Separation claw To separate paper that could not be separated by the transport belt the separation claw is pressed against the drum by the separation claw solenoid only when the leading edge of the paper passes through 6570 5570 CLEANER 13 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA Toner transport auger Toner full switch Spring Drum Separation claw Paper XN Toner bag The weight of the toner pulls the When the toner bag drops the toner bag down against the spring actuator also lowers in the in direction of arrow 1 direction of arrow 2 turning the toner full switch OFF 7 Toner adhesion amount sensor Measures the relative reflectivity of the toner image on the drum to maintain the image density at an appropriate value 8 Drum thermistor The charge on the drum surface varies greatly depending on the drum surface temperature For this reason the temperature of the drum surface is detected to control the drum surface charge to a constant value 9 Fur
239. ct the connector and remove the toner empty switch Toner empty switch N Toner supply cover switch 1 Remove the switch cover 1 screw Switch cover 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 24 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Disconnect the connector and remove the toner supply cover switch LEN pe Toner supply cover switch Connector O Toner transport auger unit 1 Remove the upper feed cover Remove the developer unit Ims Soo Draw out the large capacity feeder Remove the 2 screws 3 Remove the toner hopper unit 5 E NANNNNNNNNA Q o 222202 02 12 d dd URS ge Lf e 9 o o f P Developer motor 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the developer bias connector and remove the duct 2 screws 3 Remove the motor unit 3 screws Motor unit Developer bias connector Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 25 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 4 Remove the developer motor 2 screws Q Developer switch 1 Remove the right inner cover and the devel oper unit 2 Disconnect the connector and take off the har ness from the harness clamp 3 Remove the switch brac
240. cted into the PTr at high reflect ance Alternatively when there is an original the light radiated on the mirror and the light reflected from the mirror is broken by the original markedly reducing the infra red incident to the PTr When there is a large amount of light incident to the PTr that is there is no original the photo current flowing through the PTr increases and the voltage of pin 6 of IC5 rises at the voltage drop by R81 The comparator on IC5 compares the signal voltage of pin 6 reversal input terminal with the reference voltage input to pin 7 no reversal input terminal If the voltage of pin 6 is higher output pin 1 of IC5 turns Low Alternatively if there is little amount of light incident to the PTr that is there is an original the voltage of pin 6 of IC5 becomes low and as a result pin 1 of IC5 turns High R15 C30 and C31 NF2 in the circuit diagram are noise filters This circuit has an automatic sensitivity adjusting function for suppressing unevenness in sensor sensi tivity This function keeps the PTr voltage when there is no original at a constant level in all sensors and absorbs unevenness in sensor sensitivity caused by the physical differences of the sensor elements The PTr voltage is adjusted by varying the intensity of the infra red light radiated from the LED Automatic adjustment is executed when the sensor sensitivity adjustment is selected and when power is turned ON By this adjustment the PTr outpu
241. curling and toner transfer deficiency on the leading trailing edge of duplexing copy tend to worsen 2 Do not set the temperature to value larger than 12 210 C or more The fuser thermostat actuates to turn the power OFF and the thermostat must be replaced 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 76 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Procedure 2 Increase the pressurizing pressure of the heat rollers Carry this out when procedure D does not produce the desired result If the preset value has been changed in procedure 1 it must be returned to its original value before this procedure is carried out Insert spacers 4401 903180 WAS 15 105 FUS under the pressurizing spring as shown in the fig ure to increase the pressurizing force Up to three spacers may be inserted on one side Inserting one spacer on each side increases the pressurizing force by 5kg This means that the current force of 100kg can be increased to 115kg when a total of six spacers three on each side are inserted Notes 1 The spacers must be inserted under the spring as shown in the figure below 2 The same number of spacers must be inserted at the front and rear sides Skew occurs when a different number of spacers are inserted on the front and rear sides 3 Do not insert four or more spacers on one side The spring may deform 4 When the pressure is increased the level of wrinkling curling and toner transfer deficiency on the leading trailing edge of duplexi
242. d Thermostat It is a temperature control device that prevents over heating of the exposure lamp s assembly 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Carriage 2 The Carriage 2 assembly directs light reflected from mirror 1 to the CCD assembly It contains mirrors 2 and 3 The scanner motor drives this assembly Its scanning speed as well as the distance that it travels is half that of carriage 1 Mirror 2 Mirror 3 Carriage 2 4 Lens CCD Light reflected from mirror 3 is projected to the CCD The CCD is located at the focal point of a fixed lens b CCD drive PC board The Image processing board performs image correction preprocessing amplification mixing A D conversion and shading correction of electrical signals obtained by the CCD CCD drive PC board Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 3 6570 5570 SCANNER 6 Automatic original detection unit The automatic original detection unit APS sensor uses sensors located on the lens cover and on the base frame for detection of the size of the original without the process of scanning 7 Original width indicator unit The original width indicator unit is for indicating the original width currently selected by the copier The original size is displayed by the yellow lines on the indicator and carriage 1 Original indicator unit Copiable width
243. d perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later Is the main charger not dirty and firmly locked Yes No Clean or replace the main charger Lock the main charger and perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later Replace the following in order and perform image quality maintenance forced execu tion confirmation described later Developer unit Cleaner unit Transfer belt 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 30 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC The value of self diagnostics 05 291 is 4 sensor trouble sensor output is not within the normal range Y Is the value of self diagnostics 05 292 sensor output value when LED light source is OFF within the range 102 to 307 Yes No Check the connector replace the sensor and the LGC board and then perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later v Is the value of self diagnostics 05 293 sensor output value with respect to the drum within the following range self diagnostics 08 814 x4 to 819 Yes No gt Self diagnostics 05 293 lt self diagnostics 08 814 x4 Y Is the value of self diagnostics 05 296 sensor light intensity adjustment result 2557 Yes No Replace the sensor and LGC board and perform image quality maintenance forced execution confirmation described later Y Is the sensor window dirty No
244. d then remove forward rotation clutch and reverse rotation clutch T Holding gate solenoid 1 Remove the ADU feed unit 2 Remove the feed drive unit 3 Remove the screw fixing the holding gate sole noid to remove the holding gate solenoid 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 18 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC U inlet reversal roller rubber roller plastic roller Remove the ADU feed unit Remove the feed drive unit Remove the E ring gear and pin Remove 2 screws for the transport guide u 1 2 3 4 b Remove the rear E ring and take out the bush 6 Remove the transport guide u 2 screws 7 Slide the inlet reversal roller rubber roller to the front to remove 8 Remove the front springs and rear springs 2 each 9 Remove the front E ring and take out the bush 10 Remove the rear E ring and take out the bush Ly Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 19A 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 11 Slide the inlet reversal roller plastic roller to the front and take it out V Separation belt 1 Remove the ADU unit 2 Remove the feed drive unit 3 Remove the 4 screws fixing separation mount ing bracket and then the separation mounting bracket 4 Remove the E ring collar gear pin and bush 5 Remove the 2 E rings bush and bracket 6 Remove the E ring slide the bush from the bracke
245. de the origi nal feeding tray to the front to remove E Feedunit 1 Remove the original feeding tray 2 Remove the rear cover 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors and remove the earth lead 1 screw and harness band 4 Remove the 2 screws and slide the ADF unit to the rear side and light up to remove Original feeding tray Connector ADF unit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 51 6570 5570 ADF 5b Turn the entire unit over and remove the cover 8 screws M4 x 8 6 Disconnect the 4 connectors from the PC board 7 Open the jam release cover and loosen the Screw Jam release cover 8 Remove the 6 screws and the feed unit X 12 4 pcs M4 8 1 pc M3 x 6 1 pc B harness guide 6570 5570 ADF 16 52 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC F Feed motor 1 Loosen the tensioner fixing screw from the tim ing belt Note Do not remove the springs hanging
246. dund av stv var Gad wo UNS av MS di3 401 ty sw VOMSTON VOMSTON VOMON aan Siar vrana 5914 oN ae E HIO AdH m vriDand ona E ovo vi d34nd ado vi gadnd vi d34nd t aaa vona vraoind MS ZANAZANL E mi Vranand TA Vrdrand Vranand ano aan aan CM 25 MS dNF ENL inr mr ET VodnaL UND aan 0107 740107 MS d01 391 UNS VEGSHOT WaT vraaio1 aan Gan OND ona MS dOH HNL vemsdoH Ong MS 0333 491 PWA LGC ON 501 212 fyrimuni 1OW UNL ong aan uH ve D VOSANEL vOSaNUL NS QNS veer oar NS ong 8 4154 aan aan N ON avo avo vo d19d Nv4NF1OnQ ona dan MS U3AOO LIX3 se vere MSt0331 E E aan OND ong aNd 138 eter ger 5 135 421 OND OND OND QNO QNO VEISSOT VII3SO1 Gan Gan Gan V0 3HO Nv3 835 EY Wrdaind HL aaa Gan VdOLNd Vond 1597 1997 VOMSNEL VOMSNEL MS EANAANL an OND Y Vrdnand jH vanns VEdNENd NVS A30 Gan Gan Gan D gt ONSMVLS vue A3W AVuL JO1 ona rner Ke VOSS ong LL Ronan WHNGIOT Lr GU enr M
247. e Aligning motor M17 RGT MOT is driven by 2SD1415A of Q2 to Q5 on the logic PC board The circuit is shown below 24V Construction of motor drive In the case of 2 phase excitation AB BA AB and BA will be successively excited While transistors QA and QB are ON current from the 24V stabilized power supply will flow into phases A and B Next while QA is OFF and QAis ON the current which flowed through phase A will be cut off owing to the disappearance of a flow path At this point however phases A and A will be inductively coupled causing the current from the 24VDC power supply to be diverted through diode DA to phase A in the direction marked X When the currnet flowing in this direction becomes zero current will flow through QA to excite phase A Atthe instant when QA goes OFF the current which flowed through phase A abruptly decreases causing a high voltage to appear at the collector of QA Because of Zener diode ZDA however the collector voltage is held at the Zener voltage protecting transistor QA and diode DA Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 3 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 1 3 Detection of the remaining amount of paper B Paper empty detection e When the LCF or the cassette has run out of paper the LCF door is opened or the cassette is removed the ADD PAPER symbol EAE lights on the display panel on the copier Detection principle When the cassette is selected and after the START
248. e CPM in a parenthesis is the specification of the 4580 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 1A 8070 6570 5570 4580 SPECIFICATIONS System copy speed CPM Copy mode 6500 6570 5500 5570 8000 8070 Single sided originals 42 38 42 55 45 61 Single sided copies 59 51 67 Single sided originals 32 28 32 43 39 44 Duplex copies 48 43 49 Two sided originals 23 22 23 39 35 40 Duplex copies 45 41 47 Two sided originals 28 28 28 45 42 49 Single sided copies 52 46 58 Ten A4 or LT originals are set in the ADF This includes the first copy time Copy paper Cassette Duplexing Manual feeding Note Size A5 R A5 R Adjustable to a non LD ST R LD ST R standard size Thickness 64 80 g m 64 130 g m Special Tracing paper label Our company paper paper OHP film recommended e First copy time 3 6 seconds max A4 or LT LCF 10096 manually placed original e Warm up time Approx 420 sec Multiple copying 1 to 999 numerical keypad entry e Reproduction ratio Fixed ratio 10096 or 10196 selected in adjustment mode Zoom ratios 25 400 in 196 steps e Paper supply Automatic feeding LCF capacity 4000 sheets 3 cassettes capac ity 500 sheets each manual bypass feeding ca pacity 100 sheets 64 to 80 g m Manual feeding 64 to 130 g m 80 to 130 g m paper is feed one
249. e E ring and bush on the opposite end Note When assembling pay attention to the mounting direction of the gear and collar L PFP upper aligning roller rubber roller 1 Remove the PFP upper aligning unit 2 Take out the spring E ring and bushing on each end and then remove the rubber roller 3 When replacing the rubber roller remove the E ring gear and pin Notes Precaution for assembling 1 Spring Front Yellow Rear Black 2 Gear mounting direction M PFP tray motor upper middle and lower 1 Remove the PFP inner cover 2 Remove the harness from the harness clamp unnecessary for the upper tray 3 Disconnect the connector 4 Remove the motor bracket 3 screws 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM PFP upper aligning roller metal roller PFP upper aligning roller rubber roller Pin PFP upper aligning roller metallic roller Gear E ring E ring Pin Gear Collar E ring JH E ring PFP upper aligning roller rubber roller Gear Pin E ring Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC b Remove the 2 gear units 2 screws 6 Remove the PFP tray motor 3 screws N Feedclutch aligning clutch upper middle Motor fixing screws and lower 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the connector 3 Loosen the setscrew h
250. e handle 6570 5570 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 11 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 11 4 Display and Replacement A Belt transport unit 1 Rotate the handle to the left and draw out the belt transport unit 2 Remove the fuser unit 1 screw When the lower damp heater is attached disconnect the rear connector 3 Remove the 2 stepped screws blue 4 Lift up the belt transport unit holding it by both grips Note When installing the belt transport unit on the slide rail firmly insert the stepped pin on the slide rail into the notch on the belt trans port unit B Transfer belt unit 1 Remove the inner cover 2 screws 2 Disconnect the transfer belt power supply con nector the cleaning brush power supply con nector and the earth 2 screw 3 Remove the front clip and slide the bearing Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 11 Right side C zy JV a b Left side 6570 5570 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 4 Remove the 2 rear bearing bracket fastening screws and the 2 casing fastening screws 5 Draw out the transfer belt unit upwards on the front side Notes 1 During assembly fasten the screws in or der 1 2 and 3 2 When assembling the transfer belt unit make sure that the front lever of the trans fer belt unit fits under the cam on the front frame Front frame s
251. e switch Width guide switch Position detection switch 1 DAG Length guide motor anl CUN ES NER Width guide motor Stack empty switch Mar 1999 O TOSHIBA TEC 15 11 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU F Pick up roller guide unit 1 Remove the stack guide unit 2 Remove the 4 screws fixing the pick up roller guide to remove the pick up roller guide G Pick up roller 1 Remove the pick up roller guide unit 2 Remove the 3 clips fixing the pick up roller clutch and pick up roller H Transport clutch 1 Remove the ADU front cover 2 Remove the stack guide unit 3 Remove the pick up roller guide unit 4 Remove the 2 screws fixing the clutch guide and then the clutch guide Note When returning the clutch guide to its origi nal position make sure that the protrusion on the clutch is fitted into the notch on the clutch guide b Remove the set screw fixing the transport clutch and disconnect the connector Then remove the transport clutch 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 12A Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC I Transport roller 2 3 4 1 Remove the PC board 2 Remove the front E ring and bush 3 Remove the rear E ring pulley pin and belt 4 Remove the E
252. e the original glass turn the power switch ON with the carriage moved to the feed side and check the following items C27 The carriage moves only slightly in the feed direction or the carriage stays at a position other than the home position and does not move Yes Check the circuits on the SLG and SDV boards for troubles No Check the connector pins for disconnection and the harness for breaks and short circuits Check the SDV board for breaks and short circuits Check the SLG board for breaks and short circuits Replace the SDV board Replace the SLG board C28 Is a loud sound emitted after the carriage bumps into the home position Yes The home switch does not turn ON Make sure that the switch connector is connected Check the circuits on the SLG and SDV boards for troubles No Cause The carriage is located at the home position and does not move Check the connector pins for disconnection and the harness for breaks and short circuits Check the SDV board for breaks and short circuits Check the SLG board for breaks and short circuits Replace the SDV board Replace the SLG board Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 1 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING C26 C29 Peak detection error exposure lamp disconnection detected Does the exposure lamp light Yes Check the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards for disconnection Check the shading plate on the rear of the original
253. e tray at the base of the cassette to the pick up roller s paper feed position to feed paper ER RR r de d Wheel 28 gear14 Tray motor Raising the tray The tray motor rotates in the direction of the arrow Y Worm wheel 28 rotates in the direction of the arrow Gear 14 is connected so it also rotates in the same direction When gear 35 rotates in the direction of the arrow the spring tightens and gear 15 and 20 rotate in the same direction Gear 144 rotates in the direction of the arrow raising the elevator via the shaft and pushing up the cassette tray Lowering the tray The tray motor rotates in the direction of the arrow Xy e Worm wheel 28 and gear 14 rotate in the direction of the arrow Gears 35 15 and 20 rotate in the direction of the arrow y Gear 144 rotates in the direction of the arrow lowering the elevator via the shaft and lowering the cassette tray Lowering the tray when the cassette is removed The tray is lowered as follows when the cassette is removed with the tray in the raised position e The protrusion on the front side of the cassette lowers the elevator lever pusher as the cassette is removed arrow A e The gear at the tip of the elevator lever moves in a CCW direction arrow B engaging gear 25 which rotates in a CW direction Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 43 6570 5
254. e tray up switch S30 S34 or S38 the tray motor turns OFF and the tray stops This position becomes the paper feed position If there is paper on the tray the actuator at the center of the PFP pick up roller is also detected by the paper empty switch S29 S33 or S37 If there is no paper on the tray then the actuator enters the hole in the tray only at the position of the actuator and does not reach the PFP paper empty switch detection position indicating that there is no paper If no copy is started the tray is lowered two sec onds after the tray reaches the paper feed posi tion Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 47 PFP tray up switch PFP 2 Switch ME n 207 Pick up arm Paper Cassette base Actuator Pick up roller er tray Fig 9 4 1 In the case where there is paper the actuator is detected tray up switch PFP paper empty switch pick up roller 7 Tray hole in the actuator position Cassette tray B Actuator Cassette base Fig 9 4 2 In the case where there isn t paper the acutuator isn t detected 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM Paper feed operation When the PRINT key is pressed on the control panel The PFP tray motor M27 M28 or M29 corresponding to the selected cassette rotates to CCW direction raising the cassette tray until the paper on the tray contacts the PFP pick up roller At this point the tray sto
255. eaner unit by holding the han dle Notes 1 The cleaner unit is heavy Take care not to drop it 2 When installing the cleaner unit make sure that the cleaning unit gear is en gaged with the gear on the rear of the toner auger motor pulley before you se cure it B Main blade 1 Remove the drum 2 Remove the top cover 4 screws 3 Holding the bracket turn the main blade over 4 Remove the screw 5 Hold the ends of the 2 screws remove the main blade 6570 5570 CLEANER 13 Top cover Screw ends Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC C Recovery blade 1 Remove the recovery blade Notes 1 The recovery blade is secured by dou ble sided adhesive tape Make sure that the tape is completely removed before securing the new blade 2 When installing the recovery blade press the edge of the recovery blade against the stepped section of the cleaner frame and fix at point A making sure that there is no gap D Fur brush 1 Draw out the support shaft knob of the fur brush in the direction of the arrow to set the fur brush to a free state 2 Remove the fur brush from the cleaner body E Toner adhesion amount sensor 1 Remove the s
256. eaning roller 4 B 6570L B 8070L 1 7 Fur brush cleaner B 6570 1 8 Separation roller LCF K ROL SPT CW S 1 9 Pick up roller LCF K ROL PICK 2 1 10 Feed roller LCF K ROL FEED 2 1 Charger wire cleaner for main charger K BASE PAD CH M 1 12 Drum separation claw K CLAW DRUM 2 13 Ozone filter K FILTER OZON 1 14 Charger wire for main charger WIRE CH 060 398 1 15 Upper heat roller separation claw SCRAPER 212 6 16 Toner filter developer unit FILTER DEV F300 1 17 Grid for main charger GRID 154 1 18 Heat roller upper HR 6570 U 1 19 Heat roller lower HR 6570 L 1 20 Transfer belt power supply roller CR 6570TR CR 8070TR 1 21 Transfer belt BT 6570TR 1 22 Fur brush Transfer belt B 6570TR 1 23 Transfer belt cleaning blade BL 6570TR 1 Note 6 The B 8070L is available for 8070 Both the B 6570 and B 8070L are available for 6570 5570 4580 20 The CR 8070TR is available for 8070 Both the CR 6570 and CR 8070TR are available for 6570 5570 4580 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 2 16 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 5 Jig List Name Door switch jig Lens adjustment jig Wire holder jig Parts List Page Item 201 2 201 3 201 1 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 17 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 3 PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING amp HANDLING SUPPLIES 3 1 Precautions for Storing TOSHIBA Supplies A Toner and Developer Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature i
257. ectors from the front heater lamp 3 Remove the drawer connector bracket 1 Screw 4 Remove the rear lamp bracket 1 screw b Disconnect the 2 connectors from the rear heater lamp 6 Draw out the 2 heater lamps Notes 1 When attaching the 2 heater lamps make sure that they are attached with the TOSHIBA marks facing the front Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Cleaning roller4 Lower separation claw Spring Connector 6 Lamp bracket Drawer connector bracket Upper hearter lamp 23 TOSHIBA mark Lower hearter lamp 14 13 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 2 The wattage of the 2 lamps is different Make sure that the lamp having the cor rect wattage is attached by aligning the lamp with the holes on the heater lamp bracket 3 Do not directly touch the glass sections of the lamps and leave fingerprints or 2g D gt other marks Ol ES E 6 Upper lower heat roller and cleaning roller 3 1 Remove the fuser unit guard and jam process ing unit 2 Draw out the 2 heater lamps x 3 Completely loosen the 2 screws fixing the pres 5 sure springs a 0 0 7 Y r 0 T 7 4 Remove the front handle bracket 1 screw b Remove the front stop ring and gear 6 Remove the 2 front screws and take out the bearing 7 Re
258. ed 20 using adjustment groove A or 1 15 4 Operation Check of Holding Gate 1 Pull out the ADU after removing the gray cover which is covering the feed unit two screws Replace it inside the copier 2 Start Duplex copying with the left front cover of the copier opened by using the door switch jig 3 Check the turning of the shaft S shown on the left side below figure of the ADU e When shaft S turns two times gt Normal e When shaft S does not turn at all or only once gt Poor turning Note1 To connect with the shaft S and the holding gate it is possible to check the movement of the holding gate by looking at the rotation of shaft S Feed Unit Shaft S Note2 If it is not possible to make a visual evaluation one can judge by the noise of the rotation of the holding gate Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 74 14 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 16 Adjusting the Thickness of the Magnetic Brush leveler Bring both edges of the developer leveler up against the projections on the front and rear side frames Positional adjustment is not needed as the thick ness of the transport roller magnetic brush is al ready fixed Leveler Projection of sideframe 1 17 Adjusting the Gap between the Drum and Sleeve Since the guide roller of the developer unit is pressed against the drum no adjustment is necessary 1 18 Adjustment of Developer Polarity Position As the developer polarity
259. eed as follows During standby 18608 1 rpm During copying 600 dpi 18608 1 rpm 2 Polygonal mirror The laser beams emitted from the laser di odes are reflected by this mirror As the po lygonal mirror is rotated by the polygonal mirror motor the direction of the reflected laser light moves in sync with mirror rota tion The direction of movement is the pri mary scanning direction of the image with four scans ending in one plane of the po lygonal mirror as four lasers are mounted As the polygonal mirror has eight planes 32 scans are completed in one rotation of the polygonal mirror Drum Laser beams Drum Laser beams Drum Four scans are completed by completion of steps to Four scans are carried out on one plane of the polygonal mirror 32 scans can be carried out with one rotation of the polygonal mirror Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 5 6570 5570 PRINTING 5 10 lens 1 and 2 These lenses perform the following compensations on the laser light reflected by the polygonal mirror 1 Equidistant scanning The laser light reflected on the polygonal mirror is scanned at the same angle as the polygonal mirror is rotated at the same speed Thatis when the scan is completed the dot pitch on the drum becomes the wide spaces at both edges and the narrow spaces in the center So in order to make the dot pitch equidistant laser light is com pensated so that it is scanned on the drum at equal speeds
260. eflected light is projected directly to the photosensitive drum digital copiers project reflected light from the original document to the Charged Coupled Device CCD The CCD converts optical images into electrical signals which ultimately undergo shading correction which is nothing more than compensations for variance in the light source and the CCD unit After shading corrections are made signals are sent to the image processing section where processing operations are performed Data are then sent to the printer section for conversion into light beam that are directed to the photosensitive drum for printing of the latent image The image processing operation is performed by the SLG board PWA F SLG 300 and PLG board PWA F PLG 300 1 Image processing circuit on the SLG board One image processing ASIC is mounted on the SLG board and implement the following functions Functions High quality image processing image memory editing editing processing gamma correction tone processing external output system interface 2 Image processing circuit on the PLG board One image processing ASIC is mounted on the PLG board and implements the following functions Functions Smoothing processing external input system interface image area control laser related control 6570 5570 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 2 2 Configuration Figure A shown below represents the image processing section of this digital copier CCD boa
261. emperature detection in 1 continues So if the main switch is turned ON immediately it will be turned OFF again as long as the temperature on the heater surface remains above the abnormal detection temperatures of thermistors Thereafter this will be repeated So after waiting for the heater surface temperature to drop turn ON the main switch and you can check the counter value before the main switch is turned OFF again After confirming that an abnormal heater condition has occurred repair the problem and then clear code 400 of the setting mode with 0 After that you can bring the copier into its normal operating condition 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 5 Heat Roller Motor Drive 14 5 1 Outline of operation FG pulse Wave I shaping Difference comparator Reference poled letection requency i Speed circuit UUU phase d comparator switching H MOT REF ren Ditterence N unit MOT Control i Rotation 4 Roter signal MOTL control position detector Heat roller motor M DC HTR 300N U V W Phase A B C Hall element Fig 14 5 1 1 The LGC transmits control signals for the heat roller motor rotation HTRMOT Motor rotation com 2 The excited phase switching unit excites each phase on the heat roller motor Heat roller motor rotates
262. ence 6570 5570 ADF 16 66 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Separation pad separation mylar sheet Separation pad Separation mylar sheet Fixing reference Clearance 0 to 0 5mm overlapping not allowed Pad holder Separation pad Separation pad g c Q oo 8 d 5 ge jg o 9 Eo 6 POL GE xX 9 gt L ole Separation mylar sheet Separation mylar sheet Fixing reference Clearance 0 to 0 5mm when pushed up against this line cross section The paper path direction in the figure must be free from steps that may catch the paper 10 Flapper rubber skirt Flapper rubber skirt Arrow view Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 67 6570 5570 ADF 11 Reversal mirror seal When fixing the reversal mirror seal do not scratch the mirror surface ee p Reversal mirror seal 5 lt lt cls Qi 5 c cot 3599 vocc oco Sc coc go 523 259052 cross section 6570 5570 ADF 16 68 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 12 Cushions Fixing reference Clearance 0 to 0 5mm end face reference E ue 19 0 D 55 6
263. ensor mounting bracket 2 screws Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 13 Recovery blade Cleaner casing Drum surface Recovery A SS Ao 71 ul 3 I Fur brush 8070 6570 5570 4580 CLEANER UNIT 2 Disconnect the sensor connector and remove the 2 mounting screws F Separation claw 1 Remove the cover 2 screws 2 Remove the E ring and remove the cam 3 Slide the separation claw unit to the front side to draw it out from the bushing on the rear side and draw out the unit to the rear Separation claw unit 8070 6570 5570 4580 CLEANER UNIT 18 10 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Remove the 3 screws and draw out the 2 sepa ration claws from the shaft together with the stopper and paper guide G Drum thermistor 1 Disconnect the connector and remove the SCrew 2 Cut the bundling band H Toner auger motor 1 Remove the cleaner unit 2 Remove the left inner cover 3 Remove the 4 screws securing the bracket and the reinforcement plate disconnect the connec tor and bundling band The motor can be re moved as an individual unit 4 Remove the toner auger motor 2 screws and bundling band Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Separation claw Stopper Paper guide Thermistor bracket Connector Drum thermisto
264. eparation roller Set lever S t lever Spring With the cassette removed When the cassette is removed the set lever is rotated in the D direction by spring Position of the set lever pushes up at position of the pressure lever causing it to rotate in a CCW direction separating the PFP separation roller from the PFP feed roller Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 9 45 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM B Cassette insertion operation When the cassette is inserted into the paper feed pedestal the cassette latch pushes up the lever arm lowering the PFP pick up roller The roller does not lower itself onto the paper in the cassette The cassette switches on the rear side detect whether a cassette is inserted or not 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 46 Rear side PFP tray up switch PFP paper empty switch S30 S29 Y 34 S34 S33 82 538 537 TM N Pick up arm Ne Actuators Pick up roller Cassette latch Lever arm Front side Cassette switch Actuator Mar 1999 TOSHIBA The tray motor M27 M28 or M29 turns ON and raises the cassette tray when the cassette switch detects that a cassette is installed The pa per on the tray contacts with the PFP pick up roller which pushes up the roller When the pick up arm is detected by th
265. eparation auxiliary member Supply recovery paddle When a fine power toner that has a charge of the same polarity as the electrostatic latent image and color black or other color comes near the electrostatic latent image formed on the drum surface the toner adheres to the image only by electrostatic force causing the electrostatic latent image to be devel oped resulting in a visible image being formed This is the developing process performed in the devel oper unit cartrige Toner hopper unit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 1 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 2 Construction 12 2 1 Developer unit The developer unit consists of the lower and upper developer sleeves magnetic rollers leveler auto toner sensor supply recovery paddle separation auxiliary member mixing unit etc The developer ma terial is poured into the developer unit Lower developer sleeve Transport roller Upper developer sleeve 4 Modg unit unit et MB 1 Mixer 2 2 i iso Supply recovery paddle Separation auxiliary member Auto toner sensor 1 Developer material The developer material contains carrier and toner The carrier is made of iron powder of about 65u m in diameter being a conductor The toner is made of resin particles about 9u m in diameter The toner has a weight ratio of about 596 of the developer material Developer material deteriorates with use and
266. er heat roller applies the required heat that melts the toner plus Pressure pressure lower roller applies pressure that fixes the melted toner into the fibers of the paper The combination and the function of the two rollers accomplish the fixing process of the fusing system 8 Cleaning This process cleans the surface of the drum It also collects the residual toner The following two processes are carried out 1 The fur brush scrapes of excessive toner and paper scraps The flicker scrapes off toner from the brush 2 Residual toner on the drum is scraped off The drum surface is cleaned Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Upper heat roller Paper p d Pressure Upper heat roller Heater lamp Separation claw Direction of paper CN movement Pressure Lower heat roller Main blade Rotation of drum Fur brush Flicker Recovery blade 6570 5570 COPYING PROCESS 9 Discharge This process electrically discharges any re sidual electrostatic charge left on the surface of the drum If not removed an uneven charge is placed on the drum surface that will affect the print qual ity of the next copy Double imaging will occur Method A discharge LED array illuminates the Discharge LED array entire surface of the drum The drum becomes a conductor and all residual charges will be grounded electrostatic charges are removed at this time The drum t
267. er which has a minus nega tive charge adheres to the carrier material and producing what is commonly referred to as developer Toner is a material mainly made with plastic and carbon materials Carrier is ferrite beads with a coating layer for the reason of the stabilization of the fric tional charge with toner Note If the developer material is used for long periods beyond its normal life span toner will become stuck to the carrier Carrier 1 The carrier s charging performance is lowered Result 1 Image density is lowered 2 Toner scattering occurs 3 Fogging occurs Solution Exchange the developer material Where toner has settled no frictional electrifica tion occurs e Magnetic roller Magnetic brush development The South and North poles are arranged as shown in the figure on the right inside the Lines of magnetic force magnetic roller The developer material con tacts the drum forming a brush Drum This is caused by the lines of magnetic force between the South and North poles Magnetic roller Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 3 5 6570 5570 COPYING PROCESS 6 Transfer Separation Reference The transfer process transfers the developed image onto the surface of the copy paper e Paper passing under the drum is held in con tact to the belt by static electricity produced by the transfer belt onto the paper e Separation is accomplished shortly after tran
268. er heat roller the surface of the upper heat roller is coated with Teflon Lower heat roller The lower heat roller is made of rubber to facilitate pressurization of the upper heat roller The lower heat roller is pressed against the upper heat roller by springs 4 Separation claw The upper and lower separation claws separate paper affixed to the upper and lower heat rollers 5 Cleaning roller 2 A cleaning roller 2 is attached so as to contact the upper heat roller to clean the toner that has stuck to the upper heat roller during the fusing process This roller contains silicon oil that transfer to the surface of the heat roller by the heat of the heat roller and so on This makes it easier to clean the toner on the heat roller Cleaning roller 1 A cleaning roller 1 for the upper heat roller is attached so as to contact the upper heat roller to remove toner and paper scraps that have stuck to the upper heat roller during the fusing process This cleaning roller 1 does not contain silicon oil Cleaning roller 3 A cleaning roller 3 is attached so as to contact the press roller to remove the toner and paper scraps that have stuck to the press roller during the fusing process This roller contains silicon oil that trans fer to the surface of the press roller by the heat of the press roller and so on This makes it easier to clean the toner and paper scraps on the press roller 3 Cleaning roller 4 A cleaning roller 4 i
269. er passing through the ADU aligning roller It is also used for detecting paper jams 3 The ADU position detection switch 1 and ADU position detection switch 2 switch detect the leading and trailing edges of the paper passing through the ADU transport roller They are also used for detecting paper jams Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 8 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 3 3 Reversal exit operation ADU exit switching gate Reverse guide 28 Exit roller Aligning roller Inlet reversal roller ae Solenoid Reverse direction clutch ADU feed guide In the double sided copy mode the reversal exit operation is carried out when the second side is output if the following conditions are met Conditions The 1st of several copies of two or more odd numbered originals made in the one sided and double sided modes using the ADF Or when one copy is made By the reversal exit operation the double sided copy sheets are detected by the body aligning switch when the sheets arrive at the aligning roller on the copier and the ADU exit switching gate are positioned in the direction of the paper stack section by solenoid Next
270. er the main switch is switched ON up until the machine becomes capable of copying The number and reproduction ratio of copies are indicated for example as 0 100 when the main switch comes ON Capable of copying Indicated when the machine is capable of copying and the operator s instructions for copying conditions are awaited Returns to the initial condition if no key input is given for 45 seconds e Copy quantity indicator indicates as 1 When a digital key is pressed the set number is indicated e The set number is cleared to 1 by pressing the CLEAR STOP key Manual copying is possible COPYING Now copying Indicated by pressing the START key Copy quantity indicator becomes 1 and copying is completed After completion of copying the copy quantity indicator returns to the initially set number WAIT 30 SEC FOR WARMING UP Energy saving conditions e Released by pressing the ENERGY SAVER key or the START key PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL ADU 1 sided copying standby state e When using ADU 1 sided and when not using ADF Timer OFF No message is displayed in the display panel e Timer LED is turned ON 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT Press the START key to clear EXPOSURE Auto Photo Text Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 5 2 2 Display in the event of faulty conditions Message Abnormal state amp indication So
271. erence 0 to 1 ies Sheets 4 and 5 must be fixed according to the rib contact reference in the direction of the arrows shown in the figure on the left Overlapping of ribs is not allowed Clearance must be 0 to 2mm 16 62 Feed sheet 1 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Guide mylar sheets mirror seals mirror mylar sheets When fixing the mirror seal do not scratch the mirror surface C C cross section 0 to 0 5mm The opposite side must be fixed at the same Fixing reference Fixing reference Clearance Mirror mylar sheet Guide mylar sheet 2 locations Mirror seal when pushed against end face when pushed against end face B B cross section Fixing reference Clearance 0 to 0 5mm Fixing reference Clearance 0 to 0 5mm mirror seal mirror mylar sheet Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 63 6570 5570 ADF 5 Aligning mylar sheet aligning plate Aligning plate 2 7 Aligning mylar Sheet Q SEED 2 Fixing reference Deviation 0 to 0 5mm protrusion not allowed protrusion also not allowed on opposite face 6 Weight mylar Sheet weight holder Weight mylar sheet c
272. ete adjustment procedure before performing this adjustment v415 First beam laser power Copier 103 0 255 Laser power increases 2 34 Wistep v416 First beam laser power Printer 103 0 255 Setto 103 do not change from the setting 430 Copy leading edge void adjustment Copier 24 0 255 Increasing the value by increases the void by approximately 0 04233mm v431 Copy top edge void adjustment rear of Copier 0 0 255 Increasing the value by machine Top of copy LT A4 or right side increases the void by of ST R A5 R LT R A4 R Legal B4 and approximately 0 04233mm Ledger A3 432 Copy bottom edge void adjustment front of Copier 0 0 255 Increasing the value by Machine Bottom of copy LT A4 or left side increases the void by approxi edge of ST R A5 R LT R A4 R Legal B4 and mately 0 04233mm Ledger A3 v433 Copy trailing edge void adjustment Copier 30 0 255 the value by increases the void by approxi mately 0 04233mm v435 Printed page leading edge void adjustment Printer 24 0 255 Increasing the value by increases the void by approximately 0 04233mm 436 Printed page top edge void adjustment rear Printer 0 0 255 the value by of machine Top of printed page LT A4 or increases the void by right side of ST R A5 R LT R A4 R Legal B4 approximately 0 04233mm and Ledger A3 v437 Printed page bottom edge void adjustment Printer 0 0 255 Increasing the value by fro
273. etween the copier and the ADF Communications request signal copier to ADF DF REQ Communications request signal ADF to copier Communications request answer signal copier to ADF c eed Communications request answer signal ADF to copier EXD iia Data sent from the copier to the ADF RAD iem Data sent from the ADF to the copier Data communications RXD TXD between the copier and the ADF is carried out by serial communica tions So you cannot check whether or not signals are being sent or received correctly in the field using a multimeter ADF COPIER 6570 5570 ADF 16 20 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 16 5 Detection of Paper Jam 16 5 1 Feed section jams 1 Aligning sensor non arrival jam 1 Up to aligning sensor ON from start of feed from the tray in the one sided and double sided modes The number of pulses equivalent to 15X the distance from the original set position to the aligning sensor ON position is set as the jam pulse This is set when feed from the tray is started 2 Timing sensor non arrival jam 1 Up to timing sensor from start of transport after aligning in the one sided and double sided modes The number of pulses equivalent to 4X the distance from the aligning roller nip position to the timing sensor ON position is set as the jam pulse This is set when transport by the aligning roller after original aligning is started 3 Alig
274. eversal control END 6570 5570 ADF 16 30 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 7 8 Exit control Exit control START Reversal motor forward rotation started No Exit sensor ON Setting of jam pulse from exit sensor ON to exit sensor OFF Setting of exit deceleration start pulse at exit sensor ON Pulse count up Reversal motor deceleration started to exit deceleration speed gt lt Exit sensor OFF Jam pulse cleared Output original present No Exit sensor ON Setting of jam pulse from exit sensor ON to reversal Setting of reversal motor deceleration request at exit sensor OFF deceleration started after specified pulse drive Reversal motor stopped Exit control END sensor OFF Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 31 6570 5570 ADF 16 7 9 Operating status monitoring No The second original onwards A No Front side setting progress Back side etting in progress Double sided No One sided mode Double sided mode mode 5 2 double sided transport Initial alignment started Exit started started double sided transport of original on platen No 2 double sided transport 2 originals on started double sided platen transport of original on platen Double 0 sided transport N No completed Double Exit completed
275. ey Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Program canceled Target Version 1 001 2 canceled Power Off In the case of 1 6 Failed Firmware Version Up Mode Failed to install a new firmware file read error Target 1 Power Off In the case of 1 3 Failed Firmware Version Up Mode Failed to install a new firmware file read error Target Version Target 1 Error Power Off occurrence area 6 13 ERROR MESSAGE file read error file information error unfit device device erase error device write error verify error cannot set flags MESSAGE file read error file information error unfit device device erase error device write error verify error cannot set flags 7 HARNESS WIRING DIAGRAMS Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC had 8070 6570 5570 4580 WIRING DIAGRAMS 3 MAIN SW 25103 Waite WHITE 1 Noise filter 7 1 ACWire Harness eta N WHITE gt 15 QA BLACK BROWN GREEN 115V or 120V 2 iB BLACK 4 V
276. f 1 Disabled control panel settings Note This code is effective only when 08 485 is set to 1 485 Polygonal motor rotation or All All 0 0 1 0 Rotation 1 Stop 1 stop mode When Code 485 is set to 1 the polygonal motor runs all the time When Code 485 is to 1 the polygonal motor runs according to the settings of Codes 483 and 486 486 Polygonal motor stop time All All 0 2 0 1 minute 1 3 minutes 2 5 minutes 1 Effective when 08 484 is set to 0 487 Duplexer initial alignment All 0 0 1 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 operation Correct the side skew and the paper corner folding within three copies If default 1 is selected the copying speed is a little lower than normal These new codes 487 488 are available from the 8070 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 29 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MODE DEFAULT INPUT CONTENTS DURE VALUES GROUP 488 Alignment of the system All 0 0 1 When the alignment between the FROM on the SYS 1 I ROM and the printer ROM Board and MROM on the LGC Board is wrong this code should be used for preventing operation error Note Production before March 2000 Default 0 Old version Production after April 2000 Default 1 New version 503 Exposure priority power on Copier All 0 0 1 0 Automatic exposure 1 Manual exposure 1 550 Image mode priority Copier All 0 0 2 0 Text Pho
277. fer proc ess LCF feed When the LCF is installed the LCF pick up roller remains in the lowered position The feed motor revolves in a forward direction and the LCF pick up roller LCF feed roller and LCF separation roller rotate and paper feeding is started The paper presses the paper stop switch and is aligned at the aligning rollers The feed motor stops the aligning motor turns and the paper is transported to the transfer proc ess In multicopying the next sheet is fed to the paper start switch by the feed motor and waits Forward rotation clockwise viewed from the rear Backward rotation counterclockwise viewed from the rear Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 9 17 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM B Paper separation function Since the paper cassettes do not have separation claws a pair of rollers feed roller and separation roller are used inside the machine as shown in Fig 9 3 1 The separation roller is connected to its shaft through a spring joint torque limiter The feed roller is rotated in the direction of the arrow 9 at the same timing as the pick up roller by the feed mo tor The sepatation roller is driven in the direction of the arrow 2 through the torque limiter But when there is no paper or only one sheet between the rollers the friction between the rollers or that between the sheet and the separation roller is large enough to force the separation roller in the direc tion of the arrow 6 causing sli
278. flector O 19 Lens O 20 Exposure lamp A 21 Copy area indicator C 21 1 Shading glass lt 44 17 gt 22 Automatic paper size detector C C 23 Slide sheet front rear or A 5 24 Air filter A 5 25 Case 6 26 Charger wire 400 Q QO 6 charger 340 lt 46 116 gt 27 Terminal contact C 28 Charger wire cleaner 400 340 lt 46 19 gt 29 400 340 lt 46 124 gt Around 30 Slit glass on the copier O 20 laser unit 31 Overall unit C 31 1 Duct cover C 23 Developer 32 Developer material 400 340 7 33 Front shield 5 Notes 1 Figures in parentheses indicate the inspection cycle of the 5570 2 The Remarks column indicates page and item numbers in the Parts List for consumable parts The consumable replacement cycle on the feeding system is the number of sheets fed on each feeding source 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 2 2 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC For 6570 5570 Clean at Lubricate at Repl Check Category Item to check 400 000 copies 400 000 copies Vesar 3 e 540 000 540 000 copies 1000 while Page Item 34 Oil seal 9 portions 16 35 Guide roller or A Developer 36 Duct filter Q 5 37 Toner filter 400 340 lt 48 112 gt 38 Toner hopper drive worm gear 42 Aligning roller
279. following screens will be displayed if it succeeds in serial connection Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Established serial connection with PC Target area number gt Press START key to install new firmware gt Please select target with DIGITAL keys Depress HELP and you can confirm the version number of firmware and UI data before updating to new one To return to previous screen depress HELP again Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Established serial connection with PC target version code 1 005 101 9 2 004 001 0 3 005 002 0 4 006 001 3 5 006 001 7 6 006 003 11 The number of target provides with following information Program data Fixed UI data Common UI data Ist language UI data 2nd language UI data 3rd language UI data version is displayed like XXX is major version and is minor version code provides with following information A In the case of Program data target is 1 code means the destination U for USA and Canada E for European countries X for Australia and Asian countries In the case of UI data target is 4 6 code means Language Code Language 2 Japanese 3 American English 4 English 5 reserved 6 French 7 German 8 Swedish 9 Dutch 10 Italian 11 Spanish 12 Danish 13 Finnish 14 Norwegian
280. g blade upwards Notes 1 When assembling the cleaning blade assemble so that the bosses on both side fit properly into the blade plate holes and fasten by screws 2 Do not directly touch the blade edge by hand Also do not allow hard objects to bump against the blade edge 8070 6570 5570 4580 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT TT Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC G Transfer belt drive unit 1 Remove the main unit rear cover 2 Disconnect the connector from the transfer belt motor 3 Remove the 2 screws and transfer belt drive unit H Transfer belt contact separation cam drive unit 1 Remove the main unit rear cover 2 Remove the flywheel 3 screws 3 Remove the toner transport auger unit 5 screws 4 Disconnect the harness connector for the cam motor and sensor 5 Remove the 2 screws align the cam with the holes on the copier rear frame and draw out the unit towards you I Transfer belt contact separation sensor 1 Remove the transfer belt contact separation cam drive unit 2 Disconnect the connector from each of the sen Sors 3 Remove the sensor pins from the bracket holes to remove the sensor Notes 1 When replacing the sensor pay attention to the type of sensor color coded on the PC board and its mounting direction 2 Make sure that sensor pins are firmly fit ted into the bracket holes 3 Do not forget to re connect the connec tors Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC
281. g from the left A will be the last page the book opening from the right A will be the first page Pod Adjustment value Adjustment value Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 87 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 25 Adjustment of RADF Height The adjustment screws attached to the hinge are to adjust the height of the gap between the glass and the RADF 1 Adjustment screws If they are turned counterclockwise the gap becomes narrower The adjustment screws are on the right hinge and the left hinge 2 places 2 The gap arrow A of the adjustment value is 0 0 5mm DF spacer DF spacer Original glass 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 88 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 26 Flapper Solenoid Adjustment 1 Push the flapper solenoid plunger by hand This makes the solenoid able to be pulled in electrically 2 Install BRKT SOL RVS so that the flapper rubber can contact with the flapper lever 3 Fix BRKT SOL RVS with the screw 4 With the solenoid pulled confirm that there is no gap between the flapper rubber and the flapper lever Flapper rubber Flapper lever Plunger BRKT SOL RVS 1 27 Developer powder life control switching 08 414 1 Usually select 0 Even if 0 is selected it can be found that toner scattering does not stop in special cases such as repeat printing of small quantities In this instance select 1 2 3 in steps Select 2 in the following case When 0 is selected a
282. ginals Two or more originals are fed simultaneously Have too many originals been placed Yes Reset the originals Is the original curled or folded too much No Yes Flatten and reset the original Are different size originals placed together No Yes Set only same size originals 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 8 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Is the gap between the aligning plate and feed roller too large No Yes Adjust the gap Is the separation pad dirty Yes Clean the separation pad The original is not fed up to the aligning roller Are the pick up roller and feed rollers dirty Yes Clean the rollers Is the gap between the aligning plate and feed roller too small No Yes Adjust the gap Is the transporting force of the pick up roller and feed rollers insufficient Yes Replace the rollers The original stop skewed on the original glass Is the aligning roller dirty No Yes Clean the roller Is the transport belt dirty No Yes Clean the belt Is the ADF correctly installed Properly install the ADF parallel to the main unit Make sure that the skew and height are properly adjusted Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 9 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING The side edges
283. gned original Aligning sensor ON Timing sensor ON Setting of jam pulse from start of No 1 double sided transport to aligning sensor OFF Feed motor forward rotation started Transport motor forward rotation started No output original urn guide motor forward rotation started ____ Aligning sensor OFF Jam pulse cleared Setting of jam pulse from aligning sensor OFF to timing sensor OFF Timing sensor OFF Jam pulse cleared Feed motor deceleration started Original exiting Setting of transport motor deceleration request by timing sensor OFF deceleration started after specified pulse drive No Transport motor stopped Exit completed Flapper solenoid ON switchover to reversal direction Flapper solenoid ON switchover to reversal direction Setting of jam pulse from restart of No 1 double sided transport to exit sensor ON Setting of jam pulse from timing sensor OFF to exit sensor ON Transport motor forward rotation started Turn guide motor forward rotation started gt t No Exit sensor ON Jam pulse cleared Setting of transport motor reversal motor deceleration request by exit sensor ON interrupt ransport motor and reversal motor stopped 6570 5570 ADF No 1 double sided transport END 16 28 Mar 1999
284. h mark of both scales becomes equal Notes 3 After adjusting the lens magnification be sure to adjust the deviation in the CCD primary scanning direction Procedure 1 Remove the original glass lens cover 11 screws damp heater unit and lens shield bracket 2 Screws 2 Screw in the 2 lens magnification adjustment pins into the oblong holes on the lens base Notes 4 When screwing in the pin take care not to nip the harness under the lens base Lens magnification adjustment pins Exit side Lens base Feed side 3 Loosen the 2 screws fixing lens unit 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 66 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Slide the lens unit either backwards or forwards using the scales on the scanner base as a guide The following table shows the estimated lens unit movement to adjust the reproduction ratio error be Reproduction Estimated Amount Ratio Error of Adjustment 0 1 0 5 mm 0 2 1 1 mm 0 3 1 6 mm 0 4 2 1 mm 0 5 2 6 mm 0 6 3 2 mm 0 7 3 7 mm 0 8 4 2 0 9 4 8 mm 1 0 5 3 Movement direction Large reproduction Small reproduction Scale ratio ratio Exit side lt AU gt Feed side Lens unit Notes 5 If the finer adjustment than that in the above is required refer to Polygonal motor 600 dpi PPC Adjutment 5 6 7 8 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Re attach the lens cover and original gla
285. hanism Belt transport unit simple lock mechanism Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Transfer belt support power supply mechanism High voltage transformer 6570 5570 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 11 2 Description of Operation 1 While the copier is ready the transfer belt stands by at a position separated from the photosensitive drum 2 When printing is started the transfer belt is controlled to rise and is held in contact against the photosensitive drum 8 Voltage from the high voltage transformer unit is applied to the transfer belt via the power supply roller 4 As the surface of the transfer belt is electrified by a plus voltage by dielectric polarization the paper is held in contact by static electricity and the processes of transfer separation and paper transport can be carried out continuously 5 After printing ends the transfer belt is separated from the photosensitive drum and stands by again Figure 1 shows a sectional view of the belt transport unit Transfer belt separation auxiliary roller Transfer belt power supply roller 2 Transfer belt follower roller a l Transfer belt drive roller Transfer belt cleaning brush Recovery auger Lower damp heater cover Transfer belt cleaning blade Lower damp heater Fig 1 Belt transport unit sectional view 6570 5570 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 11 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 11 3 F
286. he heater lamp turns OFF when either of the values detected by the No 1 or No 2 thermistor exceeds the temperature setting 13 Lower heat roller thermistor The thermistor detects the temperature so that the lower heat roller stays at around 115 C while the copier is standing by for printing If the lower heat roller falls below the temperature setting limit the upper and lower heat rollers are rotated at a speed of about 25 of high speed 14 Thermostat The thermostat cuts power to the heater lamps if the upper heat roller become abnormally hot as a result of thermistor malfunction for example The thermostat on this copier is for preventing abnor mal operation When the thermostat detects an abnormality the thermostat must be replaced to gether with the other damaged parts in the fuser Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 3 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 4 Heater Control Circuit 14 41 Temperature detection unit To maintain the heat roller temperature this unit detects the heat roller temperature by thermistor 1 and then performs heater lamp ON OFF control e The thermistor is an electrical element whose resistance decreases as its detected temperature increases If the thermistor is open circuited the control circuit erroneously determines that the fuser temperature is extremely low and continues to energize the heater lamp As a result the fuser tem perature rises abnormally high possibly activating the thermostat provided for safety purposes
287. he solenoid turns ON when trailing edge of the first original is passed the timing sensor II The solenoid turns ON when transport of the original is restarted after reversal of the original is stopped Ill The solenoid turns ON when transport of the second original is restarted after the first original is exited and transport of the second original is stopped on the glass Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 3 6570 5570 ADF 2 Drive motor rotates CCW Front view Front side Reverse motor Feed motor 1 Pick up roller stops 2 Feed roller stops 3 Aligning roller rotates CCW 4 Weight goes up 5 Transport belt rotates CCW 6 Exit roller rotates CCW 7 Reverse roller rotates CCW 6570 5570 ADF 16 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 3 Description of Operations 16 3 1 Description of operation 1 Setting the original Q o OR DS X Oo OOS The original is set on the tray and the empty sensor turns ON The empty sensor detects that the original is set and the original set signal is set 2 Start of feed to aligning When the feed signal is received from the copier the DF operation in progress signal is set Then the feed motor starts operating in the reverse direction the feed roller is rotated the weight plate is lowered and initial alignment is started At the same time the transport motor and reversal motor start to operate in the forward direction
288. he voltage between J11 6 and 7 on the finisher controller PC board 24V when the swing motor is ai No Replace the finisher controller PC board Yes v Is the harness connecting the motor and finisher controller PC board open or short circuited Yes Replace the harness No Y Replace the motor Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 29 2 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING CC5 Horizontal registration motor is abnormal Is the horizontal registration home position sensor 1 working normally No Replace the sensor Yes Is the harness connecting the horizontal registration home position sensor and finisher controller PC board open or short circuited Yes Replace the harness No Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal No Correct the mechanism Yes v Is the problem solved by replacing the horizontal registration motor M2P Yes END y Is the problem solved by replacing the punch motor Yes END No Is the problem solved by replacing the punch driver board Yes END No y Replace the finisher controller PC board 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 29 3 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC CC6 Punch motor is abnormal Is the punch home position sensor PISP working normally No Replace the sensor Yes Is the harness connecting the punch home position sensor PI3P and finisher controller PC board open or short circuited
289. he width guide of the Duplexer becomes slightly wider than that of other feeding operation 2mm exterior from both edges of the paper Depending on the mode the timing to switch the width guide position changes Thus make copies using always the above mode and procedure described in Supplementary of C to make precise horizontal deviation adjustment 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 72 Empty detection lever Stack frame Empty sensor Lever 4 1 sensor 7 Expanded sectionl figure of sensor and lever from the paper feed direction OK Expanded sectionl figure of sensor and lever from the paper feed direction No Good Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 15 2 Holding gate position adjustment 1 When the holding gate is removed for replacement the holding gate position must be adjusted when it is installed 1 When installing the drive gears of the holding gate match each of the drive gear positions withe the positions of the dowels on the gear Turn only the gear on the holding gate in the direction of the arrow by 2 5 teeth and install the drive gears The front side gear is installed first and the dowels on the rear side should be aligned Drive gear Drive gear Holding gate Adjusting gear Front side driving gears Rear side driving gears addition Note1 This adjustment had been performed based on the condition the rear side drive gears are ad
290. heck or replace the control board 2 Check or replace the main unit PPC board Size detection error Is the voltage measured at SIZE SNS1 TP9 5V when there is paper No Check or replace size sensor 1 Yes Is the voltage measured at SIZE SNS2 TP29 5V when there is paper No Check or replace size sensor 2 Yes Is the original slipping off the aligning roller No Check or replace the control board Yes Clean or replace the aligning roller Check and adjust the roller pressure Error of the STOP position of original s leading edge Is the voltage measured at REG SNS TP25 5V when there is paper No Check or replace the aligning sensor Yes Is the reflection mirror at the aligning sensor normal No Clean or replace the reflection mirror Yes Check or replace the control board Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 11 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 7 Other Service Calls C94 M CPU is abnormal Is the service call displayed even after the power switch on the main unit is turned OFF then ON again No Leave as it is and see what happens Yes e Check the circuit pattern between MCPU 1232 and MROM IC31 for open or short circuits Replace the LGC board if this trouble occurs frequently C99 PFC microcomputer is abnormal Is the service call displayed even after the power switch on the main unit is turned OFF then ON again No Leave a
291. herefore is prepared to take on a new charge 6570 5570 COPYING PROCESS 3 8 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 3 3 Comparison of Copying Process Conditions Process 6560 8070 6570 5570 1 Drum OD 6560 OPC drum OD 6570 OPC drum 1 Sensitivity 1 Highly sensitized drum 1 Highly sensitized drum 2 Surface potential 2 680 V grid voltage 780 V Scolotron system output variable by numerical keypad 2 650 V grid voltage 720 V Scolotron system 2 Main charger Variable grid output input 0 to 255 is set up on control panel numerical keypad 3 Exposure 1 Light control 1 Automatic exposure 11 step step light control 1 Automatic exposure 11 step LCD setting 2 Light source 2 300W halogen lamp Stabilized by regulator bright ness is fixed even if voltage changes 2 Laser scan Adjustment not needed 4 Image density control None Toner adhesion volume sensor 5 Development 1 Magnetic roller 1 One magnetic roller 1 Two magnetic rollers 2 Auto toner 2 Magnetic bridge circuit system 2 3 Toner replenishment 3 Toner hopper system 3 2 3 4 4 Toner empty detection 1 2 3 4 Density sensing system lever joint use lt 4 5 5 1 6560 T 6560E 5 T 6570 T 6570E 6 Developer material
292. hototransistor an original is determined to be present Pulse modulation is performed within the reflecting photointerruptor Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 7 17 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 8 Disassembly and Replacement A Original glass 1 Remove the 2 screws and glass holder Note During assembly feed the mylar sheet un der the original glass 2 Tilt the original glass up at an angle 1 and remove in the direction of the arrow 2 B Automatic paper size detector 1 Remove the original glass and move the car riage to the feed side 2 Remove the original width indicator unit 3 Remove the lens cover 11 screws 1 connec tor 6570 5570 SCANNER Glass fix Automatic paper size detector unit TN Automatic paper size detector unit t PW A FE J r LT series 18 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Remove the APS cover 2 screws b Remove the screw disconnect the connector and remove the harness from the 3 clamps base side Then remove the automatic paper size detector A4 series 6 pcs LT series 4 pcs C Exposure lamp 1 Move the carriage to the center 2 Remove the reflector Upper
293. ide cam C Transfer belt 1 Rotate the transfer belt support power supply mechanism inside the transfer belt unit by 90 and then draw out upwards 2 Remove the 2 fastening screws from the drive roller support bracket 6570 5570 TRANSFER TRANSPORT UNIT 11 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Rotate the drive roller in the direction of the ar row in the diagram 4 Draw Notes 1 out the transfer belt Attach the belt so that the belt travels along the center of the inside of the housing Do nottouch the belt surface directly with your hands The drive roller support bracket fasten ing screw on the front side is also used for connecting the earth lead Pay atten tion to the direction of the terminal When installing the transfer belt support power supply section onto the cleaning section take care to prevent the recov ery mylar on the cleaning section from being turned over D Transfer belt power supply roller 1 Remove the transfer belt 2 Remove the 2 stop rings on the power supply drive roller shaft 3 Remove the 2 holders and 2 springs 4 Draw out the power supply roller temporarily to the front remove the rear side shaft and re place Notes 1 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4422 the power supply roller When replacing the power supply roller take care not to scratch or leave any knock marks on the roller surface Make sure that the two
294. iginal is nipped by the reversal roller lower passage roller by specified amount or more the transport motor and the reversal motor stop 10 Start of reversal to flapper solenoid OFF Ou B Oo S After forward rotation transport is completed the transport motor starts to rotate the reverse direc tion and the reversal motor starts to rotate in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and reversal roller to start reversal of the original The original passes along the reversal path and is transported onto the original glass At the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the reversal flapper the flapper solenoid turns OFF and the reversal flapper is switched to the exit side Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 15 6570 5570 ADF 11 Setting the original at the exposure position completion of No 2 side feed o O OL x AS ZN Vo o 9 OG a The original is transported by a specified number of pulses after reversal starts At the point where the original arrives at the exposure position the transport motor and reversal motor stop and feed is completed The original is stopped in contact with the original stopper and the rear side of the original is set 12 Start of initial alignment to completion of initial alignment o BNC 2 Qo G s OOS When there is an original o
295. ignal and turns ON the developer motor M16 drum motor M12 heat roller motor M18 etc When the CRUN signal goes to the turns ON the selected tray motor M27 M28 or M29 in the CCW direction and starts to raise the tray 0 3 seconds after the CRUN signal goes to H the pedestal motor M31 is turned ON 2 When the rising tray turns ON the tray up switch S30 S34 or S38 the tray stops At this point the paper ready signal PRDY is returned to the copier LH 3 The copier outputs the RQF paper feed request signal LH 4 When the PFP receives the RQF signal it sets the PRDY signal to L BUSY and starts to feed paper b When the copier detects the PRDY signal state changing to Low it assumes that the RQF signal was received and resets RQF to Low 6 The paper is aligned initially by the PFP aligning roller and then is aligned again by the copier s aligning roller 7 When the trailing edge of the paper passes the PFP paper start switch 828 S32 or S36 the next sheet of paper is ready to be fed so the PRDY signal is set to H If subsequent paper feeding is required the copier sets the RQF signal to High This is repeated for the required number of copies Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 31 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 8 For multiple copying paper is fed so as to keep the distance between the sheets of paper constant Consequently when the previous sheet of paper is
296. imately 0 1213mm CLEAR key to reset towards the trailing edge of the paper machine 306 CCD primary scanning start position deviation All 45 0 90 When the value is increased 1 Key in the value press SET key to store or by 1 the image shifts CLEAR to key to reset approximately 0 0423mm towards the front side of the paper machine 310 Exposure lamp intensity Set to default value A 55 30 70 The exposure lamp voltage 1 Key in the value press SET key to store or increases or decreases CLEAR key to reset 0 25V step 335 0 Scanner acceleration curve setting 50 59 A 2 0 2 0 ratio 1 6 1 Acceleration ratio 2 335 1 Scanner acceleration curve setting 60 79 A 0 0 2 2 Acceleration ratio 3 6 335 2 Scanner acceleration curve setting 80 95 A 1 0 2 Adjustment corrects for blurs 6 in the leading 2 inches of the 335 3 Scanner acceleration curve setting 96 103 A 1 0 2 copy Set to the default values 6 335 4 Scanner acceleration curve setting 104 190 1 0 2 when memory has been 6 corrupted Adjust only when 335 5 Scanner acceleration curve setting 191 400 A 1 0 2 replacing the scan drive motor 6 Key in code 335 press the START key key in the Sub code then press the START key Key in the value press the SET key to store or the CELAR key to reset Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 15 8070 6570 5
297. ing Motor 7 4 1 Features Up till now 2 phase hybrid stepping motors having a step angle of 1 8 have been regarded as being the highest performing motors Compared to these motors however 5 phase stepping motors have the following features 1 A small step angle full step 0 72 half step 0 36 achieves a resolution 2 5 times that of conven tional stepping motors As 2 5 times the number of steps can be used when moving the same dis tance high speed positioning using optimum acceleration and deceleration is now possible 2 Extremely small fluctuation in operating torque achieves little vibration and smooth rotation This makes a 5 phase stepping motor ideal for applications where uneven torque and noise are a prob lem 3 As vibrations are small even at the resonant point special dampers are not required and the motor can be used in all operating ranges 4 The self start frequency is roughly 2 5 times higher than that of 2 phase stepping motors and moreo ver 5 phase stepping motors do not have a resonant range This achieves speed control with a large variable speed ratio without the need for acceleration and deceleration b Response is much faster than that of 2 phase stepping motors allowing higher speed setting 6 4 and 5 phase excitation systems achieve excellent damping characteristics 7 The step angle can be varied e g 0 72 0 36 0 18 depending on the excitation system 7 4 2 Principle of the steppi
298. ings from the frame inside and draw out the roller N Transport motor 1 Remove the 2 screws and 1 connector O Reversal unit 1 Remove the ADF unit 2 Remove the transport unit and cover 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors from PC board 4 4 Remove the earth lead fastened to the hinge section 5 Remove the screw from the harness guide 2 Kj TA EX p lt lt Ke ed a H H EC 2y J i ye RE p 7 LN OG 2 Ci ra 6 Remove the 5 screws and the reversal unit xc M SM 6570 5570 ADF 16 56 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA P Exit cover 1 Remove the reversal unit 2 Remove the screws from the front and rear sides and remove the cover Exit cover Q Reversal motor Disconnect the connector and remove the 2 screws R Reversal roller 1 Remove the reversal unit 2 Remove the stay 2 screws 3 Remove the E rings from the front side Mar 1999 TOSHIBA
299. into left and right signals and 4 channels are output in parallel Transfer block Optical energy _ 9 7500 O IN layer Detailed photosensor lt Shift register Transfer clock Fig 7 6 1 Principle of CCD Photo Voltaic Conversion 7 6 2 Shading compensation The following problems affect the voltage values obtained by photo voltaic conversion by the CCD 1 Variation in light distribution from the light source 2 Light intensities vary at the CCD elements The elements farthest from the center do not receive as much light as those elements in the center of the CCD 3 The photo voltaic capacities of each of the 7 500 CCD elements are uneven Consequently these problems must be compensated This is called shading compensation Shad ing compensation involves normalizing optical energy according to the following equation based on already known scanned black data and white data and compensating for uneven illuminance of the image data and device unevenness where k Coefficient S Image data before compensation K Black data in black memory W White data in white memory Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 13 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 7 Automatic Original Size Detection Circuit This circuit detects the original size standard sizes only using reflection type photosensors on the base frame and lens cover of the optical unit 7 7 1 Principle of original size detection The reflection type photose
300. ion C gt 0 9 Warm up PWR Test print Note Though errors are displayed when it occurs recovery is not carried out This is recovered by turning the power OFF then ON again Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 13 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 2 4 Adjustment mode 05 In this mode the following adjustment items can be corrected or changed To access this mode turn the power ON while pressing the 0 and 5 keys 05 MODE CODE ADJUSMENT MODE DEFAULT RANGE DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE 200 Automatic adjustment of the Auto toner circuit Increasing the value increases the sensor out put Output is automatically set in the range of 2 45 2 55V Refer to the complete auto toner adjustment 201 Manual adjustment of the Auto toner circuit All 128 0 255 The current value of the auto 2 toner circuit is displayed and can be manually set 203 Developer High 1 adjustment Printer 104 0 255 The developer power supply 1 Out put is NOT available for measurement output is increased when the Enter the value set in code 205 0 value is increased 205 0 Developer High 1 adjustment Copier 104 0 255 Before performing this 7 Output IS available for measurement Text adjustment refer to the Adjust by measuring the output Photo complete adjustment 205 1 Developer High 1 adjustment Copier 104 0 255 6 Out
301. ion 4 voltages 3 35V 5 1V 12V 24V are output when the machine is started up by turning the power switch ON 2 Door switch line This power supply passes via the door switch and is used by the entire ma chine during image formation voltages 45 1 V 24V 36V are output when the machine is started up by turning the power switch ON and operation of the door switches 2 locations 17 2 Operation of DC Output Circuit 1 Start When the main switch on the main unit is turned ON the power on all lines starts up if the door is closed 2 Stop When the main switch on the main unit is turned OFF the power OFF signal PWR DN signal is output after the momentary power failure guarantee time 20 ms or more passes The power voltage is dropped after the rated voltage is held for the minimum hold time 10 ms or more after the power OFF signal is output Output protection Each of the output lines has a built in overcurrent protection circuit fuse internal protection circuit and overvoltage protection This prevents trouble such as damage to the secondary circuit or errone ous operation caused by overcurrent e g shorting of the load or overvoltage e g shorting between different voltages from occurring When the protection circuit has operated remove the cause of circuit operation e g short and reset the circuit by turning the power OFF then ON again Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 17 1 6570 5570 POWER SUPPPLY Expo
302. ion ratio Primary scanning reproduction ratio Y direction Hexadecimal NNN Secondary scanning reproduction ratio X direction Hexadecimal Setting mode code 253 displays latest 8 error data Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 5 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 2 Self Diagnostic Modes This copier is a multi function copier net work printer DSS So compared with conventional copiers 1 It has more setting items in the self diagnostic mode 2 Setting items are related to each other For this reason if normal operations are continued on the control panel by 0 9 or C keys when adjustments are completed operation trouble e g machine lock may occur due to the internal structure of the program So when the self diagnostic mode in adjustments after unpacking servicing or preventative mainte nance first turn the power OFF before handing the copier over to the user nput v Clearing cade Definition method Display All LEDs lit 0 1 All LEDs on the control panel are lit and all C or PWR pixels on the LCD light and go out 0 9 Test mode 0 3 Input output signals are checked 0 9 00 C 4 PWR TEST MODE Test print 0 4 Test print 0 9 00 P 4 mode PWR TEST PRINT Adjustment 0 5 Adjustment of items 0 9 00 A 4 mode PWR TEST MODE Setting mode 0 8 System switchover and setting
303. ion roller shaft down Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Manual separation roller Spring joint Papar guide LCF separation roller LCF pick up roller Built in E ccn A one way DM LCF feed roller LCF feed roller Built in spring joint 25 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM Feed motor 1 Remove the LCF unit out and remove the manual feed tray 2 Disconnect the connector remove the 3 screws and the timing belt from the pulley to remove the motor bracket 3 Remove the feed motor 3 screws Varistor 1 Draw out the LCF unit and remove the varistor 2 screws Notes 1 When assembling attach the short lead directly to the paper guide 2 Tighten the screws securely R Manual pick up solenoid 1 Draw out the LCF unit 2 Remove the rear paper guide 1 screw 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 Feed motor 26 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Disconnect the connector take out the 2 screws and then remove the manual pick up solenoid Note When assembling fasten the screws diago nally as shown below Solenoid S Manual feed switch 1 Remove the paper guide 2 Disconnect the connector take out the screw and then remove the switch bracket 8 Release the 4 hooks from the switch bracket
304. iphery Q 89 3 GCB bush and plastic bush 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 2 6 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 8070 4580 Clean at Lubricate at Category Item to check 440 000 copies 440 000 copies Check nemar 280 000 copies 280 000 copies 1 090 while on lt Page Item gt Transfer 89 4 Transfer belt separation D belt auxiliary roller bearing and GCB 90 ADU pick up roller Q 91 ADU feed roller A 92 ADU separation belt A 93 Transport rollers 1 to 4 A ADU 94 ADU aligning roller A A 95 GCB bush and plastic bush D 96 Drive gear tooth faces W 97 Exit ADU switching gate and Main unit eixt section ADU relay roller 48 PFP pick up roller 100 lt 11 143 gt 49 feed roller 100 24 lt 11 121 gt 50 separation roller 100 514 lt 12 2 gt 51 aligning roller A PFP 52 Paper guide 53 Tray drive worm wheel and 12 gear tooth faces 54 PFP drive gear tooth faces W 55 GCB bush and plastic bush D 98 ADF pick up roller 440 280 lt 81 118 gt 99 ADF feed roller 440 280 lt 81 114 gt 100 ADF separation pad 440 280 lt P81 153 gt 101 Transport belt 440 280 lt P84 122 gt 102 ADF aligning roller ADF 103 ADF reversal roller 104 ADF empty sensor 105 ADF aligning sensor
305. is completed the duty ratio is reduced to hold actuation while heating of the solenoid is held in check Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 16 47 6570 5570 ADF 16 11 6 Open switch input circuit diagram TP17 RY1 DC24V E 1 3o o 424V 4 12 SVK i 7 A 2 CN6 7 DFSW ADF sw 8 MESA CN6 8 DFSW1 m 1 R34 2 CN5 4 DFSW1 Feed cover SW CN5 5 DFSW2 1 C37 2 CN7 1 DFSW2 Exit cover SW CN7 2 PGND PGND When all three reed switches turn ON the relay coil is excited to supply 24V power to the drive circuit The voltage of CN6 and CN7 becomes OV when all three switches are ON When one of the switches turns OFF the voltage of CN6 and CN7 becomes 24V 6570 5570 ADF 16 48 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 12 Disassembly and Replacement A Transport unit 1 Remove the 2 clips fastening the transport unit 2 Push down the top of the transport unit front side and remove the rear side from the belt drive section Note During assembly insert the clips and fix the transport unit at the position shown in the figure B Transport belt 1 Remove the transport unit 2 Loosen the screw front fastening the belt ten sion plate ge Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16
306. is completed the movement of this gate guides copy paper to the copy tray ADU inlet reversal roller This roller is for guiding the paper to the stack section from the gate During the reversal exit opera tion it guides the copy paper again to the stack section Reversal of this roller turns the paper over and guides the paper to the copy tray from the exit section BS 3 Stack section This is where paper is stacked This section is provided with guides for aligning the leading and trailing edges and left and right sides of the paper 4 Holding gate section This section functions to hold stacked paper for re feeding and to receive paper to be stacked Rotation of this gate re feeds paper while simultaneously stacking paper 5 Re feed section This feed mechanism is for guiding paper on the stack section again to the copier It comprises pick up roller feed roller separation belt aligning roller and other parts 6 Transport section This section comprises a transport roller and transport guide for guiding re fed paper to the feed section on this copier Mar 1999 O TOSHIBA TEC 15 1 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU ADU exit switching gate Exit roller ADU inlet reversal roller Holding gate Stack section Aligning roller 1
307. is controlled by the tray LCF pick up roller up switch 0 B Paper feed operation manual feed LCF feed Manual feed roller Manual feed switch Manual pick up roller Manual feed tray Al separation roller 19 Upper aligning roller Lower aligning roller LCF paper empty switch tray up switch Paper stop switch LCF paper start switch LCF feed roller LCF separation roller LCF pick up roller LCF large capacity feeder 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 16 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 1 Manual feed BS The manual feed switch detects the presence of paper in the manual feed tray The manual pick up solenoid is turned ON and the manual pick up roller is lowered The feed motor revolves in a backward direction and the manual pick up roller manual feed roller and manual separation roller rotate and paper feeding is started The manual pick up solenoid is turned OFF the manual pick up roller rises the paper presses the paper stop switch and is aligned at the aligning rollers The feed motor stops the aligning motor turns and the paper is transported to the trans
308. is copier Fig 8 3 1 Semiconductor laser Laser power comparison circuit Laser driver Constant circuit optical output Monitor output Monitor conversion Fig 8 3 2 Block diagram Fig 8 3 2 shows a block diagram of the semiconductor laser control circuit The monitor output from the semiconductor laser is controlled for each of the semiconductor lasers beforehand so that a constant voltage is maintained when the optical output is 2 5 mW After conversion the voltages are fed back to the laser power comparison circuit Here comparison of the laser power voltage set to the control circuit is carried out for every single scan As a result the laser driver circuit increases the forward current when laser power is insufficient Alternately the forward current is decreased when laser power is excessive so that the optical current is constant Likewise the bias current is controlled so that it is constant 6570 5570 PRINTING 8 8 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 4 Disassembly and Replacement A Laser light unit 1 Remove the FAX glass holder original glass and left top cover 2 Slide the carriage to the feed side and remove the 2 fastening screws on the laser unit from the panel holes 3 Remove the indicator screws and remove the scanner section lens cover after sliding the in dicator 4 Disconnect the connector on the system board side of the harness connecting the scanner logic board and system board and remo
309. it 2 Connect the digital tester as follows However that a digital tester with input resistance of 10 MQ must be used Setting range 1000 VDC terminal Connect to the rail for the main charger terminal Fix to frame earth 3 Start up the power supply using the door switch jig and then make adjustment BERT 2 Developer bias 1 Setthe developer unit 2 Connect the digital tester as follows However a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 MQ must be used Setting range 1000 VDC terminal Connect to upper magnet roller shaft on developer unit front side 2 terminal Fix to frame earth 3 Start up the power supply using the door switch jig and make adjustment ol o T Developer upper magnet roller shaft SLET AN S c i x ENSE M H terminal O Oterminal ENS YU gt 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 58 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Operation procedure Be sure to set the drum counter 08 401 to 0 when you have replaced the drum with a new one Regarding the main charger grid and developer bias output values from the high voltage trans former connect a digital tester following 1 and then make adjustment using the following proce dure Sequence of Operation Pattern 1 0 5 PWR Y Digital Keys Enter code START Display Messages 10076 A TEST MODE gt Cu
310. itch OFF YES amp NO Cassette switch ON YES ADD PAPER no longer flashing CRUN signal H NO YES Door open 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM Paper feed standby 9 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA Paper feed standby PFP tray motor CCW ON Tray rises YES tray motor OFF Tray stops YES All motors and clutches OFF ADD PAPER display Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Have 0 3 seconds passed since the copier s CRUN signal become NO Have 0 3 seconds passed since pedestal motor came ON NO YES Pedestal motor ON PRDY signal goes to H READY 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM completed CRUN L PRDY signal goes to L BUSY Paper feeding Feed clutch ON Paper feeding starts Paper feeding completed paper start Have 1 6 seconds passed since feed clutch came ON NO NO Leading edge check time over PFP paper stop switch Delay for the aligning period Feed clutch OFF Aligning clutch ON Copier s paper stop NO switch ON Leading edge YES check time over Delay for aligning period Aligning clutch OFF 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 38 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC The ON
311. ket 1 screw 4 Disconnect the 2 connectors and unscrew the screw and then remove the switch R Toner filter unit 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the 2 screws and disconnect the con nector and then remove the toner filter unit 3 Remove the 3 screws the harness from the harness clamp and then the toner filter fan Note After installing the toner filter unit make sure that the duct is properly overlapping the toner filter unit seal If there is a clearance between the duct and seals toner may be blown out and dirty the inside of the copier Developer motor SS le ISS 5 AP 2 Connector P Developer switch m ET Du a Connector IN 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 26 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC S Laser fan unit 1 Remove the cover behind the hopper 2 Screws 0 2 Remove the 3 screws and disconnect the con nector NS dU TT pa ed Km Connector 3 Remove the 2 screws and the panel cover 4 Draw out the fan
312. ks Key 1 e Total Auto toner Cleaner Main charger Exit cover 2 counter sensor connection cleaning switch 7 connection connection Disconnection switch Open a Disconnection Disconnection OFF Key counter Toner supply Toner empty 3 connection switch switch E E a z Disconnection Open OFF E Transfer belt Transfer belt 4 contact separation B Switch switch Platen ADF Scanner 5 switch connection home SW Close Disconnection OFF APS APS APS APS APS APS 6 sensor 3 sensor 2 sensor 1 sensor 6 sensor 5 sensor 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ADF size ADF size ADF empty cover ADFAPS _ ADF exit ADF timing ADF FA switch 1 switch 2 switch start SW sensor sensor aligning ON ON OFF Open ON ON ON sensor 2 8 9 0 25 10 TEST MODE Procedure 0 3 START ENERGY SAVER Digital keys LCD ON 0 9 PWR Exit Note Initialization is executed before test mode is entered 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 9 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 2 2 Output signal check test mode 03 In the 0 3 test mode the following output signal states can be checked by entering the correspond
313. l New Modem wizard And then check Don t detect my modem I will select it from a list and click Next button Install New Modem 5 3 Select Direct Connection and then click Next button Install New Modem ECP Printer Pot LPT1 5 4 Click Finish button then Virtual Modem installation is completed Install New Modem Re lt gt 5 3 2 Using Dial Up Networking Note Your computer may be already set up to use a network If Windows prompts you for a network password at startup and if Network Neighborhood icon appears Windows desktop your network is already set up In this case you can skip this section In Network dialog box click Configuration tab Confirm that Dial Up Adapter and TCP IP are displayed If your PC does not have Dial Up Adapter then click Add button Select Microsoft in Manufactures list box and select Dial Up Adapter in Network Adapters list box and then click OK button When you click OK button Windows automatically set up the TCP IP Protocol components with dial Up Adapter Select Network adapters 5 7 5 3 3 Using New Connection Double click My Computer If Dial Up Networking icon is not in the window click Add Remove Programs in Control Panel Otherwise skip to the next step to create a connection Floppy c ET
314. l stop signal At the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the reversal flapper the flapper sole noid turns OFF and the reversal flapper is switched to the exit side Setting the original at the exposure position completion of No 1 side feed OX ER R Gc ozal The original is transported by a specified number of pulses after reversal starts At the point where the original arrives at the exposure position the transport motor and reversal motor stop and feed is completed The original is stopped in contact with the original stopper and the rear side of the origi nal is set 6570 5570 ADF 16 14 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Start of feed to completion of forward rotation transport 29 5 X 287 When the feed signal is received and the DF operation in progress signal is set the reversal feed of the original that is set at the exposure position is started First of all the transport motor and reversal motor start operating in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and reversal roller At the same time the flapper solenoid turns ON to switch the reversal flapper to the reversal side and the original is transported to the reversal section After the exit sensor turns ON the original is trans ported for specified number of pulses At the point where the leading edge of the or
315. lding gate to the front and remove it Y ADU exit switching gate 1 Open the exit unit 2 Remove the spring from the arm and the screw fixing the link to the arm Note When assembling take care not to tighten the screw fixing the link to the arm too tight 3 Remove the rear clip and bush 4 Slide the ADU exit switching gate to the front and remove it 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 22A TY T E HO000 0 0 004 Jb 2004 4 Holding gate Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC b Remove the E ring arm pin and bush from the removed ADU exit switching gate and replace the gate Z Gate solenoid 1 Remove the 4 screws fixing the exit cover and then remove the exit cover 2 Remove the screw fixing the link to the gate arm 3 Disconnect the connector and remove the 2 screws fixing the gate solenoid Then remove the gate solenoid AA Reversal gate 1 Open the exit unit 2 Remove the E ring fixing the reversal gate Then remove the arm spring and bush 3 Slide the reversal gate to the rear and remove it AB Exit roller 1 Remove the exit cover 2 Remove the rear E ring and slide the bearing to the inside of the frame 3 Slide the exit roller to the rear and remove the bearing from the frame and then take out the exit roller
316. lenoid of the clutch unit is attracted armature is pushed turn the gear a limited small amount release the armature 2 Turn the gear in the direction A in the figure till the holding gate is stopped 3 When the holding gate is stopped check that B face and C or D face are roughly parallel B face flat face of holding gate C face end face of frame D face end face of frame Bypass feed unit Gear Clutch unit 1 15 3 Holding gate position adjustment 2 There are two kinds of sleeves SLEEVE P U and SLEEVE P U 80 In the case of SLEEVE P U 80 the pushing gate angle can be adjusted as described below Adjustment groove A w Assembly groove B Adjustment groove C 4406344910 4408843921 SLEEVE P U SLEEVE P U 80 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 74 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 There are 3 grooves for installing the spring to SLEEVE P U 80 If the installment position of the spring is changed then the pushing gate angle can be adjusted Adjustment groove A Assembly groove B Adjustment groove C Approx parall Adjustment Adjustment Assembly groove B groove A groove C 2 Check that the pushing gate angle is parallel to the frame Note1 At the time of shipping assembly has been performed using assembly groove B Note2 If after performing adjustment of the pushing gate position as in 1 15 2 and the angle does not become parallel then the angle should be adjust
317. ler rotates 15 2 7 ADU transport roller drive When the ADU transport clutch is turn ON the ADU transport roller rotates Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 Flapper solenoid Holding gate Feed clutch 54 Aligning EA Aligning roll Trasport clutch 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 3 Description of Operation 15 3 1 Paper stack operation ADU exit switching gate 6 ADU inlet roller Side guide d Stack section RD Empty switch Pick up roller Holding gate When the double sided copy mode is selected on the copier s control panel and the COPY button is pressed the paper side guides and paper trailing end guide on the ADU stack section move to the positions corresponding to the selected paper size by respective motor drive At the same time the ADU exit switching gate moves to the paper stack position by the gate solenoid The copied paper is fed inside the ADU inlet guide by the ADU exit switching gate During this operation the paper is detected by the reversal sensor and ADU drive motor operates the inlet roller rotates by the ADU inlet roller forward rotation clut
318. ls pressure fitted into the sealed bushes on the front and rear sides 3 Remove the transport roller 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 22 E ring Paddle bush rear side Paddle bush front side Rear paddle bush Top Cil seal Front paddle bush Bottom Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Remove the oil pressure fitted into the front side frame Note The oil seal installation follows the descrip tion in previous item H K Toner hopper unit 1 Remove the rear cover and right top cover 2 Disconnect the connector 3 Remove the 3 screws 4 Press the toner hopper unit towards the rear side to release the hooks and then lift the rear side up at an angle to remove Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 42 y 2 Connector Toner hopper unit 12 23 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT L Toner motor 1 Remove the toner hopper unit 2 Disconnect the toner motor connector 3 Remove the motor bracket 3 screws Toner motor Motor bracket 4 Remove the toner motor 2 screws Toner motor M Toner empty switch 1 Remove the toner hopper unit 2 Take out the screw disconne
319. lution ADD PAPER Indication of lack of paper e Flashes when there is no paper in the cassette A in Fig 5 2 2 e Manual copying is possible e Supply paper to the selected cas sette Select another cassette ADD TONER Indication of lack of toner in Fig 5 2 2 is indicated when the toner in the toner hopper runs out When this message is displayed it is not possible to copy Released after the toner is supplied and the toner supply cover is closed SET KEY COPY COUNTER Key copy counter withdrawn e Indicated when the key counter is withdrawn when the machine is READY or during copying C in Fig 5 2 1 When it is removed after the pressing of the START key the machine stops after that copy is completed but the counter counts it Released and returned to normal conditions by inserting the key copy counter DISPOSE OF USED TONER Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Indication of need to replace the toner bag Indicated when the toner bag is full D in Fig 5 2 2 The copier stops Open the toner bag cover and replace the toner bag Released after the toner bag is replaced and the toner bag cover is closed 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT Message Abnormal state amp indication Solution PAPER MISFEED Bypass paper jamming The machine is returned to normal IN BYPASS Indicated when paper jams at the conditions automatically by pulling the byp
320. m the front 2 Elevator mechanism The paper in the cassette is loaded on top of the tray The tray motor can raise tray so that the top sheet of paper in the tray is in the pick up position 3 Paper feed mechanism The paper feed mechanism consists of the pick up roller feed roller separation roller and aligning roller which transport the paper from the cassette to the aligning roller in the copier 4 SW Switches sensors detect whether the cassette is inserted whether there is any paper the tray height and the movement of paper on the paper feed path Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 29 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM Component names 9 4 2 Uo1As jejs Jeded ddd uoinjo Buiufije 1907 Je OJ uone1edes ddd U9IIMS 5 U91IMS dojs saded Jamo ddd SJO JOI Je OJ S PPIW ddd yoynjo yms dojs 1ieded 5 4 ddd uoinjo Burue JaddN YOUMs dojs 1eded jeddn ddd SJ9 0J BuiuBije jeddn ddd Jejo4 uone4edes Jamo ddd 19 0 1 M0 ddd YOIN D 1 JOMO dn xoid Jamo ddd J9M0 YOUMS
321. m the laser unit to prevent dust inside the laser unit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 7 6570 5570 PRINTING 8 3 Laser Diode The laser used in this copier is an AlGalnPtype semiconductor laser This laser outputs in the single horizontal mode and its oscillation wavelength is about 685 nm This semiconductor laser is powered by a 5VDC power supply and its optical output is controlled to about 2 5 mW Output of a PIN diode for monitoring light output built into the semiconductor laser is used for controlling this The semiconductor laser has the optical forward output current and monitors the current charac teristics shown in the figure on the right Emission Optical LOW mn VENTE output temperature temperature of light is started when the forward currentreaches or becomes greater than the threshold current The monitor current is disparate due to the character istics of each of the semiconductor lasers Optical output must be adjusted so that it is maintained at a constant value Also as the optical output of the semiconductor Forward current Monitor current laser drops when its temperature increases APC Current mA is also required to maintain the optical output at a Bias current constant value APC is also carried out on the bias Threshold current current when the copier is not printing to improve the optical output rise time due to the temperature characteristics of the laser used in th
322. maining copies 0 Number of remaining copies 0 YES Laser OFF Process control end Optical system control lamp ON Carriage advances e stops lamp OFF retracts Carriage stops End of optical System control Paper jam 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 4 12 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC E02 Main charger OFF Discharge lamp OFF Developer bias OFF Drum motor OFF Transfer belt motor OFF Fuser motor OFF Developer motor OFF Drum rotation reversed Standby Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 13 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 5 DISPLAY UNIT 5 1 Detailed Drawing of the Control Panel and the Display Panel The display unit consists of key switches and touch panel switches for copier operation selection of each mode LEDs and an LCD displaying the copier state or messages When the operator s attention is needed a graphic symbol lights or flashes and a message indicating that particular condition is displayed in the LCD panel FUNCTION CLEAR 000 ENERGY SAVER 9 9 7 9 PRINTER INTERRUPT m OE Arrangement of the control panel LCD panel indicating operator s attention Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 5 1 6570 5570 DISPLAY UNIT 5 2 Items Shown on the Display Panel 5 2 1 Message Display during normal copying Conditions of machine Notes WAIT WARMING UP Being warmed up Indicated aft
323. mal Correct the mechanism Yes 1 Is 24V DC being supplied to the tray lift motor M5 from the finisher controller during tray drive No Replace the finisher controller board Yes Is the wiring from the finisher controller board up to the tray lift motor M5 normal Correct the wiring Yes 1 Replace the tray lift motor M5 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 18 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Procedure 2 Is the tray arriving at the tray upper limit switch MS5 position Yes Lower the tray position No Is the tray upper limit switch 55 normal No Replace the switch Yes Is the wiring from the finisher controller board up to the tray upper limit detection switch nor mal No Correct the wiring Yes Replace the finisher controller board Procedure 3 Is the tray elevated No Is power being supplied to the motor from the finisher controller board during tray elevation No E Replace the finisher controller board Yes Is there a trouble on the tray elevation mechanism No Replace the tray lift motor M5 Yes Correct the tray elevation mechanism Yes Are tray lift motor clock sensors 1 2 PI19 PI9 normal No Replace the sensor board Yes Replace the finisher controller Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 19 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 alignment motor is abnormal Is the aligning plate home
324. me as the 1 6 image density adjustment 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 56 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 10 High Voltage Adjustment The charger and developer bias outputs must be checked and adjusted when the high voltage transformer is replaced Charger output Item Code Mode Image Mode Adjustment Method Main charger 210 0 2 PPC 720 5 Change the output by grid voltage changing the bit states 210 1 3 Text Input the BIT value of 210 0 210 2 3 Photo Ta T 212 PRINT 4 T s Developer bias output Item Code Mode Image Mode Adus Adjustment Method Developer bias 205 0 2 PPC 387 5V Change the output by value Hi1 changing the bit states 205 1 3 Text Input the BIT value of 205 0 205 2 3 Photo T 203 1 PRINT 15 Developer bias 207 4 T T value Hi2 Developer bias 216 11 ALL 452 5V Change the output by value Hi3 changing the bit states Note 1 1 2 and 3 indicate sequence of operation patterns 1 2 and 3 respectively Note 2 BIT of 4 can be changed however voltage is not output Note 3 The BIT value of 5 must be entered by the digital keys Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 57 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 Preparing for measurement 1 Main charger grid 1 Remove the developer un
325. mediately after extracting the old developer material 1 Turn over the developer unit 2 The claws on the right and left shown in figure A on the right are removed from the developer unit see arrow 1 and the duct is withdrawn towards the front see arrow 2 3 Remove the dirt and toner from the duct 4 The new duct cover is attached using the DNG procedure opposite to that in 3 At this time be careful to how you turn the harness of B The projecting area of the duct should be slid into the developer unit groove arrow 3 24 Paper feeding related rollers Refer to this illustration when servicing the paper feeding related rollers Be especially careful of the roller orientation elephant skin texture NS P Pickup roller Paper path direction F Feed roller Continuous line arrow Forward rotation S Separation roller Chain line arrow Backward rotation x 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 215 1 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 4 Periodical Maintenance Kit For 400k Layout Inside Copier Kit Components No Item Item name Q ty 1 Developer material D 6570 1 2 Main blade BL 6570D 1 3 Cleaning roller 2 SR 6570H 1 4 Cleaning roller 3 SR 6570L 1 5 Cleaning roller 1 B 6570H 1 6 Cl
326. ment is completed press the 0 and 9 keys simultaneously to go into the normal mode Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 81 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 22 5 Adjustment of magnetic catches installation Place the belt unit on the glass face and make magnetic catches adsorb to the metal plate in the state where the spacers L R and glass are in contact and then secure the belt unit with fixing screws Space between each spacer and the glass face shall be 0 5mm or less Magnetic catches Glass face Fixing screws Fixing screws Metal plate Metal plate Spacer L Spacer R 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 82 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 22 6 Adjustment of the separation area When the separation plate is attached using the thickness gage there should be a 0 6 0 2 clearance between the separation mylar and the rubber of the feed roller the difference by the side of the front and rear is 0 2mm or less Adjust the gap between the separation mylar and the feed roller in the thrust direction by sliding the bracket to right and left so that the gap becomes 0 3mm or more see the view from B Bracket p Screw Screw p b Separation _ E Feed roller 0 3 or more He 0 3 or more View from A View from B detailed drawing Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1
327. move the timing belt 8 Remove the rear stop ring and take out the pulley 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 14 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Remove the rear handle bracket 2 screws Rear handle bracket 10 Remove the 2 rear screws and take out the bearing 11 Slide the upper heat roller to remove as shown the arrow A Notes 1 Take care not to deform the lead spring en the upper thermistor i YS 2 Wind paper onto the heat roller taking roller care not to scratch the heat roller 12 Open the lower separation claw unit 2 screws 13 Open the lower inlet guide unit 2 screws 14 The cleaning roller 3 opens together with the lower inlet guide The cleaning roller 3 is at tached to the lower inlet guide unit via the spring Lower inlet guide unit Cleaning roller 3 15 Remove the lower heat roller with the bearing Note Wind paper onto the lower heat roller tak Bearing ing care not to scratch the lower heat roller Wind paper onto the lower heat roller in the same way when installing the lower heat roller Lower heat roller Paper Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 15 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT Notes Precautions during Replacement 1 Make sure on the front and rear sides that the bearing of the lower heat roller fits into the pressure lever
328. must be replaced periodically T Mixing unit When the carrier and toner are mixed friction is generated causing the carrier to have a positive charge and the toner to have a minus charge The toner adheres to the drum surface as a result of electrostatic force Supply recovery paddle This paddle supplies stirred developer material to the feed roller and recovers developer material that has been separated by the lower developer sleeve and returns it to the stirring section 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 Lower and upper developer sleeves magnetic rollers transport roller magnetic roller These parts are made of aluminum with magnets positioned inside them By using the magnetic force the developer material is attracted because the carrier is made of iron powder forming magnetic lines of force shaped like a brush Further the magnets are secured and only the sleeves around them rotate Through this rotation the magnetic brush of the lower and upper developer sleeves sweeps the surface of the photosensitive drum enabling development Leveler This regulates the amount of developer material transferred by the transport roller so that mag netic brush correctly comes into contact with the surface of the photosensitive drum 6 Separation auxiliary member This member supports the task of separating the developer material on the lower developer sleeve 7 Auto
329. n be maintained under varying environments and throughout the service life of the machine e Detects the density of the test pattern developed on the drum e Changes the image formation conditions based upon the detection results to minimize changes in density caused by changes in the operating environment 13 4 2 Principle of sensor operation e Toner adhesion amount sensor This sensor emits light onto the drum and onto the toner image test pattern developed on the drum and outputs a voltage corresponding to the reflected light intensity Toner adhesion amount The relative reflectivity is calculated from the reflected light intensity ob tained by the toner adhesion amount sensor This is referred to here as the toner adhesion amount Toner adhesion amount sensor Light source intensity signal Reflected light intensity signal gt Light emitting element Light sensing element Test pattern toner image vy ut 2 Photosensitive drum Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 13 5 6570 5570 CLEANER 13 4 3 Outline of control Start of Control Control is executed during the pre run after the power is turned ON Y 1 The reference image formation conditions are set Y 2 The sensor light source is adjusted 6 Y 3 The test pattern is exposed Y 4 The value of the toner adhesion amount sensor is read Y b The result is judged Control judges whether or not the toner adhesion amount of the test
330. n thermistors firmly contacting the heat roller Are the harness of the main and sub end section thermistors broken 2 Check the heater lamp and SSR s the heater lamp open circuited s the heater lamp connector disconnected Is the thermostat blown Is the SSR connector disconnected Are the SSR and switching power supplies damaged 3 Check the LGC board Is connector J326 disconnected Check the circuits for open or short circuits or other troubles Replace the LGC board 4 Reset the status counter Carry out the following after you have repaired the location where error C41 occurred Turn the power ON while pressing the 0 and 8 keys simultaneously Enter 400 from the number key pad and press the START key Overwrite currently displayed status counter 1 or 2 to 0 and press the SET or INTERRUPT key to exit error C41 Turn the power OFF then back ON and check the machine enters a normal standby state 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 4 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC C43 Thermistor abnormal during warming up or at standby after disconnection judgement C44 Heater abnormal during warming up or at standby after disconnection judgement Carry out the same checks 1 to 3 in error C41 4 Reset the status counter The status counter for error C43 indicates 4 or 6 and 5 7 or 9 for error C44 Reset these counters to 0 by following the same procedure for error C41 C45 Uppe
331. n the rear frame E Aligning motor 1 Remove the flywheel 2 Remove the waste toner transport pipe unit 3 Remove the motor bracket 3 screws Note When installing motor bracket Make sure tat the motor bracket is fastened properly matching the embossed sections for posi tioning shown in the figure on the right 4 When replacing the motor loosen the 2 set Screws remove the flange and pulley and then the 3 screws Note When assembling align the cut surface of the pulley with the one of the shaft Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Embossed section Motor bracket for positioning Set screw og 7 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM F Paper stop switch 1 Remove the aligning unit 2 Remove the 2 screws and the bracket fixing the paper stop switch 3 Disconnect the connector remove the two hooks and then the paper stop switch Note When installing the switch bracket install the switch bracket so that the positional re lationship between the actuator and switch is as shown in the figure on the right G Aligning unit 1 Disconnect the connector on the rear side 2 Remove the developer and the cleaner draw out the belt transport unit and then remove the pin bracket 1 screw 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM Aligning unit frame Actuator N S
332. n the tray at the point when feed is completed the initial alignment signal is set and initial alignment of the next original is started The same processes as 2 and 3 are carried out initial alignment of the next original is completed and the original stands by When initial alignment is carried out on the 2nd original onwards the dummy exit operation is not carried out If there is no original on the tray operation from 21 is started 13 Start of feed to aligning sensor OFF When the feed signal is received the feed motor transport motor and reversal motor start to operate in the forward direction to rotate the aligning roller transport belt and reversal roller Feed of the original standing by at the initial alignment position and exit of the original set at the exposure posi tion are carried out simultaneously In the same way as 4 the original size is detected at the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the aligning sensor 6570 5570 ADF 16 16 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 14 Aligning sensor OFF to timing sensor OFF The feed motor stops at the point when the timing sensor turns OFF When the 2nd original onwards is being fed exit of exposed originals is carried out at the same time and the original being fed must be made to stand by before the reversal section until exit is completed For this reason the number of drive pulses up to feed motor stop is set
333. nal glass is transported to the exit section At the point when the exit sensor turns ON the number of drive pulses up to start of exit deceleration is set At the point when the number of pulses is counted up decelera tion of the transport motor and reversal motor is started and the original is output at low speed At the point when all originals in the DF have been output the transport motor and reversal motor stop exit is completed the DF operation in progress signal is reset and feed operation is completed During step feed 2 originals are output continuously 6570 5570 ADF 16 10 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 3 2 Double sided feed operation 1 Setting the original Ke Ga The original is set on the tray the empty sensor turns ON setting of the original is detected and the original set signal is set 2 Start of feed to aligning When the feed signal is received from the copier the DF operation in progress signal is set Then the feed motor rotates in the reverse direction to rotate the feed roller lower the weight plate and start initial alignment operation After the aligning sensor turns ON and the leading edge of the original is detected the original is transported for a specified number of pulses and the leading edge of the original arrives and is aligned at the aligning roller The feed motor then stops At the same time the transport moto
334. nd toner scattering soils the image after 200 000 to 300 000 copies 1 is an intermediate stage between 0 and 2 whereas 3 is above this However in low humidity conditions 2 and 3 can reduce the image density When the new ROM is applied If toner scattering occurs on the market as a countermeasure manu ally return the machines which have had 10 bits reduced to their previous status by the following method T New ROM PRA 300M 10 PRA 302M 04 PRA 304M 02 Adjustment Method 1 Write the value of 08 404 2 With the UP key in 05 200 raise the current control bit value by 10 bits 3 Press the setting key 4 n 04 404 once again input the written value 1 using the digital keys Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 89 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 27 Additional Parts when Installing the Paper Exit Tray To ensure perfomance of exiting paper under all conditions the parts used in the copier exit area for the installation of the exit tray and the finisher differ as follows Installation Method 1 Remove the lower exit cover 4 screws Exit cover 2 Remove the rear E ring and slide the bearing to the inside of the frame 3 Slide the exit roller to the rear and the bearing to the inside of the frame and remove the exit roller while pulling out the exit roller rear side
335. ne 3 In order to set the distance A to 200 mm 0 5 mm use following steps to make the adjustment D gt 488 gt START gt Set the value gt SET or INT 1 gt E S gt 1 An increase in the value makes the reproduction scale distance A longer in increments of 0 25mm step Notes 1 Before making a test print make sure that 100 A is appeared on the top of the message display after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test print 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range 1 to 255 The default adjustment value is 128 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Print movement direction 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 42 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC d Laser write start position secondary scanning Adjustment Order Code Paper size LCF 443 A4 LT middle lower 444 A3 LD Manual feed 442 A3 LD lt Procedure gt Follow the procedure below to make a test print 1 0 5 PWR ON gt 1 gt E S gt 1 Digital keys 2 Measure the distance B the distance from the edge of the test print paper to the 6th line 3 In order to set the distance B to 52 mm 0 5 mm use the following steps 7 gt Code START gt Set the value gt SET INT gt 1 gt E S gt 1 An increase in the value makes the blank space distance B shorter in increments of 0 5 mm STEP
336. ng Feed motor M32 Aligning clutch Manual feed separation roller Aligning roller Manual pick up roller ADU motor Manual feed roller Feed clutch LCF feed roller Separation belt Aligning rollers Feed roller Aligning motor M17 Paper transport roller 1 Slot exhaust fan M23 Paper transport roller 2 Exit fan M19 Paper transport roller 3 Heater fan M20 Paper transport roller 4 Reversal fan M27 Upper heat roller pulley Duct in fan M22 Fuser drive belt Developer fan M23 6570 5570 OUTLINE Heat roller motor M18 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC D Sectional View of Automatic Document Feeder Bulpjoy jeg J9 9 JOSUAS ezig oq uodsuejJ Josuas 8216 Bulpjoy jeg 10595 BuiuDi y Jadde 4 5 uedo U9IIMS J9AOO pss YOUMS J9AOO JejoJ doup eg ped Josuas JejoJ eAup Josues Jo oJ esJo eH JoJo 4 Jang JOSUSS 19 0JI0J Jej oJ A o N o U9IIMS Josues Jej oJ dn Xoid Ex X EI 2 Papa
337. ng Gear PFP paper stop switch upper and middle 1 Remove the pre separation roller guide See Fig C 2 Take off the 2 E rings gear pin and bushing at the rear of the separation roller shaft 3 Pull out the separation roller with its shaft to ward the front Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 aligning roller metallic roller Rubber roller Spring E ring and bushing aligning roller rubber roller Stay guide fixing screws 51 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 4 Take out the 4 screws each at the front rear and remove the stay guide Note When removing the stay guide pay atten tion to the harness fastening the guide 5 Take out the screw disconnect the connector and then remove the PFP paper stop switch H PFP paper start switch upper middle and lower 1 Remove the stay guide 2 Disconnect the connector take out the 2 screws and then remove the switch bracket 3 Release the 4 hooks from the bracket and then remove the PFP paper start switch I PFP tray up switch PFP paper empty switch PWA F PEM 700 upper middle and lower 1 Remove the PFP feed unit 2 Take out the E ring and bushing then slide the PFP pick up roller unit in the direction of arrow A extract the bushing take off the timing belt from the pulley and then remove the PFP pick up r
338. ng copy tend to worsen Pressurizing spring Spacers 1 Procedure 3 Carry out both 1 and 2 gt Carry this out when procedure 2 does not produce the desired result Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 77 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 21 Adjusting the Fuser Inlet Guide Check the gap between the inlet guide and the lower heat roller when the following troubles occur Stain on the back side of the paper Fuser inlet jam Wrinkled paper 1 Move the screw fixing position to the oblong hole to make adjustment using the stamped mark as a guide 2 Adjust the gap between the inlet guide and the lower heat roller 0 4 lt gap lt 1 7 Inlet guide Inlet guide Lower heat roller 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 78 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 22 Adjustment of ADF 1 221 Adjustment of skew with ADF 1 Check that the right hinge is installed as shown below figure Note Fix the screw on the center of scale RIGHT HINGE 2 Place the test original face up in the tray press PRINT to make a copy Check that the copy isn t skew 3 If there is a skew loosen the two screws on right left hinges and adjust the position of RIGHT HINGE Repeat the procedure until the skew is rectified Note After the adjustment tighten the two screws of LEFT and RIGHT HINGE without fail Image Inclination
339. ng motor The fundamental differences between a 2 phase hybrid stepping motor and a 5 phase stepping motor are the number of stator main poles and the winding configuration A 2 phase stepping motor is wound in a 2 phase 4 pole configuration whereas a 5 phase stepping motor is wound in a 5 phase 2 pole con figuration Fig 7 4 1 shows the relationship between stator and rotor teeth in a 5 phase stepping motor and the winding configuration Stator A phase blue B phase white o C phase brown ds D phase black E phase orange Fig 7 4 1 Structure of 5 phase Stepping Motor 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC The stator comprises 10 main poles with two main poles apposition forming a single phase The coil is wound so that the two opposite main poles are the same polarity N or S Assuming a rotor tooth pitch of Tr the stator teeth are arranged in such a way that the stator teeth on adjacent main poles shift by 0 6 with respect to the rotor teeth This means that the stator teeth on adjacent main poles shift by 0 6 0 5 Tr Tr 10 with respect to teeth on the rotor cup on the opposite side that are shifted by 0 5 Tr Fig 7 4 2 illustrates this relationship Stator Fig 7 4 2 Relationship between Stator Teeth and Rotor Teeth Consequently if the polarity of the stator is moved as shown in Fig 7 4 3 the rotor rotates clockwise 1 10th of the rotor tooth pitch at a time
340. ning sensor accumulation jam 1 Up to aligning sensor OFF after start of transport from the initial alignment position in the one sided and double sided modes The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the aligning sensor to the trailing edge of the original when the longest original LD is standing by at the initial alignment position is set as the jam pulse This is set when transport from the initial alignment position is started 4 Timing sensor accumulation jam 1 Up to timing sensor OFF from aligning sensor OFF The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the aligning OFF position to the timing sensor OFF position is set as the jam pulse 16 5 2 Transport section jams 1 Turn guide sensor non arrival jam 1 From timing sensor OFF to exit sensor ON when making the first copy in all modes The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the leading edge position of the original at the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the timing sensor to the exit sensor ON position when the shortest original personal check has been fed is set as the jam pulse This is set at the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the timing sensor when the first copy is made From exit sensor OFF for the output original to exit sensor ON for the next original in the one sided mode The number of pulses equivalent to twice the interval between originals when the shortest
341. nnect it Yes 1 Is the connector between the sensor and the stitcher open circuited No Connect it Yes 1 Is DC5V from J9 10 of the saddle stitcher controller board supplied No _ Replace the sabble stitcher controller board Yes 1 Is J9 11 of the saddle stitcher controller board correctly connected to the ground No Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Yes 1 END 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 26 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA Procedure 3 Is the connector of the paper pressing top position 156 or the saddle stitcher controller board con nected No Connect it Yes Is the connection between the sensor and the saddle stitcher disconnected No Connect it Yes y Is DC5V from J9 13 of the saddle stitcher controller board supplied No Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Yes y Is J9 14 on the saddle stitcher controller board correctly connected to the ground No Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Yes y END CC1 Microswitch error Procedure 1 Check the switch actuator in the entrance door Are the switch and the sensor being moved correctly No Correct mechanism Yes Y Check the entrance door switch Is the switch normal No Replace the switch Yes y Measure J10 8 voltage on the saddle stitcher controller board when the entrance door is open Is there 5V being supplied Yes The sen
342. normal C16 PFP middle tray is abnormal C17 PFP lower tray is abnormal C18 LCF tray is abnormal Scanner system related service call C26 Peak detection error C27 Home switch does not turn OFF within a fixed time Carriage initialization error C28 Home switch does not turn ON within a fixed time Carriage initialization error C29 Exposure lamp disconnection detected Process system related service C36 Main charger wire cleaning operation abnormal call 1 C37 Transfer belt operation abnormal Process system related service CD1 Brush motor lock error call 2 CD2 Auger motor lock error Fuser related service call C41 Thermistor abnormal or heater disconnection at power ON C43 Thermistor abnormal during warming up or at standby after disconnection judgement C44 Heater abnormal during warming up or at standby after disconnection judgement C45 Upper heat roller end thermistor abnormal C46 Lower heat roller thermistor abnormal at standby 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 2 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC Error code Machine status Communication related service call C56 Communication error between PFC and M CPU C57 Communication error between M CPU and IPC C58 Communication error between IPC and the finisher C59 Communication error between M CPU and L CPU System communications related F07 Communication error between SYS and LGC boards service call F11 Communication
343. ns CHECK THE FROM version on the SYS board Check the MROM IC36 version on the LGC board Check the SROM version on the SLG board Replace the SYS board Replace the SLG board Replace the LGC board 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 6 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA 4 5 ADF Related Service Call C72 Error of aligning sensor adjustment 1 9 o Check between the aligning sensor and the reflection mirror for foreign objects and the reflec tion mirror for dirt Check the harness between the aligning sensor and the LGC board for open circuit Check mainly IC4 IC5 and CN6 on the LGC board for open or short circuits Replace the aligning sensor Replace the LGC board Initialize the ADF EEPROM and perform automatic sensor adjustment C73 EEPROM initializing error 1 2 3 Check mainly IC1 on the LGC board for open or short circuits Replace the LGC board Initialize the ADF EEPROM and perform automatic sensor adjustment C74 Error of exit sensor adjustment 1 9 o Check between the exit sensor and the reflection mirror for foreign objects and the reflection mirror for dirt Check the harness between the exit sensor and the LGC board for open circuit Check mainly IC4 IC5 and CN7 on the LGC board for open or short circuits Replace the exit sensor Replace the LGC board Initialize the ADF EEPROM and perform automatic sensor adjustment C76
344. ns Photo the copy at the automatic 514 Automatic exposure fine adjustment Copier 128 0 255 exposure setting Text Photo 515 Automatic exposure fine adjustment Copier 128 0 255 Text Key in the value press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset 580 Image mode automatic gamma adjustment for Copier None None Automatically corrects the 5 error diffusion The TEST PRINT must be on image quality after reading the the exposure glass or ERROR will occur test print pattern Before performing this adjustment refer to the complete adjustment 593 Image mode gamma data slope correction Copier 0 0 9 Increasing the value darkens 1 Data adjustment for gamma correction Text Photo the image 0 Default value is the 594 mode gamma data slope correction Copier 0 0 9 center value 5 Data adjustment for gamma correction Photo Same as set value 5 1 9 Slope correction the 595 Image mode gamma data slope correction Copier 0 0 9 higher the value the Data adjustment for gamma correction Text darker the image becomes Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 21 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 05 MODE CODE ADJUSMENT MODE DEFAULT RANGE PROCEDURE DESCRIPTION GROUP 620 Pass Filter strength setting Normally set it to 1 this places the filtering in the optimum range for the Text Photo mode Copier Text Photo 1 1 Right digi
345. nsors are located on the base frame and lens cover of the optical unit Each photosensor comprises an infrared light emitting diode LED light emitting side and a phototransistor light receiving side When an original is placed on the original glass the light emitted by the LEDs is reflected by the original and led to the phototransistor In this way the presence or absence of an original is detected by whether reflected light exists or not A4 Series LT Series Original Original glass Original Original glass C95 wes C95 wes Fig 7 7 1 7 7 2 Original size detection 1 If the copier is set in the original size detection mode the carriage is set at its home position 2 Detection is performed in an instant when the platen cover is opened each sensor receive the reflecting light and the condition of a matrix shown in 4 are satisfied 3 Original size detection is performed when the output signals from each sensor are input to the S CPU IC7 on the scanner control PC board 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 14 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC A4 Series LT Series a a E 5 EE i APS 3 ST R i ST R APS 1 APS 4 ST LT R LG ST LT R LG qs LT LD LT LD Fig 7 7 3 Sensor Detection Points Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 7 15 6570 5570 SCANNER 4 Original size is determined by a combination of the presence absence of the origin
346. nt of machine Top of printed page LT A4 increases the void by or left side edge of ST R A5 R LT R A4 R approximately 0 04233mm Legal B4 and Ledger A3 v438 Printed page trailing edge void adjustment Printer 0 0 255 Increasing the value by increases the void by approxi mately 0 04233mm 442 Bypass registration adjustment Image on the All 8 0 15 ncreasing the value by drum to the paper s leading edge shifts the image on the paper by approximately 0 5mm towards the paper s leading edge Increasing the value makes the paper arrive later 443 LCC registration adjustment Image on the All 15 0 40 Increasing the value by 1 1 drum to the paper s leading edge shifts the image on the paper Test copy available while in the 05 Mode by approximately 0 5mm towards the papers leading edge Increasing the value makes the paper arrive later Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 17 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 05 MODE CODE ADJUSMENT MODE RANGE DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE 9444 PFP registration adjustment Image on the All 8 0 15 Increasing the value by 1 1 drum to the paper s leading edge shifts the image on the paper Test copy available while in the 05 mode by approximately 0 5mm towards the papers leading edge Increasing the value makes the paper ar
347. nt started it le Initial alignment completed Exit completed lt RETURN Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 33 6570 5570 ADF Charts A4 3 sheets one sided mode iming 16 8 T 16 8 1 pee eui 10 Sd eui YNM SJUSJSLJIP euin eunsodx3 evi 801 Eur A TB ua 01 __ 260 OL ejnsodx3 euin ejnsodx3 euin eunsodx3 gt 0 800 Sv O 160 6 0 Ic Oo 020 a 0 ec 0 0 000 Let 6071 920 860 2720 0 920 iJ TG Eds e ________ E En e 0 690 660 0 760 990 220 0 8z 0 o _ 9207 o 280 790 ___ 0 090 PEL LeO 0 60 0 6201 670 620 0 zT 90 0 620 0 80 NO 440 NO 440 440 NO 440 NO 440 NO 440 MO 440 MO Josues Josuas Josues Josues JOJOW 9SJ9A9H JOJOUI Yodsuel poo G34 34d dlS 9uO 1ov 4d 1no 9HO NI DHO Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 34 6570 5570 ADF 2 sheets one sided mode 16 8 2 85 440 euin eunsodx3 gt veo eui 10 ed eui YNM sjueJejlip SUN eunsodx3 euin eynsodx3 NO Wu NO 440 690 690 970 0 460 0 460 bro 440 NO 440 NO 440
348. nverts image signals to density range width and corrects it to match each original document s image When copying the images of an original having a certain amount of background such as appear in newspapers it reduces the background density lt Example gt 1 Dynamic range width Extended dynamic range width gt gt 8 After range 8 correction i Ls 9 ground i 2 a 5 5 2 8 Y Y 5 5 3 3 E E 2 Density gt e Density gt Lower Higher Lower Higher Histogram 6570 5570 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA B Filtering This function is comprised of a low pass filter circuit and a high pass filter circuit a Low pass filter circuit This circuit eliminates image and electrical noise as well as restrict Moire It provides an image that closely resembles the original document s It does this by averaging the differences between the targeted pixel and those adjacent to it For example assuming the density of the target pixel position to be x and the densities of its front and back positions to be a and b respectively the density of the target pixel position x after low pass filter operation is given For 3 x 1 matrix The above operation is performed for all pixel positions to accomplish high original reproducibil ity The following figure shows the primary scanning pixel is processed by the low pass filter Density Density After low pass filter operation 01234
349. o be fed Only the top paper is fed through The principle of co efficient of friction is what allows the top sheet of paper to be fed and not the lower sheet The following explains the switches for detecting paper presence height of the tray and paper feed ing position to control the respective rollers ON and OFF 4 Manual feed switch Detects if paper is set in the manual feed tray If so manual paper feeding takes priority over cassette paper feeding 5 Paper empty switch This photointerruptor sensor detects paper in the LCF If there is paper in the LCF the actuator is lifted by the paper and the sensor detects the presence of paper 6 Tray up switch When the tray is lifted to allow the paper set in the LCF to contact with the LCF pick up roller the tray up switch detects the height of the tray 7 Paper feed switch Detects the leading trailing edge of paper passing through the feed roller The switch is also used for paper jam detection Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 11 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 3 2 Construction and drive mechanism 1 Tray section P up switch LCF paper empty switch LCF feed roller ere LCF pick up roller o o LCF separation roller Elevator wire Elevator tray Wire fixing stay Wire takeup pulley Tray bottom switch Elevator tray _ Guide pulley Elevator wire front side gt Rise rotation direction Side pulley forward direction 6
350. o section 3 5 Checking and Cleaning Upper and Lower Heater Rollers Heat roller separation claw If the tip of the separation claw is chipped replace it regardless of the number of copies made so far If toner adhering to the separation claw is forcibly scraped off the claw may be damaged Therefore replace the claw if its tip is heavily coated with toner 10 Heat roller cleaning roller 1 2 3 4 Refer to section 3 4 Checking and Replacing Heat roller cleaning roller 1 2 3 4 11 Aligning unit support bush and pressurizing leaf spring White Molycoat on inner surface of bush Apply one drop White Molycoat on surface of pressurizing leaf spring Apply one drop Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 11 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 12 Apply white grease to the tray drive worm wheel and to the faces of the gear teeth 13 Used toner transport auger drive section Apply white grease to the used toner transport auger drive section shown by arrow 14 PFP LCF manual separation rollers Apply Alvania No 2 to the separation roller boss Apply Alvania No 2 one large drop each to the 3 grooves of the metal boss Separation roller Arbor cover spring 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 2 12 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 15 LCF drive unit 16 Oil seal Mixer shaft
351. ocated to the vertical position e f the belt transport unit is not completely inserted into the copier the handle cannot be rotated from the horizontal position Lower damp heater for preventing condensation The damp heater is located under the transfer belt and is powered when the main power switch is turned OFF Standard accessories TWD SAD ASD AUD Options Other than the above 10 Transfer belt drive unit Drive is transferred from the transfer belt motor travels via the timing belt and the relay gears and is transmitted to the transfer belt drive gear to rotate the drive roller Drive is transmitted to the belt transport unit via a gear having a planetary joint 11 Transfer belt contact release mechanism This mechanism has a function for separating the transfer belt from the drum when a jam occurs and a function for bringing the transfer belt into contact with the photosensitive drum when copying is started e Rotation of the cam by drive transmitted by gear from the cam motor moves the lever on the rear side inside the transfer belt up and down e The transfer belt is brought into contact with and separated from the photosensitive drum by vertically operating this lever The cam phases are controlled by two sensors 12 Belt transport unit simple lock mechanism When the belt transport unit is inserted into the copier this mechanism simply holds the belt trans port unit before it is locked by rotation of th
352. of the original are out of alignment with the side edges of the copy Is the slide set Yes No too wide in relation to the width of the original Move the slide so that its matches the width of the original Move the original feeding tray to the left or right to adjust The ADF does not work excluding paper jams open cover Is the interface harness correctly connected No Yes Re connect the harness Is 24V DC being supplied to CN2 No Yes y Check the main unit Is the voltage across TP26 and TP43 5V DC No Yes y Check or replace the control board Is the voltage measured at EMP SNS TP30 5V when there is no paper No Yes y Check or replace the empty sensor Check or replace the control board Motor error Is a normal loa d placed on the motor shaft No Yes Reduce the mechanical load on the motor by adjusting the drive system Remove foreign objects Is voltage being supplied to the motor connector No Yes y Is an excitation Check or replace the control board pattern signal being supplied to the motor connector No Yes Check or replace the control board Check or replace the motor 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 10 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA Communications error Is the interface cable normal No Replace the interface cable Yes 1 C
353. of the original to be fed is completed the original is drawn out and output as it is If the output original has not been nipped by the specified amount or more the original is not drawn out and output In this case output of this original is carried out when the next original is fed 10 Start of exit deceleration At the point when the number of drive pulses up to start of exit deceleration set in 9 has been counted deceleration of the reversal motor is started and the original is output at low speed 11 Turn guide sensor OFF o TENG IS Qa OOS At the point when the exit sensor turns OFF the number of pulses up to reversal motor stop is set Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 16 9 6570 5570 ADF 12 Completion of exit o NG 5 060 At the point when the original is completely output onto the exit tray the reversal motor stops and exit is completed 13 Start of exit of final original to completion of exit Ke D C 5 5 JG When the exit signal is received during exit of the final original the DF operation in progress signal is set Then the transport motor and reversal motor start to operate in the forward direction the trans port belt and reversal roller rotate to start exit operation and the original on the origi
354. og signals to Digital signals 4 Shading correction Corrections made by the shading compensation circuit to make up for distortions of images produced by the mirrors and the elements of the CCD See Chapter 7 6 2 6 6 Printer Image signals processed by the PLG board perform the laser writing operation through the writing con trol ASIC and the laser drive board processings 1 Setting of effective image area e The top bottom left and right margins are set 2 Synchronization Clock Generation block HSYNC and the reference clock signal at printer of horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC block synchronized with the signal 3 Laser drive ON OFF control of the semiconductor laser and DAPC Double Auto Power Control control Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 9 6570 5570 IMAGE PROCESSING 7 SCANNER 7 1 Functions During a scanning process light is directed at the surface of the original document and then to the CCD via mirrors and the CCD lens and a slit The CCD unit in which optical image data are converted to electrical signals accomplishes photovoltaic conversion The resultant analog signals undergo A D con version which ultimately become digital signals These signals undergo compensation processes in order to produce the required image Digital signals are then sent to the printer section of image process ing Exposure lamp CCD
355. ol PC board PWA F SDV 300 Drives the scanning motor scanning motor drive PC board PWA F PLG 300 PLG PC board Controls the laser unit M A DRV POL 300 Drives the polygon mirror motor polygon mirror motor drive PC board PWA F SNS 300 sensor PC board Detects the beam position K PWA F LDR 300 laser PC board Drives the laser PWA F SYS 300 system PC board Whole system control and data processing 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 28 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Symbol Name Function Remarks MTB PWA F MTB 300 mother board Option board connecting HDD Hard disk HDD Stores image data LAN or SCSI LAN printer board or SCSI board Printer Option NIC NIC board Network interface card Option for LAN printer board ADU PWA F ADU 300 ADU PC board Controls the ADU MOT PWA F MOT 300 motor control PC board Drives the drum and transport belt LGC PWA F LGC 300 logic PC board Controls the entire copier LCF PWA F LCF 150 LCF PC board Displays LCF tray scan key and tray operations IPC Finisher interface board 8 Transformers Name Finisher interface board Function Remarks PS HVT DB 300 developer bias power supply Generates high voltage for the developer bias 9 Other PS HVT TM 300 high voltage power supply for main charger and transfer belt Name Develops high
356. ol section Original feeding tray Transport section Original receiving tray Exit Reverse section Jam release cover Feeding section Document feeder unit consists of feeding section includes the original feeding tray transport section reverse includes exit section and control section Mechanical part Electrical part Feeding section Jam release cover ADF pick up roller ADF feed roller ADF separation pad ADF aligning roller ADF feed motor ADF aligning sensor ADF timing sensor ADF empty sensor ADF size sensor ADF feed cover switch Transport section Belt drive roller Transport belt Belt retainer roller ADF transport motor ADF open switch ADF fan motor Reverse section Jam release cover ADF reverse roller ADF reverse flapper ADF exit roller ADF reverse motor ADF reverse solenoide Exit sensor ADF exit cover sensor Control section 6570 5570 ADF PC board Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 2 2 Drive mechanism 1 Drive motor rotates CW Front view Front side REN 22 Reverse motor Feed motor Free 1 Pick up roller rotates CCW 2 Feed roller rotates CCW 3 Aligning roller stops 4 Weight goes down 5 Transport belt rotates CW 6 Exit roller rotates CW 7 Reverse roller rotates CW Flapper goes up at the duplexing mode and the following conditions I T
357. olding it Note Before you draw out the laser unit make sure that the connectors in step 10 are dis connected Notes 1 Temporarily place the laser unit that you removed with the motor side facing up so that the laser unit is not subjected to a load 2 Take care not to dirty the slit glass of the laser unit with fingerprints or other marks 6570 5570 PRINTING 8 Connector Ln T T eee ITF Uy I T EF x Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC PLG board 1 Disconnect the 4 connectors at section A WH PLG GLV and section B WH PLG LDR1 to 4 300 2 Turn the laser unit over to its motor side re move the fixing screw on the PLG board and disconnect the connectors at section C WH PLG SNS1 300 and section D WH PLG POL Note During this operation prevent the connec tor at section A from becoming disconnected
358. olding the clutch O Pedestal motor 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the connector and then remove the 2 screws P Cassette switch upper middle and lower 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Unhook the 2 switch claws from the cassette rail disconnect the connector and then remove the cassette switch Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 gt PC board A ect n M Feed clutch Spring Aligning clutch Pedestal motor Cassette switch connector 55 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM PFP drive unit 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the harness from the 2 harness clamps and then the bracket 2 screws 3 Remove the board 2 screws and 1 locking support 4 Remove the spring from the waste toner trans port pipe 5 Disconnect the feed clutch aligning clutch and cassette switch connectors 9 connectors 6 Disconnect the pedestal motor connector 7 Remove the harness from the 3 harness clamps 8 Remove the 8 screws and draw out the PFP drive unit towards you to remove 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 56 Spring Aligning clutch Pedestal motor Cassette switch connector Mar 1999 TOSHIBA
359. oller unit 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM Stay guide ef zi a m m PFP paper stop switch PFP paper start switch s A Connector PFP paper start switch Timing belt Bushing PFP pick up roller unit nl Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 3 Remove the switch cover 1 screw 4 Take out the screw disconnect the connector and then remove PWA F PEM 700 Note When installing the PFP pick up roller unit remember to fit the spring in position J PFP upper aligning unit 1 Pull out the LCF unit 2 Remove the 2 screws and pull the PFP upper 6 7 aligning unit out to the paper feed side Ih n 1L re T Ne dU e i HIN LI eR 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM Mar 1999 TOSHIBA upper aligning roller metallic roller 1 Remove the PFP upper aligning unit 2 Remove the 3 E rings gear pin collar and bush 3 Remove th
360. ome ON after 1 144 seconds have elapsed Exit switch Jor i i The CLEAR PAPER symbol E01 appears Timer and copying will stop 0 1 144sec CLEAR PAPER E01 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 7 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION Trailing edge jam detection by the exit switch Aligning motor E02 The aligning motor goes OFF Exit switen ON 1 132 The exit switch goes OFF detects paper exit OFF Timer When the exit switch does not go OFF even ique after 1 132 seconds The CLEAR PAPER symbol appears E02 and CLEAR PAPER E02 copying stops Immediately after power ON The exit switch is detecting paper ON CLEAR PAPER E03 e f the front cover is opened during copying CLEAR PAPER E41 Leading edge jam detection by the paper stop switch in front of the aligning roller E31 36 After the leading edge of the paper passes the transport rollers if the paper stop switch 1 is not turned ON within a fixed time 4 Paper misfeeding E31 36 During paper feeding from the ADU After the feed clutch is turned ON if the paper stop switch 816 does not come ON within a fixed time 4 Paper misfeeding E53 During paper stacking in the ADU If the ADU jam switch does not detect any paper at the fixed timing Paper misfeeding E50 During paper feeding from the copier and the pedestal After the feed clutch is turned ON if paper stop switch does not come ON within a
361. on the belt tensioner 2 Remove the motor connector and 2 motor fix ing screws Note During assembly be sure to fasten the belt tensioner last of all Jam release cover 1 Remove the feed unit 2 Remove the jam release cover by removing the 2 screws front and rear sides Note Toassemble be sure to insert spring wash ers to fasten the jam release cover Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 Front side Rear side Feed unit Jam release cover 53 6570 5570 ADF Separation unit 1 Open the jam release cover 2 Remove the 2 screws and leaf spring then re move the unit 3 Draw out the bracket holder making sure that the pressurizing springs do not become loose 1 Remove the feed unit 2 Open the jam release cover 3 Remove the 2 screws Front aligning plate J Aligning roller L 1 Remove the feed unit 2 Open the jam release cover 3 Remove each of the E rings bushes and coil springs from the front and rear sides 4 Slide the aligning roller L to draw out the roller K Timing sensor and size sensor 1 Remove the feed unit 2 Remove the 4 screws 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADF 16 Spring Separation unit Leaf spring Adjustment screw
362. oo EXPO OUT dj Gad aNd Bdd voaxidd Gad Bdd voiNOdd Gad dd dj BUCWHILINE vous VELAS VOSLAIS vouas 050005 aNd TYNNSH TINGS 05155 Vooxus 0154545 0100455 EXPO OUT 2 357 457 RED 2 DRV POL t 1noodxa z ON 1n004x3 m VENNE jaan E 5105 wes UND O ONASH VONSGHS 091015 Vosidis VOZLdIS Ae YowioaG voanoa E 590 ENN sod HOIMS 545696 O WOHOS SASSOS SASAS 8500 SASAS Vis L d SASEOS BMAD10 0 BMAD11 0 L vasumvos 545205 2 fono aiai pre Vvis Lad 5 ras ON vo ivso vrediad reals vo 0vso 245 meny 415 DN 8590 lavo IONOS vav oN vodowo 0115406 Hianos 01380 1SUNOS ITE CONO Vrasod ON PWA SDV PWA LDR E lavo nee EET SN vrasaa 5 8500 me ANGI MMO ramia PWA SLG and 8590 7 ans 2 ON ae nee ano 11207 veoviva aw T SCN MOT veia 8590 04580 8500 nee kl Todd UE 00084 1207 85
363. oper bias on the control panel lower the BIT If the developer bias is lowered too much however the following problems may occur The image contrast drops tend to produce faint images The carrier in the developer adheres to the photosensitive drum and scratches tend to occur more easily on the cleaning section Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 61 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 11 Installation of Carriage Drive Wire When the carriage drive wire is replaced attach the new wire as shown Scanner motor CRG 2 pulley CRG 2 CRG 1 Carriage drive wire 927 Motor pulley 3GT Z24 TSR SETE e aa E 5 a a a a n V Idle pulley 27 Idle pulley 927 Wire windup pulley motor deceleration pulley 39 75 3GT Z28 1 11 1 Wire tension adjustment 1 For this model it is unnecessary to adjust the carriage drive wire tension since its tension spring maintains constant tension Note Make sure that the tension of the wire on both the front and rear sides is equivalent and hanged properly 1 11 2 Adjustment of carriage 1 and carriage 2 1 Loosen the screws fixing carriage 1 2 Exit side frame Screws front rear 1 screw each and 2 2 screws in front to the wire 2 While pressing carriage 2 against the feed side frame both A amp B tighten the screws Carriage 1 fixing carriage 2 front side 3
364. operation 2 Drum counter reset Setting mode 08 Refer to 1 2 5 Setting mode 0141 91S 16115 p ee Warming D CEN mode mode Getting mode fest print mode print mode ont replace mode 0191 0191 0191 0191 Normal 3 S START key ON C CLEAR key ON Quick reference chart for self diagnostic mode 1 When the copier is in the adjustment mode which you entered by turning the power switch ON while pressing keys 0 and 5 simultaneously pressing keys 0 and 9 simultaneously will set the copier to the standby mode In this standby mode only can the adjustment mode be accessed repeatedly by simply entering 0 and 5 2 While all the displays on the control panel are lit copying is not available When the copier enters the standby mode by pressing the 0 9 or C copying is enabled 3 When the self diagnostic mode was used turn the power OFF then hand over to the user Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 157 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 2 1 Input signal check Test mode 03 In the 0 3 test mode the following input signal states can be checked by pressing the corresponding keys A When the ENERGY SAVER key is OFF LED indicating the energy saver mode is out con B G H Remarks Key LCF bottom LCF door LCF tray up LCF empty Manual feed Manual feed Manual feed
365. original personal check is being fed by normal feed in the one sided mode is set as the jam pulse This is set at the point when the trailing edge of the output original has passed the exit sensor in the one sided mode Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 21 6570 5570 ADF From restart of No 1 side transport to exit sensor ON in the double sided mode The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the leading edge position of the original being fed when the original being fed is paused on the original glass and standing by for exit of the output original to be completed during No 1 side transport in the double sided mode is set as the jam pulse This is set when transport of the original being fed is restarted after exit of the output original is completed during transport of the No 1 side From start of No 2 side transport to exit sensor ON in the double sided mode The number of pulses equivalent to twice the distance from the trailing edge position of the original to the exit sensor ON position when the shortest original personal check is set at the exposure posi tion is set as the jam pulse This is set when transport of the No 2 side is started 16 5 3 Exit Reversal jams 1 1 Exit sensor accumulation jam From exit sensor ON to exit sensor OFF at original exit The number of pulses equivalent to twice the length of the longest original LD is set as the jam pulse This is set at the point when the trailing edge of the out
366. osure position completion of No 2 side feed The same processes from 9 to 11 are carried out and the top side of the original is set at the exposure position If there is an original on the tray when feed is completed initial alignment of the next original is started From here on operation is repeated until all of the originals on the tray are fed 21 Start of exit of final original to completion of exit When the exit signal is received during exit of the final original the DF operation in progress signal is set Then the transport motor and reversal motor start to operate in the forward direction the trans port belt and reversal roller rotate to start exit operation and the original on the original glass is transported to the exit section At the point when the exit sensor turns ON the number of drive pulses up to start of exit deceleration is set At the point when the number of pulses is counted up decelera tion of the transport motor and reversal motor is started and the original is output at low speed At the point when all originals in the DF have been output the transport motor and reversal motor stop exit is completed the DF operation in progress signal is reset and feed operation is completed Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 19 6570 5570 ADF 16 4 Description of Interface Signals The following 6 lines are used for sending and receiving signals b
367. ove the 3 screws D Rear cover 1 Remove the 10 screws 2 Remove the lower hook 3 p ces Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 2 Right front cover Fooks e fe Rear cover 31 8070 6570 5570 4580 OUTLINE E Upper feed cover 1 Slide the LCF unit 2 Remove the 2 screws F Lower feed cover 1 Draw out the LCF and remove the manual feed unit 2 Remove the lower feed cover 3 screws 1 con nector both sides hooks 4 pcs G Power switch cover 1 Slide the LCF unit 2 Remove the 3 screws 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 32 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Rear top cover on paper feed side and toner bag cover 1 Remove feed side rear cover 2 screws 2 Remove the 2 coin screws open the toner bag cover and remove the upper hinge screw 3 Remove the toner bag cover from the lower hinge I Upper exit cover lower exit cover PFP exit cover front exit cover and rear exit cover 1 Remove the upper exit cover 2 screws 2 Remove the front exit cover 3 screws 3 Remove the rear exit cover 2 screws
368. ove the 5 screws C LCFunit 1 Open the right front cover and remove the LCF knob 2 screws 2 Pull the LCF release lever to move the LCF unit toward the arrow c in the figure Note Take care not to pinch your fingers 3 Remove the 2 screws each atthe front and rear that fasten the LCF unit to the rails Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 LCF door Did pee Jei Rail front side i 9 LCF knob ay P LFC unit P 19 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 4 Lift the LCF unit to remove it D LCF fornt cover 1 Remove the 4 screws and then remove the LCF front cover E Elevator wire 1 Lower the elevator tray as for as possible and turn the power switch OFF 2 Remove the LCF front cover 3 Remove the 2 screws and the lowest pa per feed guide 4 Remove the 2 screws and drive bracket PFP paper feed guide unit 5 Remove
369. oves at both the front and the rear 2 Do not allow the charger wire to be twisted _ O 3 Donottouch the charger wire directly with your hands or fingers Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 10 Charge wire 5 6570 5570 DRUM E Transfer charger wire cleaner 1 Remove the main charger wire 2 Remove the wire cleaner 1 screw Note During assembly make sure that the charger wire passes through the pads Pad Charger wire Wire cleaner F Main charger timing belt 1 Loosen the screw securing the tension pulley to remove the timing belt Notes 1 When assembling the timing belt secure the timing belt with the end faces of the main charger wire cleaner base and switch pusher aligned with the center of the mark 2 During assembly the tension of the tim ing belt must be adjusted as follows e Tighten the screw securing the tension pulley so that the timing belt is pulled by 4 to 5 mm when a force of 200g is applied at the mark Mark aa 5 S 4 to 5mm ilm 200 Rear side of belt from Timing belt d outside of plate bending outer side 6570 5570 DRUM 10 Main charge wire Screw cleaner base Mark Spring balance mmm eu IIS Main charger wire cleaner base Mar 1999 TOSHIBA G Main charger guide unit 1 Remove the center inner cover and the right inner
370. p 2 Cleaning 2 Heater roller cleaning roller 218 Cleaning silicon felt roller 027 Press roller cleaning silicon roller 028 Upper heater roller cleaning roller Cleaning roller 1 233 Cleaning felt roller Cleaning roller 2 227 Lower heat roller cleaning felt roller Cleaning roller 3 228 Cleaning metal roller Cleaning roller 4 229 3 Heater temperature control 3 ON OFF control by thermistor upper lower roller independent temperature control 3 15 Control Microcomputer control 16 Drive system Separated independent drive by DC motor 8070 6570 5570 4580 COPYING PROCESS 3 10A Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 COPIER OPERATION 4 1 Operation Outline Copier operation Operation during warm up and standby Automatic feed copying using PRINT key Copying operation Bypass feed copying Interrupt copying 4 2 Description of Operation 4 2 1 Warming up 1 Initialize operation e The main switch is turned ON The heater lamp is turned ON Copy quantity indicator 1 and WAIT WARMING UP are displayed e Fan e Initialization of the scanning optical system The carriages move to their home positions and then stop The carriages move to the peak detection position The halogen lamp is turned ON The peak is detected white color detection of the shading correction board The halogen lamp is tu
371. p and down No Correct the swing mechanism Yes Is swing guide close detection switch 2 MS6 normal No Replace the microswitch Yes Is the delivery motor M2 operating in reverse at the specified timing No gt Replace the motor Yes Replace the finisher controller board Procedure 3 Try turning the delivery motor in the reverse by hand Does the swing guide move up and down No Correct the swing mechanism Yes Is swing guide open sensor 118 normal No Replace the sensor Yes Y Is the delivery motor M2 operating in reverse at the specified timing No Replace the motor Yes Replace the finisher controller board Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 17 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING Procedure 4 Is the safety area detection switch MSS normal No Replace the switch Yes Is the safety area detection switch MS3 correctly pressed No Correct the mechanical mechanism Yes 1 Is the swing guide close detection switch 2 MS6 normal No Replace the switch Yes Is the swing guide close detection switch 2 MS6 correctly pressed No EN Correct the mechanical mechanism Yes Replace the finisher controller board CB3 Tray lift motor is abnormal Procedure 1 Is the tray home position sensor PI8 normal Replace the sensor Yes Is the tray lift mechanism nor
372. p in the torque limiter However if multiple sheet feeding occurs Fig 9 3 2 since the friction between the sheets is small the lower sheet is forcibly separated from the up per sheet and is sent back in the direction of the arrow 0002 by the separation roller The Upper sheet is fed in the directino of the arrow by the feed roller Examples If only sheet of paper 1 arrives atthe separa tion roller the force of the feed roller which is greater than that of the separation roller causes the separation roller to rotate in the direc tion sending the paper on to the aligning roll ers If two sheets of paper 1 and 2 arrive at the separation roller the force of the respective rollers is greater than the friction between the sheets of paper and the top sheet 1 is sent in the direction by the feed roller while the bottom sheet 2 is sent in the 00 gt direction by the separation roller 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 18 The direction PP POE paper feeding Spring joint ic dU limiter Sparation roller N Qu n lt 47 Fig 9 3 1 Paper feed roller 7 Separation roller Fig 9 3 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 3 4 Disassembly and replacement LCF section A LCF door 1 Open the LCF door take out the screws hold ing the hinge and remove the LCF door B LCF feed cover 1 Remove the LCF door 2 Rem
373. pattern is within the permissible range When the result is judged as GOOD 7 End of Control The determined image formation conditions are reflected in subsequent copies When the result is judged as NG No Good 6 The image formation conditions are changed Y Return to 3 6570 5570 CLEANER 13 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 13 4 4 Configuration Toner adhesion amount sensor Emits light corresponding to the light intensity control voltage onto the drum and outputs a voltage corresponding to the reflected light intensity of the drum or the toner image on the drum D A converter Outputs the light source intensity control voltage Laser optical system Exposes the test pattern for forming the toner image e A D converter Converts the voltage values output from the sensor to digital values before they are read Image formation system Executes the charging exposure and developing processes e MCPU Executes steps 1 to 7 described in 13 4 3 Image Formation Process Photosensitive drum Toner adhesion amount sensor Test pattern Reflected light Light source intensity signal intensity signal Various image formation conditions Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 13 7 6570 5570 CLEANER 13 5 Disassembly and Replacement A Cleaner unit 1 Remove the main charger and the developer unit 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors and remove the 2 screws 3 Draw out the cl
374. per exit cover and open out the lower exit cover 7 Remove the slot cover on the inside of the up per exit cover 15 screws 8 Disconnect the 4 connectors from the system PC board and the 2 screws and drive out the System electrics unit 9 Remove the 6 screws and draw out the sys tem PC board in the direction of the arrow from the mother PC board Connector T m 5 5 un un oO un 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 38 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA HDD 1 Remove the upper exit cover 2 Remove the system electronics slot cover 15 Screws 3 Remove the screw and connector and take out the HDD unit Connector o e 4 Remove the bracket 4 screws Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 39 6570 5570 OUTLINE 3 COPYING PROCESS 3 4 Copying Process Original exposure Halogen lamp 180W Discharger LED m Wavelength 660 nm x 16 Blade cleaning Og e Fur brush cleaning Heat roller e700Wx1 600Wx1 600 dpi 7500 pixels Toner 650V N Cleaning brush Blade Image processing m Semiconductor laser Pw 4 7 nJ mm Carrier 227 Development Magnetic roller Bias 400 VDC AC 2 Manual pape
375. point when the timing sensor turns OFF and the trailing edge of the original is detected the feed motor stops The number of drive pulses until the feed motor stops is set Setting the original at the exposure position completion of feed Ie Oo G 5 oQ The original stops signal is set by the set timing of the original stop signal After the timing sensor detects the trailing edge of the original the original is transported for a speci fied number of pulses At the point when the original arrives at the exposure position the feed motor stops the original is set at the exposure position and feed is completed Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 7 6570 5570 ADF 7 Start of initial alignment of next original to completion of initial alignment ON 9255 X Oo 5 When there is an original on the tray at the point when feed is completed the initial alignment signal is set the feed motor starts to operate in the reverse direction and initial alignment of the next original is started If there is no original on the tray operation from 8 is started The same processes as 2 and 3 are carried out initial alignment of the next original is completed and the original stands by o Wheninitial alignment is carried out on the 2nd original onwards the dummy exit operation is not carried out If an original is in the process of being output the next original waits for
376. position is determined by the magnet roller and polarity fixing bush no adjust ment is necessary 1 19 Adjusting the Heat Roller Pressure Normally the heat roller pressure need not be adjusted However it must be carried out when wrinkles frequently appear on copies made on plain paper Procedure 1 Make an size copy entirely black with the ADF open 2 Turn the power switch OFF after copying is finished 3 Quickly open the front cover and draw out the belt transport unit 4 Insert the copy made in 1 into the fuser inlet guide with the entirely black side facing down then turning the jam release lever CCW until the center of the copy paper is nipped by the heat roller 5 After approx 20 seconds take the copy paper out by quickly turning the jam release lever CCW again 6 Measure the width of the section of the copy paper nipped by the heat rollers at the both front and rear sides R Rear Copy paper solid black F Nipped part Front Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 75 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 7 If F R 20 5mm loosen the fixing screw of the pressure spring on the side that having the broader nipped section One half turn corre sponds to narrowing the nipped section by about 0 5mm 8 If F R lt 0 5mm end the adjustment and make five copies of A3 size white paper with the ADF closed to clean the heat rollers 1 20 Setting the Heat Roller Temperature and Heat Roller
377. ps The pedestal motor M31 rotates the feed clutch corresponding to the selected cassette comes ON and the pedestal motor M31 drives the PFP pick up PFP feed and PFP separation rollers which start to feed paper from the cassette The leading edge of the paper is detected by the PFP paper start switch 828 832 or S36 If the paper stop switch S27 S31 or S35 is ON then the paper stops at this point If the switch is OFF the paper continues When the leading edge of the paper is detected by the paper stop switch S27 S31 or S35 it is aligned by the stationary PFP aligning roller A fixed period of time after the PFP paper stop switch S27 S31 or S35 detects the leading edge of the paper the feed clutch goes OFF and the PFP pick up PFP feed and PFP separation rollers stop Aligning is complete Next the aligning clutch CL7 CL8 or CL9 comes ON and the pedestal motor M31 drives the PFP aligning roller to transport the paper to the copier The paper is aligned again by the copier s aligning roller and transported to the copy process 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 48 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 4 6 Disassembly and replacement A Cassettes upper middle and lower 1 Pull out the cassette take out the 2 stopper screws and then remove the cassette Repeat the procedure for the upper mid dle and lower cassettes B PFP feed unit upper middle and lower
378. ps do not rotate The upper and lower heat rollers are pressu rized by spring force at all times After fusing is completed the transfer paper is separated smoothly from the upper and lower heat rollers by the separation claw In the temperature sensing section the temperature of the upper and lower heat rollers is controlled by a thermistor If the temperature becomes abnormally hot the power to the heater lamps is cut by a thermostat Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 1 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 3 Functions 1 Heater lamp Two halogen lamps are provided inside the upper heat roller to heat the upper heat roller The heater lamp stays fixed even when the upper heat roller is rotating T Upper heat roller The upper heat roller is made of aluminum having comparatively good heat conducting properties It is heated by the heater lamps The upper heat roller is held in contact with the above mentioned lower heat roller Fusing is carried out by passing the transfer paper through the section where these two heat rollers contact each other so that the toner image on the paper faces the upper heat roller In other words the toner is melted by the heat of the upper and lower heat rollers and the heat transfer efficiency is improved by the pressure of the lower heat roller so that the toner soaks in between the fibers of the paper To prevent adhesion of toner onto the rollers phenomenon called offset and to facilitate separation of toner from the upp
379. put is NOT available for measurement Text Enter the value set in code 205 0 205 2 Developer High 1 adjustment Copier 104 0 255 6 Output is NOT available for measurement Photo Enter the value set in code 205 0 207 Developer High 2 adjustment All 104 0 255 The developer bias power 2 Out put IS available for measurement supply output is increased Adjust by measuring the output when the value is increased Before performing this adjustment refer to the complete adjustment 216 Developer High 3 adjustment All 133 0 255 The developer bias power 2 Output IS available for measurement supply output is increased when the value is increased Before performing this adjustment refer to the complete adjustment in Code 205 press the START key key in the Sub Code then press the START key For 205 0 207 and 216 use the UP or DOWN key to change the value press the SET key to store or the RESET key For codes 203 205 1 and 205 2 key in the value set in code 205 0 press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset 4210 0 Charge corona grid voltage adjustment The Copier 93 0 255 The charge corona power 7 developer unit must be removed Text supply output is increased Output IS available for measurement Adjust Photo when the value is increased by measuring the grid voltage output Before performing this 4210 1 Charge corona grid voltage adjustment Copier 93 0 255 refer to the 6 Output is NOT av
380. put original has arrived at the exit sensor during original exit From start of reversal operation to exit sensor OFF in the double sided mode The number of pulses from start of reversal operation reverse rotation of the transport belt to com pletion of feed in the double sided mode is set as the jam pulse When the exit sensor turns ON at completion of feed in the double sided mode this is judged to be the exit sensor accumulation jam In the double sided mode the motor is driven and is stopped by a specified number of pulses number of feed pulses up to the original stopper position after start of reversal operation reverse rotation of the transport belt Accordingly in the same way as detection of other accumulation jams the exit sensor accumulation jam pulse is set at the start of reversal operation reverse rotation of the trans port belt and occurrence of an accumulation jam is judged by the timer counting up the jam pulse If this method is adopted the feed pulse count is counted and the motor stops before the jam pulse count is counted So the exit sensor accumulation jam does not occur even if originals accumulate at the exit sensor section For this reason when the exit sensor turns ON at completion of double sided feed the exit sensor accumulation jam is judged This method is adopted to detect jams 6570 5570 ADF 16 22 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 6 Detection of Original Size 16 6 1 Original size detection method The numbe
381. r Reinforcement plate d oS NN COME Bracket Toner auger motor 8070 6570 5570 4580 CLEANER UNIT I Scraper solenoid unit 1 Remove the rear cover and disconnect the con Gs nector ee i e 2 Remove the carry belt unit e Note Take care not to scratch the transfer belt 3 Remove the toner auger motor 4 The solenoid unit can be removed when the 2 o unit mounting screws on the rear frame are re moved from the front side Ve 5 Remove the separation claw solenoid 2 screws connect bundling band Note During assembly move the separation claw solenoid in the direction of the arrow and Solenoid secure Connector J Drum motor e em PI SS ne 1 Remove the flywheel 3 screws DE N i L ee F L M K 1 olf 37 eta eo ED NN je 4 lle o i
382. r 3 Remove the thermistor bracket 1 screw Thermistor bracket Drum thermistor 4 Rotate the cam until it locks b Remove the 2 drum shaft fixing screws 6 Draw out the drum shaft from the front side 7 Remove the drum by lifting it up B How to replace the drum 1 Remove the drum 2 Remove the 3 screws Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 10 3 6570 5570 DRUM 3 Remove the front flange 4 Draw out the drum upwards C Main charger 1 Remove the middle inner cover 2 Remove the screw and draw out the main charger to the front side 6570 5570 DRUM 10 Front flange Drum Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC D Charger wire Main charger 398mm long 0 06mm dia tungsten oxide wire Grid cover Remove the CA A grid cover 00 Grid Main charger Wire terminal Small Terminal Wire cleaner main charger EA Ghatge wire AC V groove Charge wire Wire terminal Large Terminal 1 Remove the grid cover grid and terminal cover and then remove the charger wire from the main charger Installation Precautions 1 The charger wire must be inserted into the V gro
383. r 2 screws Note Adjustment of the main blade recovery blade and fur brush cleaner unit is not necessary 6570 5570 CLEANER 18 14 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 FUSER UNIT 14 1 General Description Cleaning roller 1 Cleaning roller 2 Upper heat roller LL Upper thermistor Upper separation claw 2 I 2 Thermostat NN Heater lamp 2 o gt 2 C Heat roller guide 2 5777 Exit roller Q O eae 5 3 Discharge brush Lower thermistor Cleaning roller 4 Exit switch Lower separation claw Cleaning roller 3 Lower heat roller Fig 14 1 1 Heat and pressure are applied to fuse the toner to the paper which is separated from the drum after the transfer process After fusing the paper exits onto the copy receiving tray through the paper exit unit The fuser unit comprises the heater lamps upper heat roller lower heat roller separation claws clean ing roller 1 2 3 4 thermistor thermostat exit rollers and exit switch etc 14 2 Description of Operation 1 Fuser Heat and pressure are applied to the transfer paper that is separated and transported on top of the drum to fuse the toner The upper and lower heat rollers are rotated by drive from the heat roller motor at a constant pres sure applied by spring force The upper heat roller has two built in heater lamps and rotates by motor drive The built in heater lam
384. r and reversal motor start to operate in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and reversal roller and start the dummy exit operation Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 11 6570 5570 ADF 3 Restart of initial alignment to completion of initial alignment The feed motor starts to operate in the forward direction to rotate the aligning roller Transport of the original starts and the initial alignment operation is restarted After the timing sensor turns ON and the leading edge of the original is detected the original is transport for a specified number of pulses and the feed motor stops and the initial alignment operation is completed at the point when the original arrives atthe initial alignment standby position At this time forward rotation of the feed motor causes the weight plate to lower At the point that initial alignment operation is completed the status of the width sensor is checked and stored to memory After initial alignment operation is completed the transport motor and reversal motor stop at the point when they have been driven by a specified number of pulses and exit operation is completed However note that if the original exit operation was in progress at this time dummy exit operation is completed at the point when the exit operation of this original is completed Start of original transport to aligning sensor OFF detection of scan size After completion of dummy exit the
385. r compressed When the value is increased by 1 the width reproduction ratio is enlarged by approxi mately 0 05 step or 0 1mm step After setting the value select LT A4 paper then press the ENERGY SAVER key to make a test print v405 Polygonal motor speed fine adjustment Copier 120 0 255 Adjust the width of the copied image front to rear to 1 1 so that it is not stretched or compressed When the value is increased by 1 the width reproduction ratio is enlarged by approximately 0 05 step or 0 1 mmystep After setting the value select LT A4 paper then press the ENERGY SAVER key to make a test copy 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 16 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 05 MODE CODE ADJUSMENT MODE RANGE DESCRIPTION PROCEDURE 410 Laser write position front to rear of machine Copier 140 0 255 Always perform code 411 first 1 image registration then set the value of code 410 After adjusting code 411 key in the value set to the value set in code 411 in code 411 press the SET key to store in When the value is increased memory or the CLEAR key to reset by 1 the image on the drum is shifted by 0 0423mm to the rear of the copier primary v411 Laser write position front to rear of machine Printer 140 0 255 scanning direction Refer to image registration the compl
386. r heat roller end thermistor abnormal 1 Check the sub end section thermistor Are the connectors disconnected Is the sub end section thermistor firmly contacting the heat roller s the sub end section thermistor harness broken 2 Check the LGC board Is connector J326 disconnected Check the circuits for breaks short circuits or other troubles Replace the LGC board 3 Reset the status counter Reset status counter 8 to 0 by following the same procedure for error C41 C46 Lower heat roller themistor abnormal at standby 1 Check the thermistor Are the connectors disconnected Is the themistor fimly contacting the pressure roller s the thermistor harness broken 2 Checking of the LGC board is the same as with C41 3 Reset the status counter When C46 occurs reset the status counter 3 to 0 by the same procedure as for error 41 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 5 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 4 Communication Related Service Call C56 Communication error between PFC and M CPU 1 TS Check the signal patterns REQ ACK RXD TXD between IC11 G A and IC21 PFC on the LGC board for open or short circuits Replace the LGC board C57 Communication error between M CPU and IPC 1 BOD Check the circuit patterns mainly on IC50 and IC56 on the LGC board for open or short circuits Check the pattern on the IPC board for open or short circuits Replace the IPC board
387. r of drive pulses of the feed motor from start of transport of the original standing by at the initial alignment position up to when the trailing edge of the original being fed passes the aligning sensor is counted to detect the original size in the feed direction At the same time the original size in the width direction is judged by the size width sensor As it is difficult to judge A4 horizontal and letter size horizontal and also A3 and LD by detection in the feed direction and width direction alone as described above two sensors are provided to detect A4 horizontal and letter size horizontal Ae Co Q Q OQ A Start of transport of original standing by at the initial alignment position o 2 Passage of the trailing edge of the fed original through the aligning sensor The number drive pulses output by the feed motor between 1 and 2 is counted to detect the size of the original in the feed direction Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 23 6570 5570 ADF 16 7 Flow Charts 16 7 1 Main routine processing 6570 5570 ADF Main routine START 2 5 msec passed Parsing of port input General purpose timer count processing Sensor adjustment E2PROM control Initialization over n Status change monitoring Operating status monitoring Operation control Jam processing Communications control ADF
388. r open sensor normal No Replace the sensor Yes Replace the finisher controller board Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 15 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING Procedure 3 Check safety area detection switch MS3 Is the switch normal No x Replace the switch Yes Is safety area detection switch MS3 correctly pressed No M Correct the mechanical mechanism Yes 1 Is shutter close detection switch MS4 normal No Replace the switch Yes Is shutter close detection switch MS4 correctly pressed No Correct the mechanical mechanism Yes Replace the finisher controller board CB2 Delivery motor is abnormal Procedure 1 Try rotating the exit motor by hand Does it operate smoothly Correct the mechanical mechanism Yes Is the delivery motor clock sensor P110 normal Replace the sensor Yes Is the voltage across J11 6 and 7 on the finisher controller board 24V when the delivery motor operates J11 6 amp 7 MJ 1006 1007 J11 4 amp 5 MJ 1015 1016 Replace the finisher controller board Yes Is the wiring from the motor up to the controller board normal Correct the wiring Yes Replace the motor 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 16 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA Procedure 2 Try turning the delivery motor in the reverse by hand Does the swing guide move u
389. r saddle Is the condition recovered by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the copier Yes END No Y Is the wiring between the finisher controller board and the saddle stitcher board normal No Correct it Yes 1 Measure the voltage between J3 2 on the finisher controller board and J3 1 Is it DC 24V No Replace the finisher controller board Yes y Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 29 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 5 3 Preparation of PC to Use a Network 5 3 1 Setting Virtual Modem The connection between PC and copier is made using PPP Point to Point Protocol It is necessary to use a dial up networking and use a virtual modem First install the virtual modem The virtual modem can be downloaded from the following web site URL http www kevin wells com net mdmcbx4 inf After download set up the modem as follows Click Start button point at Settings and then click Control Panel Click on Modems Modems Properties Ei General Diagnostics B The following modems are set up on this computer Remove Properties Dialing Preferences Dialing from Default Location Use Dialing Properties to modify how your calls are dialed Dialing Properties Close 5 2 Procedure 3 Is the swing guide clock sensor PI20 working normally No Replace the sensor Yes Is t
390. r supply Separation Transfer 50 uA LCF ce 6 4000 sheets PFP 500 sheets each 1 Charging Negatively charges the surface of the photosensitive drum 2 Original exposure Images are converted to optical signals 3 Scanning Image optical signals are converted to electrical signals 4 Printing Image electrical signals are converted to optical signals for laser emission and ex posed on the photosensitive drum 5 Development toner adheres to the surface of the photosensitive drum and forms a visible image Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1A 6 Transfer separation Transfers the visible im age from the drum onto the transfer copy sheet Simultaneously separates the transfer sheet and toner from the drum 7 Fixing Fixes the toner on the transfer sheet by applying heat and pressure Fur brush cleaning Dirt and paper dust is cleaned from the drum 9 Cleaning Mechanically removes any remain ing toner on the drum Discharger LED array Discharges any remain ing charge from the drum 8070 6570 5570 4580 COPYING PROCESS 3 2 Details of Copying Process 1 Photosensitive Drum The photosensitive drum has two layers an outer and an inner layer The outer layer is a uS semi conductive layer It uses an organic pho P notoconductiye layer toconductive carrier OPC material The inner BASE layer is Aluminum and is a conductive mate rial Structure of the photosen
391. rance of 80 cm 32 on the left 80 cm 32 on the right and 10 cm 4 in the rear 2 Service of Machines Basically be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service Be sure not to touch high temperature sections such as the exposure lamp the fuser unit the damp heater and their periphery Be sure not to touch high voltage sections such as the chargers the transfer belt and the high voltage transformer Be sure not to touch rotating operating sections such as gears belts pulleys fan etc When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on be sure not to touch live sections and rotating operating sections Avoid exposure to laser radiation Use suitable measuring instruments and tools Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing Avoid direct exposure to beam Do not insert tools parts etc that are reflective into the path of the laser beam Remove all watches rings bracelets etc that are reflective 3 Main Service Parts for Safety The breaker door switch fuse thermostat thermofuse thermistor etc are particularly impor tant for safety Be sure to handle install them properly 4 Cautionary Labels During servicing be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as Unplug the power cord during service Hot area Laser warning label etc to see if there is any dirt on their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the
392. ration is in progress the transport stops after being driven for a specified number of pulses The original being feed pauses before the reversal section and stands by for exit opera tion to complete After the exit sensor turns ON and the leading edge of the original is detected the original is trans ported for a specified number of pulses 6 Completion of forward rotation transport At the point where the leading edge of the original is nipped by the reversal roller lower passage roller by a specified amount or more the transport motor and the reversal motor stop Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 13 6570 5570 ADF 7 Start of reversal to flapper solenoid OFF Ou B Oo 5 After forward rotation transport is completed the transport motor starts to rotate in the reverse direc tion and the reversal motor starts to rotate in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and reversal roller to start reversal of the original The original passes along the reversal path and is transported onto the original glass The DF operation in progress signal is reset at the reset timing of the DF operation in progress signal The stop notice signal is set at the set timing of the stop notice signal The original top side rear side signal is set or reset at the point when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the original The original stop signal is set at the set timing of the origina
393. rays upper aligning unit p d G Gear Et TP Timing pulley TB Timing belt QR Fixed to the shaft PFP upper feed unit ee upper feed roller M Upper aligning clutch 28 PFP middle aligning roller EE Me ex O ce 20 f lere d Ds Goro J N Me inn EN lt DE 22 27277 8 a OY ER N S x Middle aligning clutch G2 TP2sG28 x SK N SK Was S20 rub 20 PFP middle feed roller rer feed clutch 7 I S v PFP middle feed roller _ d A PFP middle T m G22 v e PFP lower aligning roller H VG V 2 S SK EG G217 BA TP20 lower feed roller SN DE G20 N Made feed A PFP lower feed roller A clutc e G25 PFP lower O TP20 separation roller ger yt Lower aligning clutch a E lt lt AN TP25 G28 2 NER TB Pedestal in G10 e G NX SN FN xX 2 5 G64 TP28 v s 4 SSE TR 3 TP25 G28 Lower feed clutch 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 42 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 4 5 Explanation of operation Cassette tray up and down operation The previous paper feeding method was for the pick up roller to lower itself on to the paper and feed at forward With the paper feed pedestal the paper feed elevator mechanism raises th
394. rd PWA F CCD 300 Image processing section A D conversion Shading correction SLG board PWA F SLG 300 Scanner system image processing ASIC High quality image processing Image memory editing Editing processing SYS board Gamma correction PWA F SYS 300 Tone processing External output system interface Sort copy group copy maga zine copy simplex reduction PLG board concatenation duplex reduc PWA F PLG 300 tion concatenation image combination date annotation Printer system image processing ASIC sheet insertion mode etc Smoothing processing External input system interface Image area control Laser related control Laser drlve board PWA F LDR 300 Laser drive Fig A Construction of the image processing section Image data flow Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 3 6570 5570 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 3 SLG Board PWA F SLG 300 6 3 1 Features 1 The image processing ASICs are controlled by CPU on the SLG board PWA F SLG 300 2 The image processing functions of the SLG board implement the following functions High quality image processing mage memory editing e Editing processing e Gamma correction e Tone processing e External output system interfacing 6 3 2 Functional description of the image processing circuit An ASIC mounted on the SLG PC board implement the functions described below 1 High quality image processing A Range correction This function co
395. rite start position primary scanning Follow the procedure below to make a test print Paper source LCF size A4 LT 1 0 5 PWR ON 1 gt E S gt 1 Digital keys 2 Measure the distance B the distance from the edge of the test print paper to the 6th line 3 In order to set the distance B to 52 mm 0 5 mm adjust using the following steps D 411 gt START gt Set the value gt SETV INT gt 1 gt E S gt 1 An increase in the value makes the distance B longer in increments of 0 0423 mm step 0 5 PWR ON 410 gt START Value set in 1 gt SET INT gt PWR OFF Notes 1 Before making a test print make sure that 10096 A is appeared on the top of the message display after the SET icon or the INT key is pressed and then make a test print or turn PWR OFF 2 The effective adjustment value is within the range 0 to 255 The default adjustment value is 128 3 Take notice that the first line may be illegible or invisible in some cases Print movement direction Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 41 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT c Transfer belt speed adjustment printer Secondary scanning reproduction ratio Follow the procedure below to make a test print middle or lower cassette A3 LD 1 0 5 PWR ON 1 gt E S gt 1 Digital keys 2 Measure the distance A the distance between the 5th line and 25th li
396. rive FG pulse Wave V phase shaping Difference comparator DEVCK Reference Voltage U phase etection 225 circuit cited FULL phase comparator switching Control Developer motor ian DEVON Rotation mm M13 suna control position detector A B C Hall element 1 The LGC transmits control signals for the developer motor rotation DEVON motor rotation com mand 2 The excitation phase switching unit excites each phase on the developer motor Developer motor rotates 3 Hall elements A to C are used to detect the rotational position of the motor or rotor 4 The excitation phase switching unit switches the excitation for each phase By repeating steps 2 through 4 above the motor keeps rotating 5 The FG pulse is generated by the rotation of the developer motor 6 The phases and velocities of the FG pulse and the reference frequency from the LGC are compared and the differences are added Further to this are added the fluctuations in the power supply voltage Signal generation 7 Changes the switching timing for the excitation phase switching unit to match the signal amount obtained in step 6 That is the FG pulse and reference frequency are controlled to be equal The developer motor rotates at a constant speed Locked range state 8 When the DEVON signal
397. rive and flows current to the motor 5 The current flowing to the motor passes through the current detection resistor R2 as it is as the total current The total current and the CPU set current value are compared by IC5 IC5 controls the motor drive power 6570 5570 SCANNER Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 5 Exposure Control Circuit 7 5 1 Overview A The exposure control circuit is comprised of the following four blocks 1 Lamp regulator This circuit applies voltage to the exposure lamp correspondent to the duty ratio of the PWM signal 2 CCD sensor circuit This circuit reads the amount of light from the shading correction plate This information is used to compare the light intensity reflected from the original document and the light from the shading cor rection plate Adjustments are made in the image processing circuit for enhancement of signals 3 Image processing circuit This circuit converts the signals from the CCD into binary values and performs a series of image processing operations such as gamma correction shading correction etc 4 Control panel The duty ratio of PWM signal can be set at increments of 196 through the digital keys by the operator Note The ON OFF switching of the exposure lamp is carried out by a unique signal EXPO ON sepa rate from the PWM signal Original Shading correction plate Exposure lamp Lamp regulator PWA CCD CCD sensor PWA CCD PWA SLG PWA SLG Main CPU Eos
398. rive later w445 Duplexer registration adjustment Image on All 8 0 15 Increasing he value by 1 shifts 1 the drum to the papers leading edge the image on the paper by Toggle between 09 and 05 Mode to make a approximately 0 5mm towards test copy the papers leading edge Increasing the value makes the paper arrive later vKey in the value press the SET key to store or the CLEAR key to reset 4450 0 upper paper alignment paper buckle A 14 0 31 Increasing the value by 6 at the main registration roller Paper length increases the aligning paper 330mm and longer buckle by 0 9mm 4450 1 upper paper alignment paper buckle A 8 0 31 ncreasing the value by 6 at the main registration roller Paper length increases the aligning paper 220mm to 329mm buckle by 0 9mm 5450 2 upper paper alignment paper buckle A 5 0 31 ncreasing the value by 6 at the main registration roller Paper length increases the aligning paper 219mm and less buckle by 0 9mm 4452 0 PFP middle paper alignment paper buckle A 2 0 31 ncreasing the value by 6 at the main registration roller Paper length increases the aligning paper 330mm and longer buckle by 0 9mm 4452 1 middle paper alignment paper buckle A 8 0 31 ncreasing the value by 6 at the main registration roller Paper length increases the aligning paper 220mm to 329mm buckle by 0 9mm 5452 2 middle paper alignment paper buckle A 5 0 31 ncreasing the
399. rmer Be sure not to touch rotating operating sections such as gears belts pulleys fan etc e When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on be sure not to touch live sections and rotating operating sections Avoid exposure to laser radiation Use suitable measuring instruments and tools Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing Avoid direct exposure to beam Do not insert tools parts etc that are reflective into the path of the laser beam Remove all watches rings bracelets etc that are reflective Main Service Parts for Safety e The breaker door switch fuse thermostat thermofuse thermistor etc are particularly impor tant for safety Be sure to handle install them properly Cautionary Labels e During servicing be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as Unplug the power cord during service Hot area Laser warning label etc to see if there is any dirt on their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the copier Disposition of Consumable Parts Packing Materials Regarding the recovery and disposal of the copier supplies consumable parts and packing materials it is recommended to follow the relevant local regulations or rules When parts are disassembled reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents Be careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws washers pins
400. rned OFF Original size indicators are initialized and move to a position indicating the copy area e Initialization of the paper feed section Each slot s cassette trays move upward The ADU auto duplexing unit guides move to the maximum size position after their home position is detected e Initialization of laser optical system The polygon mirror is rotated The beam position is controlled e Other The main charger cleaner operates 2 Pre running operation When the heater reaches a preset temperature the pre run operation is carried out This operation is not carried out if the heat roller is sufficiently hot e The fuser unit rotates e The drum rotates The drum motor fur brush motor and auger motor turns ON e Maintenance of image control patch is formed on the drum and the reflectivity of this patch is read so that the optimum conditions are set e This operation stops after 2 minutes of operation Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 4 1 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 3 When the heat roller temperature is sufficient for fixing The heater lamp is turned OFF Copy quantity indicator 1 and READY are displayed 4 2 2 Standby ready e All keys on the control panel are operable When there is no key input for a set amount of time The copy quantity 1 is indicated the reproduction ratio indicates actual size and the expo sure is set to automatic 4 2 3 Automatic feed copying using the STA
401. rom the shafts E PFPaligning roller metallic roller upper and middle 1 Remove the 3 E rings and the gear pin col lar and bushing 2 Remove the opposite E ring and bushing Note When assembling be sure to keep to the mounting direction of the gear and collar as shown below E ring 00 Collar Gear 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM Pre PFP re roller separation HH roller guide Timing belt feed unit PFP pick up roller PFP separation roller No feed roller PFP feed roller Clips With mmis spring joint PFP separation roller Bushing Collar Bushing E ring PFP aligning rollers Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 Slide the whole roller in the direction of arrow A lift out one shaft and then remove the metalic roller 4 When replacing the roller remove the E ring gear and pin Note When assembling be sure to keep to the mounting direction of the gear as shown below Gear E ring F PFP aligning roller rubber roller upper and middle 1 Remove the metal roller 2 Remove the spring E ring and bushing on each end 3 Remove the rubber roller 4 When replacing the rubber roller remove the E ring gear and pin Notes Precaution for assembling 1 Spring Front Yellow Rear black 2 Gear mounting direction E ri
402. rrent adjustment value Code No YYY XXX 4 TEST MODE 227 Y Up Down icon Adjust the YYY value so that the adjustment value of the digital the value indicated in the table Y SET or INTERRUPT The YYY value after adjustment is recorded to NVM If you switch to another adjustment mode go to 1 Y 0 9 Exit adjustment mode Note The adj ester satisfies 10076 A A4 TEST MODE ustment value indicates the output voltage of the DA converters IC47 148 on the logic PC board and conforms to the following relationship output voltage adjustment value Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 59 1 256x5V 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT Sequence of Operation Pattern 2 0 5 PWR Digital Keys Enter code 5 Digital Keys Enter code value after hyphen Value after START hyphen 0 1 2 Current adjustment value Display messages 100 A4 TEST MODE gd Code No 0 XXX A4 TEST MODE XXX A4 TEST MODE ZZZ 777 Up Down icon Adjust the ZZ Z value so that the adjustment value of the digital tester satisfies the value indicated in the table SET or INTERRUPT The ZZ Z value after adjustment is recorded to NVM If you switch to another adjustment mode go to 1
403. s EMPS EMP SNS empty sensor Detects the original on the original tray Semiconductor optical sensor REGS REG SNS aligning sensor Detects the original for aligning Semiconductor optical sensor TIM TIM SNS timing sensor Detects the initial alignment position of the original Semiconductor optical sensor SIZES1 SIZE SNS1 size sensor 1 Original width sensor 1 Semiconductor optical sensor SIZES2 SIZE SNS2 size sensor 2 Original width sensor 2 Semiconductor optical sensor EXITS EXIT SNS exit sensor Detects originals in the exit reversal section Semiconductor optical sensor OPN DF OPN SW ADF open close switch Detects open close of the ADF unit Reed switch FCOVER FCOVER SW paper feed cover switch Detects open close of the feed section Reed switch RCOVER RCOVER SW exit cover switch Detects open close in the exit reversal section Reed switch APSSW APS STR SW APS start switch 6570 5570 ADF APS start switch 16 38 Microswitch Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 9 2 Electrical parts layout 16 9 3 Signal block diagram PPC ADF EMP SNS REG SNS TIM SNS TIM SIZE SNS1 SIZE SNS2 em EXIT SNS FCOVER SW EN RCOVER SW RCOVER 1 DF OPN SW APS STR SW Sensor input circuit circuit gt Mar 1999 TOSHIBA T
404. s attached so as to contact the lower heat roller to remove the toner and paper scraps that have stuck to the lower heat roller during the fusing process 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT 14 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Exit roller After the paper is separated by the separation claw the paper is output to the copy tray by the exit roller of the fuser and the exit roller of the reversal unit 10 Exit switch This switch detects arrival of the leading edge or trailing edge of the transfer paper at the exit roller of the fuser It is used for detecting paper jams in the fuser output section 11 Upper heat roller No 1 thermistor center section The thermistor detects the temperature of the heat rollers so that it is maintained within a fixed temperature width actually about 190 C higher than the lower limit defective fusing temperature and the upper limit toner burning temperature In other words the thermistor controls the tempera ture so that the heater lamps turn ON when the heat rollers are lower than the temperature setting and turn OFF when they are above the temperature setting 12 Upper heat roller No 2 thermistor end section The temperature distribution of the upper heat roller sometimes differs greatly at the center section and end section in the lengthwise direction depending on the printing conditions The No 2 thermistor detects the temperature at the end section This thermistor controls the temperature so that t
405. s between 10 to 35 no condensation and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation B OPC Drum Like the toner and developer OPC drums should be stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10 to 35 C no condensation Be sure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high humidity chemicals and or their fumes C Drum Blade This item should be stored horizontally on a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10 to 35 and should also be protected against high humidity chemicals and or their fumes D Heat Roller Avoid places where the heat rollers may be subjected to high humidity chemicals and or their fumes E Cleaning Roller Avoid places where felt roller may be subjected to high humidity chemicals and or their fumes It should also be stored horizontally on a flat place F Copy Paper Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity After a package is opened be sure to place and store it in a storage bag 3 2 Checking and Cleaning the OPC Drum 1 Use of Gloves If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface the characteristics of the photosensitive drum may degrade affecting the quality of the copy image So do not touch the drum surface with your bare hands Handling Precautions As the OPC drum surface is very sensitive be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and removing it so as not to damage its s
406. s between the PLG board and the SYS board open circuited or connector dis connected Yes Replace the harness and re connect the connector No Replace the PLG board Replace the SYS board 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 14 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 9 Finisher Related Service Call CB1 Feed motor is abnormal Procedure 1 Is feed motor 2 M8 operating in reverse at the specified timing No e Replace the feed motor or finisher controller board Yes Is the shutter correctly coupled to the shutter upper lower bars No Couple properly Yes Y Try turning the feed roller 2 in reverse by hand Do the shutter upper lower bars move up and down No Correct the mechanism from the shutter upper lower bars up to the gears of feed roller 2 Yes y Is the shutter close detection switch MS4 normal No Replace the switch Yes Replace the finisher controller board Procedure 2 Is the feed motor 2 M8 operating in reverse at the specified timing No Replace the transport motor or finisher controller board Yes Is the shutter correctly coupled to the shutter upper lower bars No Couple properly Yes Y Try turning the feed roller 2 in reverse by hand Do the shutter upper lower bars move up and down No __ Correct the mechanism from the shutter upper lower bars up to the gears of transport roller 2 Yes Y Is the shutte
407. s charger wire the air around the wire is ionized electrostatically charged The ionized air is attracted to the drum s sur face This phenomenon is referred to as corona discharge In the dark the surface of the drum is negatively minus charged using the principle of corona discharge Charger wire cleaner The charger wire cleaner moves backwards and forwards to clean the charger wire after the power is turned ON and after more than 2000 continuous copies have been made since the door switch is turned ON or from the previous cleaning operation Discharge LED Discharge refers to the process of reducing or eliminating the electrostatic charge left on the photo sensitive element after the charging and the transfer processes The function of the discharge LED is to lower the electrical resistance of the photosensitive surface that was left over after the exposure and transfer processes The LED device is a light source The LED has two effects a cleaning effect and pre exposure effect The cleaning effect neutralizes and eliminates the residual charge on the surface of the photosensitive element while the pre exposure effect maintains a fixed photosensitive surface potential before the charging process is again initiated 6570 5570 DRUM 10 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 10 3 Disassembly and Replacement A Drum Connector 1 Remove the cleaner unit Refer to 13 3 A 2 Disconnect the connector from the drum ther misto
408. s it is and see what happens Yes Check the circuit pattern around the PFC microcomputer 1221 for open or short circuits e Replace the PFC microcomputer or LGC board if this trouble occurs frequently CD1 Fur brush motor lock error 1 Check whether the fur brush has become locked mechanically Are there any foreign objects Are there any toner clumps in the transport section Check whether connectors on the LGC board are come off or the pins disconnected etc Replace the brush motor Replace the LGC board BOD CD2 Toner auger motor lock error 1 Check whether the auger has become locked mechanically Are there any foreign objects Are there any toner clumps in the transport section Check whether connectors on the LGC board are come off or the pins disconnected etc Replace the auger motor Replace LGC board 95 R 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 12 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC F10 HDD formatting error 1 2 Perform the HDD formatting Setting Mode 08 gt 690 gt 2 Make sure that the HDD is mounted Make sure that a dedicated HDD is mounted Make sure that the HDD connector pins are not bent Check HDD connector J106 ont the SYS board for disconnection Replace the harness Replace the HDD Replace the SYS board 4 8 Laser Optical System Related Service Call CA1 Polygon mirror motor is abnormal Is the polygon motor rotating No
409. scale for dirt Check the CCD board for breaks and short circuits Check the SLG board for breaks and short circuits Replace the lens unit Replace the SLG board No the lamp connectors for disconnection Check the thermostat to see if it has blown Check electrical continuity of the lamp Check SLG board connector pins J9 22 23 24 25 and 26 for disconnection and the harness for breaks and short circuits Check the SLG board for breaks and short circuits Replace the SLG board Replace the lamp regulator 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 2 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 2 Process System Related Service Call C36 Main charger wire cleaning operation abnormal 1 Check the main charger s the main charger disconnected Check the cleaning motor Is the motor operating Replace the LGC board TS C37 Transfer belt operation abnormal 1 Check the transfer belt Are the connectors disconnected Are the contact switche and separation switche normal Replace the LGC board TS Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 3 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 3 Fuser Related Service Call C41 Thermistor abnormal or heater disconnection at power ON Note Before carrying out checks 1 and 2 below first disconnect the power cord to prevent the danger of electric shock 1 Check the thermistor Are the connectors disconnected Are the main and sub end sectio
410. sec 10 10 min 5 150 sec 11 15 min 206 Timer for switching from All 12 JPN 0 20 0 3 min 7 40 min 14 110 min 1 Ready mode to Auto Power 12 UC 1 5 min 8 50 min 15 120 min Shut OFF 12 EUR 2 10 min 9 60 min 16 150 min US Energy Star Compliance 3 15 min 10 70 min 17 180 min 4 20 min 11 80 min 18 210 min 20 Others 5 25 min 12 90 min 19 240 min 6 30 min 13 100 min 20 Disabled 209 Timer for Print job start up All 1 1 10 1to 10 Set number X 15 seconds 1 time from copy mode 220 Message display language All 0 0 2 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 1 priority After setting the desired language turn the machine power OFF then ON to change the current language in the display Note the customer can change the language from the display using the ADJUST icon key 223 Copy or Printer priority All 0 0 1 0 Copy Mode can interrupt the Print mode during 1 mode a print job 1 Copy Mode cannot interrupt the Print Mode during a print job 224 Bypass paper size selection All 0 255 Undefined Select a paper size from the display ICON list of 1 225 LCF upper paper size selection 0 255 Letter paper sizes The range changes with the paper 226 PFP upper paper size All 0 255 Letter R size selected selection A4 R 227 PFP middle paper size All 0 255 Legal A3 selection 228 PFP lower paper size All 0 255 Ledger A4 selection 229 Paper size A3 length width All 420 X 297 182 432 420 X
411. sed image is output 3 Editing operations Trimming masking and negative positive reversal functions are accomplished a Trimming With the rectangular area signal the image signals inside the rectangular area are left and other image signals are erased b Masking Using the rectangular area signal the image data inside the rectangular area are erased with other image signals left c Negative positive reversal This function reverses image data from negative to positive or vice versa on the entire area 6570 5570 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 4 Gamma correction processing This function is used to correct the input output characteristics of the scanner printer so that image signals are obtained which have input output characteristics matching a particular copying mode b Tone processing This function works to process tone so that faithful reproduction of halftone images such as photo graphs are accomplished 6 External output system interface This function performs the output control of the output interface for the SYS board PWA F SYS 300 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 7 6570 5570 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 4 PLG Board PWA F PLG 300 6 4 1 Features 1 The image processing ASICs are controlled by CPUs mounted on the PLG board PWA F PLG 300 and the LGC board PWA F LGC 300 2 The image processing functions of the PLG board work to accomplish the following e Smoothing processing e External input
412. sfer begins 1 Transfer Plus bias is applied to the power supply roller and the transfer belt is charged to have a plus bias This causes an electric field E to form between the transfer belt plus charge and the aluminum layer earth of the drum substrate This in turn polarizes the paper as shown in the figure Tone is transferred to the paper by electro static attraction acting between the toner minus charge and the polarization charge plus charge on the top surface of the pa per 2 Separation The paper is held in contact against the belt and separated from the drum by electro static attraction acting between the belt plus charge and the polarization charge minus charge on the bottom surface of the paper Drum Transfer belt Paper Transfer belt Combined use of transfer belt and separation claw To prevent the copy paper from failing to be separated during the operation due to incom plete transfer belt charging or absorption of mois ture and thus jamming up the cleaner a sepa ration claw mechanically separates any copy paper which fails to be separated Separation claw Rotation of drum aoo Paper VG Transfer belt 6570 5570 COPYING PROCESS Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 7 Fixing Toner is melted into the fibers of the paper with the application of heat and pressure Method X Melting point of the toner is 100 C 110 C 1 Heat The upp
413. sheet at a time Original capacity automatic document feeder TEE A4 A4 R A5 R LT LT R ST R 60 sheets LG 35 sheets A3 LD 30 sheets e Paper capacity automatic duplexing unit I Mere e d ERR E sido 60 sheets Our company recommended paper 80 g m e Toner supply Automatic density detection and replenishment Toner hopper supply e Exposure control Automatic control and manually selectable 11 steps Weight eee Copier 250 kg 8070 6570 5570 4580 SPECIFICATIONS 1 2A Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC e Power AC115V 20A AC 220 240V 10A Power consumption 2 0 kW or less The power of the automatic document feeder automatic duplexing unit and LCF is supplied from the copier body e Total counter Mechanical total counter Machine size Refer to the figure below 920mm 1111mm e The specifications and external appearance are subject to change without notice in the interest of product improvement Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 3 8070 6570 5570 4580 SPECIFICATIONS 1 2 Accessories Remarks Unpacking Instructions Operators Manual Except MJD Drum Drum cover CS card For MJD Sheet CE Original feed tray Set up report For NAD MJD 1 3 Options DP4580 5570 6570 8070 DP5500 6500 8000 Finisher MJ
414. shown now and press the SET key or the INTERRUPT key If you want to stop the original at the exit side of the ADF key in a number larger than the one shown now and press the SET key or the INTERRUPT key 1 step Approx 1mm adjustable Allowable input values 0 15 With an original set the original feed tray if you press the ENERGY SAVER key original is fed in and copied 5 After adjustment is completed press the 0 and 9 keys simultaneously to go into the normal copy mode 1 22 4 Adjustment of leading edge position for ADF at the Time of Reversing If the original fed from the ADF has not stopped in the preset position after reversing make adjustment using the following procedure While pressing the 0 and 5 keys on the copier s control panel simultaneously turn on the power switch After confirming that TEST MODE is shown on the display key in 3 5 and 1 and press the START key 8 To make the original stop at the feed side of the ADF key in a number smaller than the one shown now and press the SET key or the INTERRUPT key If you want to stop the original at the exit side of the ADF key in a number larger than the one shown now and press the SET key or the INTERRUPT key 1 step Approx 2mm adjustable Allowable input values 0 15 With an original set on the original feed tray if you press the ENERGY SAVER key an original is fed in and copied 5 After adjust
415. sitive drum The resistance of the drum s semi conductive outer layer changes depending on the strength of the incident light Time t e When the incident light is strong its resist ance decreases and the photosensitive drum becomes a conductor e When the incident light is weak the resist ance increases and the photosensitive drum becomes an insulator 500 Surface potential V Formation of Latent Image is performed in the following manner The minus negative poten tial on the drum surface corresponding to the black areas of the original document are re Discharge Charging moved neutralized by light from the scanner 1000 process optics system while the minus charge remains on the surface of the drum corresponding to the white areas of the original document The resultant image which the human eye cannot see is called Latent Image White area of original Electric potential of the photosensitive drum Main charger T Charging Charging is the process of uniformly applying a charge to the surface of the photosensitive drum The minus negative electrostatic charge pro duced by the charge corona assembly is ap plied to the charge corona grid Its purpose is to produce a uniform minus negative electro static charge across the photosensitive drum surface The Grid Control Circuit that is part of Discharge Grid control circuit the Discharge Transformer ultimately de
416. sor PC board PWA F SNS 300 Laser PC board K PWA F LDR 300 C 2 Electrical parts except motors PC boards 1 1 1 A M 2 2 2 S Laser unit Rear side No Name Symbol 1 Galvanomirror ASM GALVA GLV 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 12 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC C 3 Motors Laser unit Rear side Name Polygon mirror motor POL MOT Laser unit fan LSU FAN MOT D System Unit 0 1 boards System unit Rear side Name Symbol System PC board PWA F SYS 300 SYS Mother board PWA F MTB 300 MTB Hard disk HDD HDD LAN printer board or SCSI board option LAN or SCSI NIC board option for LAN printer board NIC Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 13 6570 5570 OUTLINE D 2 Motor 227 System unit SI Rear side No Name Symbol 1 System fan motor FAN SYS M7 E ADU E 1 PC board Rear side No Name Symbol 1 ADU PC board PWA F ADU 300 ADU 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 14 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 DC electrical parts except motors PC boards Rear side 2 o o o1 o Transport switch TR2 SW End switch END SW Transport switch 1 TR1 SW Transport clutch TR CLT Reverse clutch REV CLT Guide solenoid GID SOL Stack clutch STK CLT Feed switch FED SW Empty switch EMP SW Aligning switch RGT SW Aligning clutch RGT CL
417. sor is broken so replace it No Measure the voltage across J19 1 and J19 2 on the finisher controller board Is it 24V No Replace the finisher controller board Yes y Check and correct the wiring between J19 of the finisher controller board and J1 of the saddle stitcher controller board Replace the saddle stitcher controller board if the wiring is normal Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 4 27 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING Procedure 2 Check the switch actuator of the front door Are the switch and the sensor being working properly No Connect the connector Yes 1 Check the front door switch Is the switch normal No Replace the switch Yes Measure J11 12 voltage of the saddle switcher controller with the front door open Is 5V being supplied No Replace the saddle stitcher controller board Yes The sensor is broken so replace it Procedure 3 Check the switch actuator of the exit door Are the switch and the sensor being working properly No Correct the mechanism Yes Check the exit door switch Is the switch normal No Replace the switch Yes Measure J11 9 voltage access of the saddle stitcher with the exit door is open Is it 2 Yes the sensor is broken so replace it No Replace the saddle stitcher controller board 8070 6570 5570 4580 TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 28 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC CC2 Communication error between finishe
418. ss make a copy and check the reproduction ratio Tighten the 2 lens unit screws to fix in place Remove the pins for adjusting the lens magnification Re attach the lens cover and original glass 1 67 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 13 Adjusting Horizontal Deviation Caused by Paper Feed Procedure Whenthe center of the image moves to the rear Whenthe center of the image moves to the front side Move the guide to the rear side direction side Move the guide to the front side direction of arrow of arrow B ay Direction of Direction of paper move paper move ment Center ment Center E Front Front e Manual feed LCF feed 7 c i FF I _ wa 2 Front side guide B A 4 Rear side also shift in the same direction o 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 68 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 14 Changing the Paper Size 1 14 1 LCF paper sizes 1 Draw out the LCF unit and remove the manual feed unit 2 Attach the stay guides to match the size of the paper used Note In case of B5 size The bracket must be fastened onto the LCF door cover by 2 screws only in the case of B5 size Bracket
419. stant Any tendencies for variances in illumination is monitored and controlled by a series of detection and comparison circuits Its principle control is as follows 1 AC115V or 220 240V power source is rectified to provide DC160V or 310 340V which is used as the power source for the exposure lamp 2 The PWM1 signal for light adjustment is averaged by an integration circuit and provides reference VS for feedback control of the lamp regulator circuit 8 When the oscillator circuit is triggered by EXPO ON OFF signal it generates a lamp drive PWM2 signal which turns on the lamp drive transistor causing current to flow through Capacitor C gt Exposure lamp L gt Primary side of T1 P gt Lamp drive transistor gt Capaci tor C This causes current 12 proportional to the winding ratio of T1 and the rate of change of l to generated on the secondary side of T1 s 4 The amount of lamp current converted to detection voltage VD by a current detection circuit is com pared with the smoothing signal VS of PWM 1 signal from the logic circuit by a comparison circuit whose difference signal VF is fed back to the oscillator circuit Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 11 6570 5570 SCANNER 5 When the lamp drive transistor Tr1 is turned OFF the counter electromotive force of T1 causes current to flow along Primary winding of transformer T1 P gt Freewheeling diode D1 Exposure lamp L gt Primary winding of
420. sure lamp load i Heater lamp load Breaker Live _ Main switch F1 6 oO o0 MP o o oO Oo e Door switch Neutral Switching power supply Frequecy reactor 3 3VA C GNDA C 3 3V 5 1VB D E H I GNDB D E H I 5 1V 12VA C DGA C 12V 6570 5570 POWER SUPPLY 17 2 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA Power supply sequence eet a OFF AC input 8 dq 0 700 ms or less Within 10 ms 3 2V or more 4 95V or more 5 1V MAIN PN 20ms 50ms 4 95V or more 20 RENS or or 10 ms 120ms more more os PWR DN d iL PPM 0 200 Smsormore 0 1 11 4V more 4 pe Nu gt 12V MAIN Due 2 Wj 11 4V SPP 0 200 ms 21 6V or more Pd We RM 7 G 21 6V or more 4 95V or more 12751 eem C 4 95V or more 21 6V or more 34 2V or more I A 5 2 o lt S 4 3 i oO So o N Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 17 3 6570 5570 POWER SUPPPLY 18 PC BOARD 1 PWA F SYS 300
421. system interface mage area control e Laser related control 6 4 2 Functional description of the image processing circuit An image processing ASIC of the PLG board works to accomplish the following 1 Smoothing processing This function works to eliminate jaggedness occurring on character edges of images input from the external input system interface for smooth image output 2 External input system interface This function works to control the input interface to the SYS board PWA F SYS 300 3 Image area control This function works to set the effective image area of four directions of output image 4 Laser related control This function works to control the DAPC Double Auto Power Control and to adjust the multiple laser beam position 6570 5570 IMAGE PROCESSING 6 8 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 6 5 Scanner Light that is reflected from the original document s surface is directed to the CCD where photovoltaic conversion occurs During this operation optical image data are converted into electrical signals which are then converted into digital signals by the A D conversion portion of the image processing system Signal Shading amplification i compensation To next stage 1 Photo voltaic conversion A conversion from optical signals to electrical signals performed by the CCD See Chapter 7 6 1 2 Signal amplification The amplification of the electrical signals from the CCD 3 A D conversion The conversion from Anal
422. t 0 9 Left digit Right hand digit 2nd digit 1 entered 1 Text Photo fixed at the optimum level do not enter values other than 1 for the right hand digit Left hand digit 1st digit entered 0 Default value is used 1 9 Increasing the value setting enhances the image sharpness Do not set to values other than these 1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 621 HPF High Pass Filter strength setting Normally set it to 2 this places the filtering in the optimum range for the Photo mode Copier Photo 2 Right digit 0 9 Left digit Right hand digit 2nd digit 1 entered 2 Photo fixed at the optimum level do not enter values other than 2 for the right hand digit Left hand digit 1st digit entered 0 Default value is used 1 9 Increasing the value setting enhances the image sharpness Do not set to values other than these 2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 92 622 HPF High Pass Filter strength setting Normally set it to 3 this places the filtering in the optimum range for the Text mode Copier Text 3 Right digit 0 9 Left digit Right hand digit 2nd digit 1 entered 3 Text fixed at the optimum level do not enter values other than 3 for the right hand digit Left hand digit 1st digit entered 0 Default value is used 1 9 Increasing the value setting enhances the image sharpness Do not set to values other than
423. t 0 512 WAS VEO V0 E1NO0d sod UNS 8590 TEN Tdd Em WEGE 8590 7 vrsaraa coag ON MEN aan Vrasod ON VOINNVI vrasaa aan 1 04 ON 8590 ETT ON Er 2500 LT series AS Personal Comp AND auo 2189525 0 045 FAN SYS 01844 TINN FANSSP 0A FANSON OA FANSSP 0A FANSON OA FAN2SP 0A FANZONOA FANISP 0A FANIONOA FAN2SP 0A FANZON OA FANISP 0A FANIONOA 113 1 am 1 1 aT 1 2 E 3 PWA LDR E GND GND E GND SLG FAN OPT FAN2 OPT FAN1 SLG FAN OPT FAN2 OPT FAN1 ang Y1O WLOL 5 2 wo SNC No YONOUIO rz viusod MS T 159 ddd 2 549 vi wsnar aNd 5 111 1 UT avo E ux IRON Low ony vonon s VERIS om MS W LSO ddd E en ona ON ONE OND OND OND 290 TMSSIV 14561 3 aan 2090 58154 152154 MS fr189 ddd 0 15444 VASE Vnisod ES VESLY ae 30 D sour Sour VANSI VEUASIV UNO Ez rz 0 son 11794198 son ane _ ong vrawan Venn H40 LAH Sd 10 VENIN n bre 00 ViHAWAH 1
424. t 57 LCF feed roller 400 24 340 lt 17 19 gt 58 LCF separation roller 400 514 424 340 lt P17 140 gt 59 Manual pick up roller 100 lt P18 119 gt 60 Manual feed roller 100 lt P18 115 gt 61 Manual separation roller 100 514 LCF lt P16 132 gt 62 Paper guide 63 Paper feed system drive gears 64 GCB bush and plastic bush D 65 Gear 0 15 66 Worm and worm wheel W 15 67 Worm shaft W 15 68 Wire pulley shaft Ww 15 Note When lubricating do not allow oil to come in contact the rollers belts and belt pulleys 8070 6570 5570 4580 MAINTENANCE 2 4 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC PERIODIC INSPECTION CHECK LIST For 8070 4580 cael Replace Check Remarks Category Item to check 440 000 copies 440 000 copies 280 000 copies 280 000 copies 1 090 while on lt Page Item gt 1 Overall unit 2 Main blade 440 1 280 lt P54 124 gt 3 Toner bag 100 Conducted by copier operator lt P57 129 gt Cleaner 4 Recovery blade A 2 5 Separation claw for Drum 440 O 3 280 lt 56 121 gt 6 Fur brush 440 280 lt P55 123 gt 7 Toner transport auger drive 13 8 Cleaner lower guide O 8 1 Toner adhesion amount sensor 22 8 2 Drum shaft bearing C 22 9 Discharge LED O 10 Drum shaft O Drum 11 Drum 440 4 280 lt 47 11 gt
425. t and then remove the separation belt roller Remove the 2 E rings and remove the drop roller 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 20A E ring collar gear amp pin 4 E ring 5 Bush E ring Bush 5 4 5 5 Drop roller Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 Remove the 3 E rings and collar 8 Draw out the shaft to the rear side 9 Replace the 4 separation belts W Pre stack discharge brush 1 Remove the ADU feed cover 2 Remove the 2 screws fixing the pre stack dis charge brush and then the pre stack discharge brush X Holding gate 1 Remove the ADU feed unit 2 Remove the feed drive unit 3 Remove the E ring and clutch unit 4 Remove the 2 front E rings each of the 2 gears and pins 5 Draw out arm F to the front side 6 Remove the 2 rear E rings each of the 2 gears and pins 7 Draw out arm R to the rear side Note For reassembling refer to the service hand book 1 15 2 Holding gate position adjust ment Discharge brush Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 21A 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 8 Slide the ho
426. t to aligning sensor OFF detection of scan size O I X Gc OO After completion of dummy exit the feed motor and transport motor start to operate in the forward direction and the aligning roller and transport belt rotate to start transport of the original standing by at the initial alignment position to the exposure position At this time detection of the scan size is started From the second original onwards the reversal motor also starts to rotate in the forward direction at the same time to start exit operation The number of pulses from start of transport of the original at the initial alignment position to when the trailing edge of the original passes the aligning sensor is counted to detect the length of the original The stop notice signal is set at the set timing of the stop notice signal At the point that the aligning sensor detects the trailing edge of the original the DF operation in progress signal is reset detection of the scan size is completed and the original size is determined also by the state of the width sensor that was stored to memory at completion of initial alignment If the original is a non standard size or the original size differs from that of the previously fed original the original size data is sent to the copier 6570 5570 ADF 16 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 5 Aligning sensor OFF to timing sensor OFF At the
427. t voltage analog value is measured on the A D input terminal of the CPU and the output voltage of the D A converter is varied to adjust the LED current in the voltage current conversion circuit comprising IC4 R16 and Q7 so that the output voltage of PTr is the required voltage The D A output voltage values at this time are values unique to each of the sensor elements and are stored to non volatile memory EEPROM IC11 6570 5570 ADF 16 40 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 16 10 2 5V power circuit diagram Lor 4 icis 1726 1 RR 1 ee 5 2 CN2 1 DC24V Vin Vo 4 I 1 24V GND CN2 2 PGND 11 d l 1 TP43 TP44 C38 202 C27 SGND PGND ti e 2 rae le V 777 PGND PGND SGND SGND This circuit generates the 5VDC voltage to be supplied to the CPU logic IC and other components 24VDC input from CN2 is converted to 5V by switching regulator IC15 ZD2 CP1 and D3 are used to protect 15 Resistor R6 limits the input rush current to C43 when the power is turned ON 16 10 3 Rush current limiting circuit diagram ADF open SW D 6 gt DF sw t CN6 8 1 Feed cover SW 4 2 gt CN5 4 Dr swi jE R68 703 4 cl2 CN5 5 DF Sw2 1 R71 2 2 11 Qo p MEN Exit cover SW Tem tL 1k x B Y gt Jor swap 2 5 Hess CN7 2 PGND H gt 2 PGND PGND R67
428. take off the rear bushing and then remove the upper align ing roller 4 When replacing the roller also remove the 2 set screws 2 E rings pulley bearing bush gear and pin B Upper brush 1 Remove the developer and one brush Fixing Screw 2 Remove the upper brush in the direction of the arrow C Lower aligning roller 1 Remove the aligning unit 2 Remove the paper guide 2 screws 3 Remove the spring hooked on the roller end 2 screws 4 Remove the clip on the front side and slide the roller together with the bush and bearing to the front side draw out the rear side from the frame Then lift the roller upwards to remove 5 When replacing the roller remove the gear and the pin 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM er Tes Developer stay 279 _ Front side C 2 o Brush fixing Y T 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA D Lower brush 1 Remove the developer and the cleaner After drawing out the transfer belt unit remove the brush fixing screw 2 Remove the lower brush in the direction of the arrow Note When assembling insert the projection of the brush securely in the hole i
429. target 3 6 failed gt make a connection from PC Connect with dial up network See procedure 3 and the display changes as follows Firmware Version Up Mode Target 43 Recovery mode target 3 6 failed Press START key to install new firmware Further procedure is the same as normal sequence 6 4 Screen Details The following screen will be displayed in 3 9 mode Power On U Firmware Version Up Mode Firmware Version Up Mode Cannot connect with PC gt Make a connection from PC d Failed to install a new firmware Connectio Failure Updated data version number ll Connected P Firmware Version Up Mode Change the number by pressing key Target Target 1 Target 6 Established serial connection with PC gt Press Press START key to install new Ten Key firmware Target 1 Press START ig Press CLEAR Key Key Qo 2 Press CLEAR Key UL Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Program canceled U Power Off 6 10 In the case of 1 6 O Press Start Key Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Installing a new firmware reading a file ___ Message will change as follows reading a file checking a read file Successful Failed Press CLEAR checking the device ea G 4 setting flags erasing the device
430. tatus Check the position direction and skew of the gradation pattern on the original glass and repeat the steps from 5 4 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 53 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT Keys used in operation 0 5 PWR 2 A3 Select the casette ENERGY SAVER Prints out the 33 0 gradation pattern Place the original Digital Keys Input the code START Starts the adjustment Ends the adjustment Clear the adjustment error Return to 1 to repeat adjustment 0 9 Exit the adjustment mode 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT Display messages 100 TEST MODE 100 WAIT WARMING UP 100 COPYING 100 580 TEST MODE WAIT Normal Warming up 100 TEST MODE Abnormal Clear using C key 100 580 TEST MODE ERROR 1 54 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 8 Sharpness HPF Adjustment adjustment mode 05 If the user wants to change the image sharpness to softer or harder adjust the HPF intensity in Code HPF intensity 2nd digit Image mode Adjustment item Remarks Text Photo Photo Text 620 621 622 Sharpness setting 1st digit 1 fixed Text Photo 2 fixed Photo 3 fixed Text 0 Use default value 1 9 Change the intensity If the value is increased the sharp ness is increased
431. ter transformer mines the voltage potential on the drum sur face See illustration 8070 6570 5570 4580 COPYING PROCESS 3 2 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 3 Scanning Scanning is the process of directing light at the original document Part of the scanning proc ess is the conversion of reflected light from the original document into electrical signals The Charged Coupled Device CCD receives light from the optics area and converts them into electrical signals that are sent to the Im age Processing System for further processing into digital signals Printing Latent Image forming Printing is the process of converting image sig nals from the image processor into optical signals and then directing these signals to wards the photosensitive drum via a laser unit This action produces an electrostatic latent image on the surface of the drum Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Logic PC board Light intensity Value of atthe CCD signals to be photodetector output Light 255 Contrast differ ences in light and dark is divided into 256 steps Dark 0 Printing control PC board Semiconductor laser Photo sensitive drum 6570 5570 COPYING PROCESS 5 Development Development is the process of converting the electrostatic latent image into visible image The developing agent is brushed unto the surface of the photosensitive drum by means of magnetic roller s The developing agent commonl
432. ter All All 0 0 99999999 Set this counter to 0 anytime the drum is replaced 1 The count is determined by the amount of time the drum drive motor runs 404 Developer counter All All 0 0 99999999 Set this counter to 0 anytime the material is 1 replaced The count is the total of all copies and prints including all test mode copies and prints 407 Fuser pre running time The All 8 0 14 0 120 sec 5 195 sec 10 270 sec 1 time allowed for the fuser to 1 135 sec 6 210sec 11 285 sec rotate during the warm up 2 150 sec 7 225 sec 12 300 sec mode 3 165 sec 8 240 sec 13 315 sec 4 180 sec 9 255 sec 14 330 sec 410 Fuser temperature in the Printer 8 0 15 0 173 6 195 12 212 1 Print mode 1 180 C 7 198 C 13 215 2 183 C 8 200 C 14 218 3 186 C 9 203 C 15 221 C 4 189 C 10 206 C 5 192 C 11 209 C 411 Fuser temperature when the All All 8 0 15 0 173 6 195 12 212 1 copier is Ready 1 180 C 7 198 C 13 215 2 183 C 8 200 C 14 218 3 186 C 9 203 C 15 221 C 4 189 C 10 206 C 5 192 C 11 209 C 412 Fuser temperature in the All 3 0 15 0 160 C 6 183 C 12 200 C 1 ENERGY SAVER mode 1 164 C 7 186 C 13 203 C 2 167 8 189 14 206 C 3 170 C 9 192 C 15 210 4 173 C 10 195 C 5 180 C 11 198 C 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT 1 28 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 08 MODE IMAGE ALLOWABLE PROCE CODE NAME MODE MOD
433. termined there is no paper The add paper indication blinks During copying sheets of paper are fed and when the paper supply becomes low The tray up switch goes OFF The PFC turns on the tray motor The tray moves up The tray up switch come ON gt The tray motor stops e During copying when the empty switch goes OFF despite the tray up switch being ON It is determined there is no paper The add paper indication blinks Copying stops 6570 5570 COPIER OPERATION 4 6 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC A 2 BYPASS MISFEED 9 During sheet bypass copying The manual pick up solenoid has been turned ON The paper stop switch 1 comes ON If the paper stop switch 1 does not come ON within the specified time E12 BYPASS MISFEED The BYPASS MISFEED symbol is displayed Copying cannot be started Clearing method Remove the paper from the sheet bypass guide The manual feed switch goes OFF A 3 INSERT KEY COPY COUNTER e f the key copy counter optional is installed in the copier and is then withdrawn The INSERT KEY COPY COUNTER display appears Copying is not possible e f the counter is withdrawn during copying The machine will stop after the paper being copied has exited B 1 CLEAR PAPER V Leading edge jam detection by the exit switch E01 The aligning motor is turned ON L 1 144 sec ON The exit switch comes ON Aligning motor When the exit switch has not c
434. th rib ILZ qu 0 dn dec Sectional view A Paper feed Mylar 1 24 Paper feed mylar 2 0 0 5mm 0 0 5mm for bent area Paper feed Mylar 2 for end face 0 0 5mm 0 0 5mm for end face Paper feed Mylar 2 for bent area Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 16 77 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADF 16 13 1 PWA F LGC 794 ozi zL9x1s 621 v 021 219 15 0121 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADF 16 78 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA 2 PWA F SEN 794 5 9 gt e Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 16 79 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADF 17 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 17 1 Configuration The power supply unit comprises an AC filter and isolated DC output circuit 1 AC filter This filter removes external electrical noise and prevents leakage of electrical noise generated within the machine to the outside 2 DC output circuit DC output is divided into the following two lines 1 Main line This power supply is used by the entire machine during image format
435. the Thickness of the Magnetic Brush leveler ee 1 75 17 Adjusting the Gap between the Drum and Sleeve 18 Adjustment of Developer Polarity Position 119 Adjusting the Heat Roller Pressure 20 Setting the Heat Roller Temperature and Heat Roller Pressure 21 Adjusting the Fuser Inlet Guide x kr ocho ae sok zb E E xc 8070 6570 5570 4580 CONTENTS 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 108 Adj stment o ADF ITE 1 22 1 Adjustment of skew with ADF 1 22 2 Adjustment of ADF horizontal deviation caused for ADF 1 22 3 Adjustment of ADF leading edge position sssssssseeeenee 1 22 4 Adjustment of leading edge position for ADF at the Time of Reversing 1 22 5 Adjustment of magnetic catches installation 1 22 6 Adjustment of the separation area 1 22 7 EEPROM Initialization Sensor Adjustment and Test Mode 1 23 Key Copy Counter MU 8 MU 10 1 24 Fine Adjustment of Binding Position Folding Position 1 25 Adjustment of RADF Height hvert D e DEC ET o de 1 26 Flapper Solenoid Adjustment antt emet aN tenete G 2 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE 0 44 00041 n tns tns sn anena nenene 2 1 2 1 Inspection every 440 000 Copies 8070 every 400 000 Copies 6570 every 340 000 Copies 5570 every 280 000 Copies 4580
436. the reversal flapper to the reversal side After the exit sensor turns ON the original is transported for a specified number of pulses At the point where the leading edge of the original is nipped by the reversal roller lower passage roller by a specified amount or more the transport motor and the reversal motor stop 18 Start of reversal to flapper solenoid OFF After forward rotation transport is completed the transport motor starts to rotate in the reverse direc tion and the reversal motor starts to rotate in the forward direction to rotate the transport belt and reversal roller to start reversal of the original The original passes along the reversal path and is transported onto the original glass At the point when the trailing edge of the original has passed the reversal flapper the flapper solenoid turns OFF and the reversal flapper is switched to the exit side 19 Setting the original at the exposure position completion of No 1 side feed OPE 9 Xe C oc The original is transported by a specified number of pulses after reversal starts At the point where the original arrives at the exposure position the transport motor and reversal motor stop and feed is com pleted The original is stopped in contact with the original stopper and the rear side of the original is set 6570 5570 ADF 16 18 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 20 Setting the original at the exp
437. the wire winding pulleies front and Elevator wire Elevater wire vA Wire wind rear sides from the LCF unit together with the Wire winding pully C ing pully flange Flange QI Flan 6 Remove the gear claw You can now disassem ble the gear and flange and remove the eleva tor wire Claw Clip Clip 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 20 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 Remove the 4 clips front and rear fastening the elevator wire 8 Remove the 2 elevator wire clips each on the front and rear sides and the 4 elevator wires Notes Precautions when installing the elevator wires 1 Judging the elevator wires The longer of the 2 elevator wires is 1 LCF door cover side and the shorter is 2 the LCF paper feed side 2 Taking up the elevator wires Take up the 2 elevator wires 1 2 so that the following relationships are satis fied for each of the four pulleys to Inner side Inner side Lower side Outer side Upper side Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 9 Elevator wire lt gt Inner groove Outer groove 21 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 3 Securing the elevator wire gears Insert elevator wire 1 into the gear groove followed by elevator wire 2 4 Installing the gears
438. tic spring clutches Name Drives vertical movement of the manual pick up roller Function Remarks TR CLT ADU transport clutch Drives the paper transport of the ADU REV CLT ADU reverse clutch Exits the copy in reverse STK CLT ADU stack clutch Stacks the copy in the ADU RGT CLT ADU aligning clutch Aligns the paper feeding of the ADU FED CLT ADU feed clutch Drives the ADU paper feeding FD2 CLT PFP upper feed clutch Feeds the PFP upper cassette paper RGT2 CLT PFP upper aligning clutch Transfers drive to the PFP upper aligning roller RGT3 CLT middle aligning clutch Transfers drive to the PFP middle aligning roller RGT4 SW PFP lower aligning clutch Transfers drive to the PFP lower aligning roller FD3 CLT middle feed clutch Feeds the PFP middle cassette paper 4 Counters FD4 CLT PFP lower feed clutch Name Feeds the PFP lower cassette paper Function Remarks T CTR total counter Total counter 5 Switches Name Function Remarks APS1 6 automatic paper size detector Detects the paper size HOME SW home switch Detects the optical system home position TR2 SW transport switch Detects a paper in the ADU transporting section END SW end switch Detects the end guide position of the ADU TR1 SW transport switch 1 Detects a paper in the
439. tinuously press START key and repeat the operation from step 5 After finished turn off the power or depress CLEAR key Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Updated data version number Firmware version up completed version 001 003 gt Press START key to continue In the case of 1 3 The following screen is displayed after finished Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Firmware version up completed Target Version 1 601 00N 2 002 000 3 002 031 4 003 022 5 003 6 UE M Updated data version numbers 8 Press CLEAR key to cancel downloading on the way However it becomes unable to cancel after start of elimination process of flash ROM Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 Program canceled 9 When failing in update the following error message is displayed If the error occurs Recovery Mode starts automatically when you turns on the power next time See 10 Recovery mode ERROR MESSAGE file read error Firmware Version Up Mode Target 1 ge file information error T unfit device Failed to install a new firmware file read err device erase error device write error verify error cannot set flags 10 Recovery mode When you turns on the power after an error occurs you ll see following display Firmware Version Up Mode Recovery mode
440. tions 16 35 Guide roller or A Developer 36 Duct filter Q 5 37 Toner filter 440 280 lt P48 112 gt 38 Toner hopper drive worm gear Ww 42 Aligning roller 5 43 Paper guide C 5 44 Brush 2 A feed 46 Paper feed system drive gears section tooth faces 47 Aligning unit support bush 4 1 and pressurizing leaf spring 69 Upper heat roller Teflon roller 440 8 280 lt P31 117 gt 70 Lower heat roller rubber roller 440 8 280 lt P31 119 gt 71 Upper separation claw 440 9 280 lt P32 120 gt 72 Lower separation claw 5 9 73 Cleaning roller 1 440 10 280 lt P33 17 gt 74 Cleaning roller 2 440 10 280 lt P33 15 gt Fuser unit 75 Cleaning roller 3 440 10 280 lt P33 116 gt 75 1 Cleaning roller 4 440 10 280 lt P32 137 gt 76 Upper and lower thermistors 5 77 Heat roller entrance guide 78 Heat roller exit guide 79 Paper dust recovery bracket 80 Exit roller 81 Heat roller cleaning roller drive 6 gear 82 Cleaning roller bush 6 83 Transfer 440 17 280 lt P29 142 gt 84 Transfer belt power supply 440 18 roller 280 lt P29 138 gt 85 Transfer belt cleaning brush 440 19 280 lt P29 18 gt Transfer 86 Transfer belt drive roller 5 belt 87 Transfer belt follower roller 5 88 Transfer belt separation 5 auxiliary roller 89 1 Transfer belt cleaning blade 440 21 280 lt 29 127 gt 89 2 Flicker per
441. to 1 Photo 2 Text 1 600 Electronic access code Copier All 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Note When this is enabled it How to set the Electronic Access Codes is does not provide provided in the separate operators manual that is Electronic Access control included with the copier at the time of shipping The for the Print mode information is also provided in this service manual 602 Automatic Energy Saver Icon All 0 0 1 0 OFF Icons are NOT in the display 1 Automatic Power OFF Icon Australia The customer cannot adjust the Energy Saver Taiwan and Auto Power Off times They can only be set Saudi by a service technician using 08 205 and 08 206 Arabia Asian 1 ON Icons are in the display Region The customer can adjust the Energy Saver and Power OFF times 1 JPN UC EUR 603 Automatic duplexing mode Copier All 0 0 3 0 Displayed 1 1 Single sided to Double sided 2 Double sided to Double sided 3 User selection 604 APS Auto Paper Size Copier All 0 0 2 0 APS mode 1 AMS mode 3 None 1 AMS Auto Magnification Selection Mode priority at power on 607 RADF priority mode at Copier All 0 0 1 0 START key place originals in the tray then 1 power on press the START key 1 Auto Start machine automatically starts copying when originals are placed 1 at a time in the RADF 611 Book double sided original Copier 0 0 1 0 Opening book copying from front 1 selection 1 Opening book copying from back 613
442. to rise higher than the controlled temperature of the paper contact area Therefore the circuit is so de vised that if the temperature in the no paper contact area rises to 240 C the second thermistor detects this causing the heater to be turned OFF immediately regardless of the temperature in the paper contact area Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 14 5 6570 5570 FUSER UNIT Reference supplement The following fusing control mode is available only for 8070 Relationship between the upper heat roller surface temperature and the fusing control mode Temperature Fusing control status More than 200 C Heater lamp OFF From 170 C to 200 C Lamp ON normal copying speed From 160 C to 170 C Copying speed is slower and the copying is continuous Less than 160 C Copying discontinues and waiting for standby to resume copying Waiting for Standby standby Warm up Standby 200 C Copying Copying lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt SEI 200 Heat roller TM temperature distribution 160 Heater lamp ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON Copying speed 0 0 0 80 65 80 65 0 80 65 0 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 14 5 1 8070 6570 5570 4580 FUSER UNIT 14 4 2 Detection of thermistor burnout Since thermistor burnout detection circuits of the thermistor 1 and 2 are common it is expl
443. toner sensor For making good copies it is necessary to keep the carrier and toner in the developer unit at a fixed ratio The auto toner sensor monitor the toner density in the developer material by operating a mag netic bridge circuit When the toner density drops a fixed amount of toner is added from the toner hopper Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 3 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 2 2 Toner hopper unit When there is little toner left in the toner hopper this status is detected and the ADD TONER symbol flashes The principle is as follows Toner h r Sensor lever A Magnetic sensor Magnet Toner empty switch 1 As shown in the left figure above there is a sensor lever on the inside of the toner hopper The lever is fitted with a magnet 2 There is a magnetic sensor toner empty switch on the outside of the toner hopper such as when the amount of toner in the hopper drops the sensor lever lowers which is detected by the magnet sensor The copier then requires toner to be added Sensor lever Sensor lever 3 The left figure above shows the sensor lever lifted by the toner 4 The right figure above shows the sensor lever down due to lack of toner and the magnetic sensor detecting the toner empty state 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 4 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 3 Developer Unit Drive Upper magnetic roller
444. tranformer T1 P This causes continuous current to flow through the exposure lamp L regardless of the drive transistor 7 1 being turned ON OFF Relay SW Thermostat O Exposure lamp 7 7 Capacitor C L gt O Rectification Current detection Comparison circuit Oscillator circuit EXPO ON OFF PWA SLG Integration circuit PWM1 PC Photo coupler Construction of lamp regulator circuit 6570 5570 SCANNER 7 12 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 7 6 Outline of Control 7 6 1 Photo voltaic conversion The purpose of photo voltaic conversion is to form electrical signals corresponding to the intensity of light reflected from the original A CCD is used for photo voltaic conversion CCDs are single chip photo voltaic conversion device in which several thousands of photosensing elements several microns square are arranged in a single line This copier uses a CCD having 7 500 of these photosensing elements The photosensor comprises a P layer N layer semiconductor Optical energy generates a minus charge on the P layer proportional to the optical energy and irradiation time The charge generated at the photosensor is transferred to the transfer area shifted from center to right and left in the figure below according to the transfer clock and is output from the CCD During this operation in order to increase the image transmission speed from CCD even numbered and odd numbered image signals are separated
445. uide cover Connector 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 15 10A Mar 1999 TOSHIBA C Width guide motor and width guide switch 1 Remove the stack guide unit 2 Disconnect the connector and remove the 2 Screws 3 Remove the 2 screws fixing the width guide motor to remove the width guide motor 4 Disconnect the connector and release the switch claw from the bracket to remove the width guide switch Note The position of the width guide switch is adjusted before the copier is shipped from the factory Do not remove the adjustment Screw D Length guide motor and length guide switch 1 Remove the stack guide unit 2 Disconnect the connector and remove the 2 Screws 3 Remove the 2 screws fixing the length guide motor and then remove the length guide mo tor 4 Disconnect the connector and release the switch claw from the bracket to remove the length guide switch E Stack empty switch position detection switch 1 1 Remove the stack guide unit 2 Disconnect the connector and release the switch claw from the bracket to remove the stack empty switch 3 Disconnect the connector and release the Switch claw from the bracket to remove the position detection switch 1 Length guid
446. unctions 1 Transfer belt unit The transfer belt is coated with a high precision flat rubber belt and has electrical resistance The transfer belt unit is divided into a belt support power supply section and a cleaning mechanism The belt support power supply section supports the belt and rotates to supply power and the cleaning mechanism scrapes of toner from the belt surface Transfer belt support power supply mechanism As shown in Figure 1 the transfer belt is supported by four rollers Voltage having a polarity opposite to that of the toner on the photosensitive drum is applied to the power supply roller The current flowing to the transfer belt is controlled to a constant current of 50 uA Though the applied voltage changes as current is constant the voltage change is normally within the range 3 to 5 kV A voltage probe is required for measurement To prevent danger do not use a digital voltmeter Transfer belt cleaning mechanism The cleaning mechanism has two functions a function for scraping off residual toner from the belt surface by the cleaning blade cleaning brush and recovery auger and a function for bringing the transfer belt into contact with and separating it from the drum Cleaning blade After the paper is separated remove any paper scraps and foreign objects remaining on the belt surface Cleaning brush Removes residual paper scraps and foreign matter from the belt surface after
447. unit test mode ADF unit test mode control No Initialization processing General purpose timer Set processing 16 24 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 16 7 2 Operation control Operation control Initial alignment One side feed control No 1 double sided transport control No 2 double sided transport control Double sided reversal control Eject control Dummy exit control Weight plate initialization control RETURN Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 16 25 6570 5570 ADF 16 7 3 Initial alignment control Initial alignment START No Aligning sensor non arrival jam Timing sensor accumulation jam No Aligning ON No Original on tray ji Aligning sensor OFF Timing sensor OFF Setting of jam pulse from start of initial alignment to aligning sensor ON Feed motor reverse rotation started Jam pulse cleared Setting of feed motor deceler ation request by aligning sensor ON interrupt deceler ation started after specified pulse drive L Feed motor OFF No Timing sensor OFF Setting of jam pulse from start of feed motor forward rotation to timing sensor ON Feed motor reverse rotation started Timing sensor ON Jam pulse cleared Setting of feed motor deceler ation request by aligning sensor ON interrupt deceler ation started after specified pulse drive 65
448. urface Be sure to apply patting powder lubricant to the entire surface of the drum and separation claws on the cleaner before installing the drum into the machine When the drum has been replaced with a new one the drum counter setting mode 08 code 401 must be cleared to 0 zero Notes 1 Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum cleaning blade and separation claws If the application of patting powder is neglected the drum and cleaning blade may be damaged 2 When paper fibers adhere to the cleaning blade edge they may reduce the cleaning efficiency and in addition may damage the blade and the drum Be sure to remove any fibers found adhering to the blade 9 Mar 2000 TOSHIBA gud 8070 6570 5570 4580 SUPPLIES 3 Installation of Copier and Storage of Drum Avoid installing the copier where it may be subjected to high temperature high humidity chemicals and or their fumes Do not leave drums in a brightly lit place for a long time Otherwise the drum will fatigue and will not produce sufficient image density immediately after being installed in the machine However this effect may decrease as time elapses Cleaning the Drum At periodic maintenance calls wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated cleaning cotton Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton dry soft pad so as not to scratch the drum surface inadvertently with your fingertips or nails
449. ush motor FUR MOT Main cleaning motor CLN MOT Drum motor DRM MOT Manual inlet fan motor SFB FAN MOT Toner motor TNR MOT Toner transport motor AUG2 MOT Developer motor DEV MOT o o1 o Aligning motor RGT MOT Heat roller motor HTR MOT Exit fan motor EXIT FAN MOT Heater fan motor HTR FAN MOT Developer fan motor DEV FAN MOT Duct in fan motor DUCT IN FAN MOT Duct out fan motor DUCT OUT FAN MOT ADU motor ADU MOT Transfer belt motor TRB MOT Transfer belt cam motor TRB CAM MOT Reversal fan motor REV FAN MOT Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 19 6570 5570 OUTLINE F 4 electrical parts Rear side Upper unit 2 o Door switch DOOR SW Main switch MAIN SW Fuse PC board PWA F FUS 351 Damp heater lower D HTR L Thermostat Heater lamp HTR LAMP Fuser thermostat THERMO 152 FUS EXIT door switch EXIT AC SW Fuser switch HTR SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 20 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC Lower Unit G 1 boards S Lower unit Rear side Name Logic PC board PWA F LGC 300 LCF PC board PWA F LCF 150 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 21 6570 5570 OUTLINE G 2 Lower unit Name DC electrical parts except motors PC boards DO Rear side Name
450. utput from the detection winding to DC signal Auto toner output Vars Magnetic resistance DC Auto toner i indi Detection 3 output To Drive winding nn conversion main LGC wincing circuit VATS Developer material Magnetic circuit 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 12 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC When the toner density is low Iron powder carrier in the developer material much Toner in the developer material little Magnetic resistance small detection output large auto toner output large When the toner density is high Iron powder carrier in the developer material little Toner in the developer material much Magnetic resistance large detection output small gt auto toner output Vars small DC voltage corresponding to toner density in the developer material auto toner output Vars Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 12 13 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 6 Disassembly and Replacement A Developer unit 1 Remove the upper inner cover 2 Turn the developer unit slide lever counterclockwise 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 4 Pull the developer unit toward the front B Developer material 1 Remove the developer unit 2 Remove the top cover 2 screws 3 Completely remove the old developer material while rotating the gear on the rear side plate 6570 5570 DEVELOPER UNIT 12 14
451. ve the cover on the rear side b Disconnect the connector on the system board side of the harness connecting the system board and PLG board 6 Remove upper exit cover and open the lower exit cover 7 Remove the slot cover on the inside of the up per exit cover 15 screws Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 8 Cover RL Connector A E 6570 5570 PRINTING 8 Disconnect the 4 connectors from the system board and remove the 2 screws to draw out the system electronics unit 9 Disconnect the 2 connectors on the PLG board and realy connector of the harness from the PLG board and remove the harness from the clamp 10 Remove the unit positioning stay 2 screws 11 Draw out the laser unit along the rail paying attention to where you are h
452. versal switch E58 Paper not passing the reversal switch E59 Paper not passing the exit switch E5A Paper not reaching the exit switch E5B ADU transport start timeout jam Original transporting jam at the E71 Original feeding jam at the feed section of the ADF ADF E72 Original transporting jam at the transport section of the ADF E73 Original exiting jam at the exit section of the ADF Mar 2000 TOSHIBA TEC 1 1 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADJUSTMENT Error code Machine status Finisher jam E9F Punch jam Paper jam at the finisher EA1 Transporting delay jam EA2 Transporting stationary jam Paper remaining in the finisher at power 4 Finisher front door opened during copying EA5 Staple jam EA6 Early arrival jam EA8 Finisher saddle stitcher staple jam EA9 Finisher saddle stitcher front door open jam EAA Paper remaining in the finisher at power ON EAB Finisher saddle stitcher transport stationary jam EAC Finisher saddle stitcher transport delay jam EAD Print end command time out jam EAE Finisher receive time out jam Paper transport jam inside the EB3 Finisher ready time out error copier 2 EB5 PSTPR L standby time out error EB6 PSTPR H standby time out error Paper feeding error C11 Duplexer side guide is abnormal Refer to page 1 4 C12 Duplexer stopper guide is abnormal C15 PFP upper tray is ab
453. voltage for charging and transfer and the developer bias voltage Function Remarks SNR ATC 300 auto toner sensor Senses the toner temperature by a magnetic sensor ASM GALVA galvanomirror Control the beam position PWA F FUS 351 fuse PC board Cuts out an over current of the damp heater THMS HTR 300 heat roller thermistor Detects the temperature of the heat roller SSR Switches the heater lamp Breaker Safety switch Noise filter Cuts out a noise signal Thermostat Protects over heating of the damp heater Thermostat 85 Protects the exposure lamp over heating THERMO 152 FUS fuser thermostat Protects the fuser unit over heating PS ACC 300JU switching power supply unit PS ACC 300E switching power supply unit Supplies electrical power For UC JPD For Europe Toner adhesion sensor Detects toner adhesion volume on the drum surface Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 2 Drum thermistor 29 Detects drum surface temperature 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 3 System Block Diagram JOIN E JOIN 2 JOLIN JOIN v a 10sueg gt jose posso 1
454. vue A3W AVuL JO1 ona rner VADIS ra LL Ronan WATT 189r T SUD tr MS 0334 ona OND AND AND NVJSAH aan aan aan aay VALGT vand aan aan Gad UND mal QNO NVSHLH Wed WE mm Tao Ga Ga MS 8000 401 gg ous HHHH ov enr enr Gr T ma d 40421 VI HOGOT nd 20 ES Em x av avo LES Eg EX D Low nav LK DRMTB OA LK DRMTD 0A BLK EXTSW IA BLK QNO E HTR MOT 8010034 viaisav Vidisav aan Yoo10uv E aNd EE vranaav vranaav aan vrasov Vransav Voandis voanais vosnais vand wonais vraa vomas vovnais ON aan Mene av Voanans wianava QNO voanana voanana VFINDEV wonava Vomans vivan voanass voviais 0 2 015 voanass YO3OXIS LOW VWMd DUCT OUT FAN SSR SUB JON AIS DRM MOT TRB MOT JONW ONI ov ov ow sv uv w ev ew zv viv 918 9197 UNO ano vranaov vi anaov PWA ADU ON 170 034 rz 637 2637 voo198v 110 198
455. ward165 exe from the above site and execute it Some files are created and then execute Setup exe Create the C WEBSHARE FTPROOT folder After that execute war ftpd exe in war ftpd folder OFFLINE WAR FTPD 1 65 xi Select Properties Security Edit User 5 12 default permissions pa 5 13 Double click Webshare Select Directory Inetpub Internet Explorer 4 01 SP1 Setup Multimedia Files Change Read Write Delete Execute List Create and Remove from Gray Check to Black Check Check Root Home and Recursive in Special box as follows And then click Apply and OK User maintenance dppe 5 14 To make the connection ONLINE mode click button before firmware downloading OFFLINE WAR FTPD 1 65 5 15 6 Manual for Firmware Download 3 119 Mode Operation 6 1 Outline Connect copier and PC with serial cable and turn the power on pressing 3 and 9 keys the copier goes into Firmware Version Up Mode Then you can update system software data and or UI data through the PC 6 2 Preparation of PC To update the firmware of copier the following preparations are necessary 6 2 1 Software Installation Virtual modem and War FTP Daemon have to be installed in your PC Please refer to Installation Instructions for Firmware Update through PC And also
456. witch j 222 wu V Q Mounting switch TA TK gt NN 1 NS o ex Belt transport zii EM OL 2 A 28 8 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 8 Slide the aligning unit to the front side and re move in the direction of the arrow Note When installing the aligning unit prevent the two leaf springs from becoming bent Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 9 9 6570 5570 PAPER FEED SYSTEM 9 3 Large Capacity Feeder LCF 9 3 1 Introduction For making large volumes of copies the large capacity feeder LCF is designed to stack about 4 000 sheets of copy paper The LCF consists of the following three main parts 1 Tray section D Elevator tray The elevator tray is designed to transport the stacks of paper to the paper feed mechanism The unit functions to keep the paper biased towards the feeding mechanism so that paper is always in contact with the feed rollers When paper supply is exhausted the tray will be low ered 2 Elevator mechanism The wire on either side of the elevator tray are wound around or un wound from around the wire winding pulley by the tray motor drive to move the elevator tray up and down 3 Switches
457. witch on the PFP tray up switches S30 834 and 538 LH the tray motors M27 M28 and M29 stop and the trays no longer move At this time if the PFP paper empty switches S29 S33 and S37 are OFF L there is assumed to be no paper and the PFP tray motors M27 M28 and M29 are switched ON in the CW direction lowering the trays When the paper empty switches S29 S33 and S37 aer ON it is assumed that there is paper in the tray and the tray stays in the raised position for two seconds If there is no copy request during this time the tray is lowered 2 If the cassette is not inserted when the power is switched ON the PFP tray motor for that level cannot be switched ON When the cassette is inserted the tray will rise and check for paper 3 If any of the paper stop switches S27 S31 or S35 are ON when the power is switched ON meaning that there is paper in the transprot mechanism the copier goes into a jam state and does not operate until the paper removed B Ready state 1 After the trays are checked for paper by the above tray movements the copier goes into the ready state In the ready state the trays are left in the lowered position 2 If the cassette is removed and inserted while in the ready state the tray movements are performed to check for paper C From copy start to copy completion 1 When the PRINT key is pressed the copier sets the CRUN copier running s
458. y called developer is coated with toner which has a minus negative charge Toner is attracted to the latent image on the drum surface on the areas whose surface po tential is lower than the developer bias voltage of the magnetic roller At this point the latent image becomes developed image Magnetic roller Toner Carrier always attracted on to the magnet When the d potential of the photosensitive drum is higher than the Bias voltage developer bias 400 VDC When the d potential of the photosensitive drum is lower than the developer bias Dum NO SE xis Photoconductor layer ROC base About Developing Agent Two materials comprise the Developing Agent developer the toner material and the carrier material The toner has a minus negative charge applied to it and the de veloper a plus polarity positive charge Mixing and agitating the carrier material dur ing the mixing process produces electrostatic charge of the material This action produces a plus polarity positive charge on the car 6570 5570 COPYING PROCESS 3 Drum Magnetic roller Intermediate tones White background Black solid 1L White background Image is not developed by bias potential C s Bias Image 16 developed by toner Voltage Ferrite Carbon 10 20 Resin 90 95 30 100 um Toner Carrier Mar 1999 TOSHIBA rier material Ton
459. y motor TRAY MOT Pedestal motor PFP MOT Feed motor FED MOT Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 2 23 6570 5570 OUTLINE G 4 electrical parts Lower unit Rear side SSR Breaker Noise filter Switching power supply unit for JPD PS ACC 300JU Switching power supply unit for EUR PS ACC 300E Power outlet Fuse holder FUSE HOLDER 6570 5570 OUTLINE 2 24 Mar 1999 TOSHIBA 2 2 Symbols and Functions of Components 1 Motors Name Function Remarks SCN MOT scanning motor Scans the optical system DCM MOT document motor Drives the copy range indicator OPT FAN MOT Cools the optical system scanning optical system cooling fan motor SLG FAN MOT Cools the SLG PC board SLG PC board cooling fan motor POL MOT polygon mirror motor Drives the polygon mirror LSU FAN MOT laser unit fan motor Cools the laser unit FAN SYS system fan motor Cools the system unit END MOT end guide motor Drives the ADU paper end guides SID MOT side guide motor Drives the ADU paper side guides FUR MOT fur brush motor Drives the fur brush CLN MOT main cleaning motor Drives the charger wire cleaner DRM MOT drum motor Drives the drum SFB FAN MOT manual inlet fan motor Sends air to the cleaner and charger TNR MOT toner motor Supplies toner AUG2 MOT toner transport motor Transport waste toner to the toner bag
460. y the ADU feed clutch to feed paper out to the ADU feed roller section If two or more sheets are fed out during this operation the ADU separation belt rotates in the reverse direction to draw the upper sheet s back onto the stack section The ADU feed roller and ADU separation belt are driven by the ADU feed clutch The holding gate also rotates at the same time as the pick up roller and functions to hold the paper on the stack section After the paper is fed out it passes through the ADU aligning roller is detected by the position detector switch located in the transport section and stops temporarily at the transport section initial alignment operation When paper stacking ends the paper that has been initially aligned is fed to and aligned by the aligning roller of the copier and copies are made on the side opposite to the initially copied side Paper that has been copied on both sides passes over the ADU exit switching gate that is already positioned in the exit direction and is output to the copy tray by the exit roller The paper on the stack section is fed successively from the bottom side This operation is repeated until all stacked paper is copied Mar 1999 TOSHIBA TEC 15 7A 8070 6570 5570 4580 ADU 1 The ADU feed switch detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper passing through the ADU feed roller It is also used for detecting paper jams 2 The ADU aligning switch detects the leading and trailing edges of the pap

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

bedienungsanleitung user manual mode d`emploi manual del usuario  GBC Card Pouch  品番 31210 品名 メインキー移設ステー  Shure 27B8735 User's Manual  Descargar - Multimagen  Samsung AW2-CD 22.5 cu.ft 3-Door French Door Refrigerator (Stainless Steel) User Manual  User Manual - Audio Authority  Wzzard™ Sensing Platform Bluetooth App  エココプター1号D：ECOCO-1D  Philips HP6407/02 Epilator  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file